ETOS®

ETOS®
Operating instructions
7815063/04 EN
© All rights reserved by Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen
Dissemination and reproduction of this document and use and disclosure of its content are strictly prohibited
unless expressly permitted.
Infringements will result in liability for compensation. All rights reserved in the event of the granting of patents,
utility models or designs.
The product may have been altered since this document was published.
We reserve the right to change the technical data, design and scope of supply.
Generally the information provided and agreements made when processing the individual quotations and orders
are binding.
The original operating instructions were written in German.
Table of contents
Table of contents
1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 12
1.1 Manufacturer..................................................................................................................................... 12
1.2 Completeness................................................................................................................................... 12
1.3 Safekeeping...................................................................................................................................... 12
1.4 Notation conventions ........................................................................................................................ 12
1.4.1 Hazard communication system ........................................................................................................................... 12
1.4.2 Information system.............................................................................................................................................. 14
1.4.3 Instruction system ............................................................................................................................................... 14
1.4.4 Typographic conventions .................................................................................................................................... 15
2 Safety................................................................................................................................. 16
2.1 Appropriate use ................................................................................................................................ 16
2.1.1 Motor-drive unit ................................................................................................................................................... 16
2.1.2 On-load tap-changer regulation .......................................................................................................................... 17
2.1.3 Bushing monitoring ............................................................................................................................................. 17
2.1.4 Vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-changer (VAM) ............................................................................. 18
2.2 Inappropriate use.............................................................................................................................. 19
2.2.2 Vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-changer (VAM) ............................................................................. 19
2.2.3 Internal power supply .......................................................................................................................................... 19
2.3 Fundamental safety instructions ....................................................................................................... 20
2.4 Personnel qualification...................................................................................................................... 23
2.5 Personal protective equipment ......................................................................................................... 24
3 IT security.......................................................................................................................... 25
3.1 General ............................................................................................................................................. 25
3.2 Commissioning ................................................................................................................................. 25
3.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................................... 26
3.4 Interfaces .......................................................................................................................................... 26
3.5 Encryption standards ........................................................................................................................ 29
4 Product description.......................................................................................................... 32

4.1 Scope of delivery .............................................................................................................................. 32
4.2 Function description.......................................................................................................................... 32
4.2.1 Motor-drive unit ................................................................................................................................................... 32
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2022 7815063/04 EN ETOS® 3

Table of contents
4.2.2 On-load tap-changer regulation .......................................................................................................................... 34

4.2.3 On-load tap-changer monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 35
4.2.4 Transformer monitoring....................................................................................................................................... 36
4.2.6 Cooling system control........................................................................................................................................ 37
4.2.7 Cooling system monitoring.................................................................................................................................. 38
4.2.8 Additional digital inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................... 38
4.2.9 Additional analog inputs and outputs .................................................................................................................. 38
4.2.10 TPLE ................................................................................................................................................................... 38
4.2.11 Communication ................................................................................................................................................... 39
4.3 Operating modes .............................................................................................................................. 40
4.3.1 Emergency operation during switching blocking (X100 bridge) .......................................................................... 41
4.4 Design............................................................................................................................................... 42
4.4.1 Control cabinet .................................................................................................................................................... 42
4.4.2 Gear motor (versions) ......................................................................................................................................... 69
4.4.3 Sensors ............................................................................................................................................................... 70
4.4.4 Nameplate........................................................................................................................................................... 73
4.5 Visualization...................................................................................................................................... 74
4.5.1 Main screen......................................................................................................................................................... 74
4.5.2 Additional operating controls and display elements when using the MControl touch panel (optional)................ 79
4.5.3 Operating concept............................................................................................................................................... 79
5 Packaging, transport and storage .................................................................................. 83

5.1 Packaging ......................................................................................................................................... 83
5.1.1 Suitability............................................................................................................................................................. 83
5.1.2 Markings.............................................................................................................................................................. 84
5.2 Transportation, receipt and handling of shipments........................................................................... 85
5.3 Storage of shipments........................................................................................................................ 86
5.4 Unpacking shipments and checking for transportation damages ..................................................... 87
6 Mounting ........................................................................................................................... 90

6.1 Lacquering the control cabinet (optional).......................................................................................... 90
6.2 Mounting the control cabinet............................................................................................................. 92
6.3 Mounting the control cabinet (vibration-damped design).................................................................. 95
6.4 Motor-drive unit................................................................................................................................. 99
6.4.1 Mounting drive shafts and bevel gear ................................................................................................................. 99
6.4.2 Centering on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit ........................................................................................ 100
4 ETOS® 7815063/04 EN Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2022

Table of contents
6.4.3 Connecting the gear motor................................................................................................................................ 107

6.5 Vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-changer (VAM)......................................................... 110
6.5.1 Mounting the vibration sensor ........................................................................................................................... 110
6.5.2 Connecting the vibration sensor to the control cabinet ..................................................................................... 111
6.5.3 Connecting the temperature sensor.................................................................................................................. 115
6.6 Bushing monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 116
6.6.1 Preparation........................................................................................................................................................ 116
6.6.2 Installing the bushing adapter ........................................................................................................................... 116
6.6.3 Installing the bushing coupling unit ................................................................................................................... 118
6.6.4 Connecting the bushing adapter to the bushing coupling unit .......................................................................... 121
6.6.5 Connecting the bushing coupling unit to the control cabinet............................................................................. 122
6.6.6 Connecting the voltage transformers for the reference system ........................................................................ 125
6.7 Connecting the control cabinet ....................................................................................................... 128
6.7.1 Cable recommendation ..................................................................................................................................... 128
6.7.2 Cable bushing in the base plate of the control cabinet ..................................................................................... 130
6.7.3 Electromagnetic compatibility............................................................................................................................ 135
6.7.4 Information about connecting serial interfaces RS232 and RS485................................................................... 137
6.7.5 Information on connecting to the CAN bus ....................................................................................................... 139
6.7.6 Information about connecting analog sensors .................................................................................................. 140
6.7.7 Information on connecting the socket circuit ..................................................................................................... 147
6.7.8 Information on connecting the power supply..................................................................................................... 147
6.8 Checking functional reliability ......................................................................................................... 149
7 Commissioning............................................................................................................... 150
7.1 Commissioning the ETOS® ED motor-drive unit............................................................................ 150
7.2 Commissioning the ISM® ............................................................................................................... 152
7.2.1 Establishing connection to visualization............................................................................................................ 152
7.2.3 Setting the language ......................................................................................................................................... 154
7.2.4 Commissioning wizard ...................................................................................................................................... 155
7.2.5 Configuring analog inputs and outputs (optional).............................................................................................. 156
7.2.6 Checking measured values and status of digital inputs and outputs ................................................................ 160
7.2.7 Checking the temperature measurement.......................................................................................................... 160
7.3 ETOS® ED motor-drive unit function test ....................................................................................... 162
7.3.1 Checking correct electric switch-off................................................................................................................... 162
7.3.2 Checking mechanical and electric end stop of on-load tap-changer/de-energized tap-changer and motor-drive
unit .................................................................................................................................................................... 162

Table of contents
7.3.3 Checking tripping of motor protective switch..................................................................................................... 163

7.4 ETOS® TD motor-drive unit function test ....................................................................................... 164
7.5 Tests on the transformer................................................................................................................. 164
7.5.1 High-voltage tests on the transformer ............................................................................................................... 164
7.5.2 Dielectric tests on transformer wiring ................................................................................................................ 165
7.6 Transporting transformer to the operating site................................................................................ 166
7.7 Commissioning the transformer at the operating site ..................................................................... 166
8 Operation......................................................................................................................... 167
8.1 System............................................................................................................................................ 167
8.1.3 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 169
8.1.4 Configuring the network .................................................................................................................................... 173
8.1.5 MQTT ................................................................................................................................................................ 176
8.1.6 Setting the device time...................................................................................................................................... 178
8.1.7 Configuring syslog............................................................................................................................................. 180
8.1.8 SCADA.............................................................................................................................................................. 181
8.1.9 Name plate........................................................................................................................................................ 208
8.1.10 Displaying measured value recorder (optional)................................................................................................. 210
8.1.11 Setting the measured value recorder ................................................................................................................ 211
8.1.12 Generic temperatures (optional) ....................................................................................................................... 213
8.1.13 Linking signals and events ................................................................................................................................ 213
8.1.14 MR sensor bus .................................................................................................................................................. 218
8.1.15 Configuring analog inputs and outputs (optional).............................................................................................. 228
8.1.16 Configuring digital inputs and outputs ............................................................................................................... 232
8.1.17 Event management ........................................................................................................................................... 234
8.1.18 User administration ........................................................................................................................................... 238
8.1.19 Hardware........................................................................................................................................................... 246
8.1.20 Software ............................................................................................................................................................ 248
8.1.21 Import/export manager...................................................................................................................................... 248
8.1.22 Configuring media converter with managed switch........................................................................................... 251
8.1.23 Transformer Personal Logic Editor (TPLE) ....................................................................................................... 257
8.2 Power grid....................................................................................................................................... 274
8.2.1 Transformer data............................................................................................................................................... 274
8.2.2 Measurement .................................................................................................................................................... 290
8.2.3 Voltage monitoring ............................................................................................................................................ 292

Table of contents
8.2.4 Current monitoring ............................................................................................................................................ 295

8.2.5 Power monitoring .............................................................................................................................................. 297
8.2.6 Power flow monitoring....................................................................................................................................... 299
8.2.7 Phase symmetry monitoring.............................................................................................................................. 302
8.2.8 TAPCON® 2xx retrofit....................................................................................................................................... 303
8.2.9 Displaying current measured values ................................................................................................................. 304
8.2.10 Displaying minimum and maximum measured values ...................................................................................... 305
8.3 On-load tap-changer regulator........................................................................................................ 306
8.3.1 Regulation ......................................................................................................................................................... 306
8.3.2 Voltage regulation (optional) ............................................................................................................................. 308
8.3.3 Reactive power regulation (optional)................................................................................................................. 319
8.3.4 Active power regulation (optional)..................................................................................................................... 323
8.3.5 Displaying control parameters........................................................................................................................... 327
8.3.6 Line drop compensation.................................................................................................................................... 327
8.3.7 Parallel operation (optional) .............................................................................................................................. 331
8.3.8 U bandwidth monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 343
8.3.9 Q bandwidth monitoring (optional) .................................................................................................................... 345
8.3.10 P bandwidth monitoring (optional)..................................................................................................................... 347
8.4 Active part....................................................................................................................................... 349
8.4.1 Asset intelligence .............................................................................................................................................. 349
8.4.2 Temperature monitoring.................................................................................................................................... 350
8.4.3 Displaying temperature curve (optional) ........................................................................................................... 350
8.4.4 Setting Tx statistics monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 351
8.4.5 Displaying winding temperatures (optional) ...................................................................................................... 352
8.4.6 Hot-spot calculation (optional)........................................................................................................................... 352
8.4.7 Hot-spot forecast (optional)............................................................................................................................... 356
8.4.8 Setting calculation of transformer's loss of life (optional) .................................................................................. 357
8.4.9 Dynamic Transformer Rating (optional) ............................................................................................................ 358
8.4.10 Dissolved gas analysis (optional)...................................................................................................................... 362
8.4.11 Monitoring the gas volume of the Buchholz relay (transformer)........................................................................ 372
8.4.12 Monitoring the oil pressure (transformer) .......................................................................................................... 373
8.5 On-load tap-changer....................................................................................................................... 374
8.5.1 Tap position monitoring (optional)..................................................................................................................... 374
8.5.2 Switching interval monitoring ............................................................................................................................ 375
8.5.3 Switching interval monitoring ............................................................................................................................ 377
8.5.4 Target-tap-position operation ............................................................................................................................ 378
8.5.5 Changing tap position designation (optional) .................................................................................................... 379

Table of contents
8.5.6 Setting the tap position message (optional) ...................................................................................................... 379

8.5.7 Displaying tap-change operation statistics (optional)........................................................................................ 381
8.5.8 Displaying information about contact wear (only OILTAP®) ............................................................................. 381
8.5.9 Maintenance (optional)...................................................................................................................................... 382
8.5.10 Torque monitoring (optional) ............................................................................................................................. 391
8.5.11 Performing trial tap-change operations ............................................................................................................. 396
8.5.12 Vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-changer (VAM) ........................................................................... 397
8.5.13 OLTC data......................................................................................................................................................... 402
8.5.14 Displaying power characteristics....................................................................................................................... 405
8.5.15 Monitoring the gas volume of the Buchholz relay (OLTC) ................................................................................ 406
8.5.16 Monitoring the oil pressure (on-load tap-changer) ............................................................................................ 407
8.5.17 Oil filter unit control ........................................................................................................................................... 407
8.5.18 Displaying the minimum and maximum tap position ......................................................................................... 412
8.5.19 Messages.......................................................................................................................................................... 412
8.6 Motor-drive unit and control cabinet ............................................................................................... 413
8.6.1 Actuating ETOS® ED........................................................................................................................................ 413
8.6.2 Actuating ETOS® TD ........................................................................................................................................ 415
8.6.3 Control of the motor-drive unit........................................................................................................................... 415
8.6.4 Drive overview................................................................................................................................................... 419
8.6.5 Motor Current Index (MCI) ................................................................................................................................ 421
8.6.6 Calibrating the position sensor.......................................................................................................................... 425
8.6.7 Synchronizing the motor-drive unit.................................................................................................................... 425
8.6.8 Control cabinet monitoring ................................................................................................................................ 428
8.7 Cooling system control (optional) ................................................................................................... 431
8.7.1 Configuring cooling stages................................................................................................................................ 431
8.7.2 Set the operating mode..................................................................................................................................... 433
8.7.3 Deactivating cooling system control.................................................................................................................. 433
8.7.4 Configuring load-dependent mode.................................................................................................................... 433
8.7.5 Configuring periodic mode ................................................................................................................................ 435
8.7.6 Configuring alternating mode ............................................................................................................................ 436
8.7.7 Configuring the frequency-based cooling system control ................................................................................. 437
8.7.8 Displaying status of cooling stages ................................................................................................................... 440
8.8 Cooling system monitoring (optional) ............................................................................................. 442
8.8.1 Setting the cooling system monitoring function................................................................................................. 442
8.8.2 Displaying status of cooling stages ................................................................................................................... 443
8.8.3 Cooling efficiency monitoring (optional) ............................................................................................................ 443
8.8.4 Cooling system flow monitoring (optional) ........................................................................................................ 445

Table of contents
8.9 Bushings ......................................................................................................................................... 450

8.9.1 Configuring bushing monitoring ........................................................................................................................ 450
8.9.2 Displaying the state of the bushings ................................................................................................................. 456
8.9.3 Displaying the capacitance progression............................................................................................................ 457
8.9.4 Show dissipation factor curve (MSENSE® BM-T) ............................................................................................ 458
8.10 Protective devices........................................................................................................................... 459
8.10.1 Displaying the measured values of the Buchholz relay (optional)..................................................................... 459
8.10.2 Displaying the measured values of the pressure relief device (optional) .......................................................... 459
8.10.3 Displaying protective device status (optional) ................................................................................................... 460
8.11 Insulating fluids ............................................................................................................................... 461
8.11.1 Displaying the measured value trend of the oil level and dehydrating breather (optional)................................ 461
9 Fault elimination ............................................................................................................. 462

9.1 Motor-drive unit fault elimination..................................................................................................... 462
9.1.1 Safety instructions............................................................................................................................................. 462
9.1.2 General information........................................................................................................................................... 462
9.1.3 Fault in the environment of the motor-drive unit................................................................................................ 463
9.1.4 Fault in the motor-drive unit when the tap-change operation has not been ended ........................................... 463
9.1.5 Fault in the motor-drive unit after the tap-change operation is ended correctly ................................................ 464
9.1.6 Hand crank operation in the event of faults....................................................................................................... 464
9.1.7 Motor-drive unit ................................................................................................................................................. 465
9.2 Fault elimination ISM (hardware and software) .............................................................................. 467
9.2.1 General faults.................................................................................................................................................... 467
9.2.2 Human-machine interface ................................................................................................................................. 467
9.2.3 Torque monitoring ............................................................................................................................................. 468
9.2.4 Temperature monitoring.................................................................................................................................... 471
9.2.5 Maintenance messages .................................................................................................................................... 475
9.2.6 Function monitoring........................................................................................................................................... 479
9.2.7 Other faults........................................................................................................................................................ 480
10 Inspection and maintenance ......................................................................................... 482

10.1 Care ................................................................................................................................................ 482
10.1.1 Cleaning the control cabinet.............................................................................................................................. 482
10.1.2 Cleaning the VS 1 vibration sensor................................................................................................................... 482
10.1.3 Cleaning the bushing adapter and the bushing coupling unit ........................................................................... 482
10.1.4 Cleaning the gear motor.................................................................................................................................... 482
10.2 Inspection ....................................................................................................................................... 483

Table of contents
10.3 Maintenance ................................................................................................................................... 484

10.3.1 Maintaining motor-drive unit.............................................................................................................................. 484
10.3.2 Heating maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 485
11 Removal........................................................................................................................... 486
11.1 Removing the drive shaft ................................................................................................................ 486
11.2 Disassembling gear motor .............................................................................................................. 487
11.3 Removing the bushing adapter and bushing coupling unit ............................................................. 487
11.4 Removing the control cabinet ......................................................................................................... 488
12 Technical data................................................................................................................. 490

12.1 Control cabinet................................................................................................................................ 490
12.2 Permissible ambient conditions ...................................................................................................... 490
12.3 Motor-drive unit............................................................................................................................... 490
12.3.1 Motor-drive unit (side drive) .............................................................................................................................. 490
12.3.2 Technical data for position transmitter equipment ............................................................................................ 491
12.3.3 Gear motor ........................................................................................................................................................ 492
12.4 Sensors........................................................................................................................................... 493
12.4.1 Vibroacoustics................................................................................................................................................... 493
12.4.2 Bushing monitoring ........................................................................................................................................... 493
12.5 ISM® assemblies............................................................................................................................ 499
12.5.1 Power supply QS3.241 ..................................................................................................................................... 499
12.5.2 Power supply CP5.241...................................................................................................................................... 499
12.5.3 Power supply PS............................................................................................................................................... 499
12.5.4 UI 1 voltage measurement and current measurement...................................................................................... 500
12.5.5 UI 3 voltage measurement and current measurement...................................................................................... 501
12.5.6 UI 5-3 voltage measurement and current measurement................................................................................... 502
12.5.7 UI 5-4 voltage measurement and current measurement................................................................................... 504
12.5.8 Voltage measurement U 3 ................................................................................................................................ 506
12.5.9 Current measurement I 3 .................................................................................................................................. 507
12.5.10 DIO 28-15 digital inputs and outputs................................................................................................................. 508
12.5.11 Digital inputs and outputs DIO 42-20 (HL) ........................................................................................................ 510
12.5.12 Digital inputs DI 16-24 V ................................................................................................................................... 512
12.5.13 Digital inputs DI 16-48 V ................................................................................................................................... 514
12.5.14 Digital inputs DI 16-110 V ................................................................................................................................. 515
12.5.15 Digital inputs DI 16-220 V ................................................................................................................................. 516
12.5.16 Digital outputs DO 8 .......................................................................................................................................... 518

Table of contents
12.5.17 AIO 2 analog inputs and outputs....................................................................................................................... 520

12.5.20 Analog inputs AI 4-T.......................................................................................................................................... 523
12.5.21 Analog inputs AI 4 ............................................................................................................................................. 524
12.5.22 Analog outputs AO 4 ......................................................................................................................................... 525
12.5.23 CPU (central processing unit) I ......................................................................................................................... 526
12.5.24 CPU (central processing unit) II ........................................................................................................................ 528
12.5.25 CPU (central processing unit) .......................................................................................................................... 531
12.5.26 System networking MC 2-2 ............................................................................................................................... 533
12.5.27 System networking SW 3-3............................................................................................................................... 534
12.5.28 System networking COM-ETH .......................................................................................................................... 535
12.5.29 System networking BEM1/BES1....................................................................................................................... 536
12.5.30 System networking BES.................................................................................................................................... 536
12.5.31 VI 4 vibration sensor input module.................................................................................................................... 537
12.6 Standards and directives ................................................................................................................ 538
13 Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 539

13.1 101334990...................................................................................................................................... 540
13.2 101334970...................................................................................................................................... 541
13.3 101335000...................................................................................................................................... 542
13.4 101334980...................................................................................................................................... 543
Glossary .......................................................................................................................... 544
List of key words ............................................................................................................ 546

1 Introduction
1 Introduction
This technical file contains detailed descriptions on the safe and proper in-
stallation, connection, commissioning and monitoring of the product.
It also includes safety instructions and general information about the prod-
uct.
This technical file is intended solely for specially trained and authorized per-
sonnel.
1.1 Manufacturer
The product is manufactured by:
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH
Falkensteinstraße 8
93059 Regensburg
Tel.: (+49) 9 41/40 90-0
E-mail: sales@reinhausen.com
Further information on the product and copies of this technical file are avail-
able from this address if required.
1.2 Completeness
This technical file is incomplete without the supporting documents.
The following documents also apply in addition to this technical file:

▪ Quick reference guide
▪ Connection diagrams
▪ Routine test report
▪ Supplement
Also observe generally valid legislation, standards, and guidelines as well as

specifications on accident prevention and environmental protection in the re-
spective country of use.
1.3 Safekeeping
Keep this technical file and all supporting documents ready at hand and ac-
cessible for future use at all times.
1.4 Notation conventions
1.4.1 Hazard communication system

Warnings in this technical file are displayed as follows.

1 Introduction
1.4.1.1 Warning relating to section
Warnings relating to sections refer to entire chapters or sections, sub-sec-

tions or several paragraphs within this technical file. Warnings relating to
sections use the following format:
WARNING Type of danger!

Source of the danger and outcome.
► Action
► Action
1.4.1.2 Embedded warning information
Embedded warnings refer to a particular part within a section. These warn-

ings apply to smaller units of information than the warnings relating to sec-
tions. Embedded warnings use the following format:
DANGER! Instruction for avoiding a dangerous situation.
1.4.1.3 Signal words and pictograms
The following signal words are used:

Signal word Definition
DANGER Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result
in death or serious injury.
CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result
in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE Indicates measures to be taken to prevent damage to property.
Table 1: Signal words in warning notices

1 Introduction
Pictograms warn of dangers:

Pictogram Definition
Warning of a danger point
Warning of dangerous electrical voltage
Warning of combustible substances
Warning of danger of tipping
Warning of danger of crushing
Table 2: Pictograms used in warning notices
1.4.2 Information system

Information is designed to simplify and improve understanding of particular
procedures. In this technical file it is laid out as follows:
Important information.
1.4.3 Instruction system

This technical file contains single-step and multi-step instructions.
Single-step instructions
Instructions which consist of only a single process step are structured as fol-
lows:

1 Introduction
Aim of action
ü Requirements (optional).
► Step 1 of 1.
ð Result of step (optional).
ð Result of action (optional).
Multi-step instructions
Instructions which consist of several process steps are structured as follows:
Aim of action
ü Requirements (optional).
1. Step 1.
2. Step 2.
ð Result of action (optional).
1.4.4 Typographic conventions

Typographic convention Purpose Example
UPPERCASE Operating controls, switches ON/OFF
[Brackets] PC keyboard [Ctrl] + [Alt]
Bold Software operating controls Press Continue button
…>…>… Menu paths Parameter > Control parameter
Italics System messages, error messages, Function monitoring alarm triggered
signals
[► Number of pages] Cross reference [► Page 41].
Dotted underscore
............................................. Glossary entry, abbreviations, defini- Glossary entry
........................
tions, etc.
Table 3: Typographic conventions used in this technical file

2 Safety
2 Safety
▪ Read this technical file through to familiarize yourself with the product.
▪ This technical file is a part of the product.
▪ Read and observe the safety instructions provided in this chapter.
▪ Read and observe the warnings in this technical file in order to avoid func-
tion-related dangers.
▪ The product is manufactured on the basis of state-of-the-art technology.
Nevertheless, risks to life and limb for the user or impairment of the prod-
uct and other material assets due to the function may arise in the event of
improper use.
2.1 Appropriate use

The ETOS® product (Embedded Transformer Operating System) is a modu-
lar system for controlling, regulating and monitoring a transformer. The com-
ponents necessary for this are installed in a housing. Depending on your or-
der, the product is equipped with various function packages.
The product is designed solely for use in stationary industrial large-scale

electrical energy systems and facilities. If used as intended, in compliance
with the requirements and conditions specified in this technical document
and observing the warning notices in this technical document and attached
to the product, the product does not pose a risk of injury or damage to prop-
erty or the environment. This applies throughout the service life of the prod-
uct, from delivery, installation and operation to removal and disposal.
The following is considered appropriate use:

▪ Operate the product in accordance with this technical document, the
agreed-upon delivery conditions and the technical data.
▪ Ensure that all necessary work is performed by qualified personnel only.
▪ Only use the equipment and special tools included in the scope of delivery
for the intended purpose and in accordance with the specifications of this
technical document.
▪ Only operate the product in industrial areas. Observe the notices in this
technical document regarding electromagnetic compatibility and the tech-
nical data.
2.1.1 Motor-drive unit

The motor-drive unit function package is used to adjust the operating posi-
tion of on-load tap-changers in regulating transformers to the individual oper-
ating requirements.

2 Safety
The following is considered appropriate use of the motor-drive unit function

package:
▪ Use the product only with the transformer/on-load tap-changer/de-ener-
gized tap-changer specified in the order.
▪ You will find the standard valid for the product and the year of issue on the
nameplate.
▪ The serial numbers of on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-changer
and on-load tap-changer accessories / de-energized tap-changer acces-
sories (drive, drive shaft, bevel gear, protective relay etc.) must match if
these products are supplied as a set for one order.
▪ Electrically operate the motor-drive unit remotely during normal operation.
▪ In special operating cases (such as during maintenance tasks), the motor-
drive unit can also be operated electrically on site via control switch S3.
▪ Never operate the motor-drive unit electrically or with the hand crank be-
fore the transformer has been disconnected if you think there may be a
fault in the transformer or the on-load tap-changer/de-energized tap-
changer. For more information, refer to the "Troubleshooting" chapter.
▪ The provided hand crank is for activating the motor-drive unit during in-
stallation and tests in the transformer plant or during maintenance tasks if
the transformer has been disconnected.
▪ For details about using the hand crank in emergency operation when the
transformer is energized, refer to the "Operation" chapter.
2.1.2 On-load tap-changer regulation

The on-load tap-changer regulation function package is used to automati-
cally adjust the tap position of an on-load tap-changer with motor-drive unit.
2.1.3 Bushing monitoring

The bushing monitoring function package is used to monitor capacitance-
graded bushings on power transformers in the Um = 66...420 kV voltage lev-
els (other voltage ranges available upon request). You can use the product
to detect sparkovers at partial capacitances in the bushing and to monitor
aging in the bushings.
The following is considered appropriate use of the bushing monitoring func-

tion package:
▪ Use the product only with the bushings specified in the order.
▪ Use the product only for high-voltage bushings of a power transformer
subject to similar installation conditions and thermal loads.
▪ Use the product only for bushings of the same type (manufacturer, series,
technology, model year).
▪ Use the product only for bushings that were not previously damaged.

2 Safety
▪ This device is intended for indoor use in non-hazardous areas and should
be operated only by qualified personnel who are familiar with its use. The
switch-off device is part of the end application.
▪ The device is intended for installation. Protection against the spread of fire
and protection against electric shock must be fulfilled in the end applica-
tion. Resistance to mechanical stress must be fulfilled in the end applica-
tion.
2.1.4 Vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-changer (VAM)

The vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-changer (VAM) function
package is used for monitoring on-load tap-changers on power transformers/
reactors. You can use the product to detect time and amplitude anomalies in
the progression of the vibro-acoustic signal sent by the on-load tap-changer
and to receive event messages when anomalies are detected.
The following is considered appropriate use of the VAM function package:

▪ Only use the product with the on-load tap-changer and the motor-drive
unit specified in the order.
▪ Only use the product for on-load tap-changers that have not already been
damaged.
▪ Only use the product on transformers with insulated add-on parts after ap-
proval by Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH (special version required).

2 Safety
2.2 Inappropriate use

Use is considered to be inappropriate if you use the product other than as
described in the "Appropriate use" section.

Note the following information on inappropriate use of the bushing monitor-
ing function package:
▪ The product is not suited for extending the permitted service life of the
bushing specified by the bushing manufacturer.
▪ The product is not a protective device. Do not use it to handle safety-re-
lated functions.
▪ The product is not intended for use in environments subject to strong cor-
rosion effects.
▪ Do not connect the product components to measurement systems from
other manufacturers, because this can lead to bushing monitoring errors.

Note the following information on inappropriate use of the vibro-acoustic
monitoring of the on-load tap-changer (VAM) function package:
▪ The product is not suitable for extending the permitted service life of the
on-load tap-changer specified by the on-load tap-changer manufacturer.
▪ The product is not a protective device. Do not use it to handle safety-re-
lated functions.
▪ The product is not intended for use in environments subject to strong cor-
rosion effects.
2.2.3 Internal power supply

Do not use the power supply units which are used to supply the internal as-
semblies in the control cabinet to supply external circuits.

2 Safety
2.3 Fundamental safety instructions

To prevent accidents, malfunctions and damage as well as unacceptable ad-
verse effects on the environment, those responsible for transport, installa-
tion, operation, maintenance and disposal of the product or parts of the prod-
uct must ensure the following:
Personal protective equipment
Loosely worn or unsuitable clothing increases the danger of becoming

trapped or caught up in rotating parts and the danger of getting caught on
protruding parts. This poses a danger to life and limb.
▪ Wear appropriate personal protective equipment such as a helmet, work
gloves, etc. for the respective activity.
▪ Never wear damaged personal protective equipment.
▪ Never wear rings, necklaces, or other jewelry.
▪ If you have long hair, wear a hairnet.
Work area
Untidy and poorly lit work areas can lead to accidents.

▪ Keep the work area clean and tidy.
▪ Make sure that the work area is well lit.
▪ Observe the applicable laws for accident prevention in the relevant coun-
try.
Drying the transformer
Drying the motor-drive unit will cause damage to property as well as motor-
drive unit malfunctions.
▪ Never dry the motor-drive unit.
Working during operation
The product may only be operated in a sound, operational condition. Other-

wise it poses a danger to life and limb.
▪ Regularly check the operational reliability of safety equipment.
▪ Comply with the inspection work, maintenance work and maintenance in-
tervals described in this technical file.

2 Safety
Invisible laser radiation
Looking directly into the beam or the reflected beam can cause eye damage.
The beam is emitted at the optical connections or at the end of the fiber-optic
cables connected to them on the assemblies. Read the chapter "Technical
Data" for further information.
▪ Never look directly into the beam or the reflected beam.
▪ Never look into the beam with the aid of optical instruments such as a
magnifying glass or a microscope.
▪ In the event that the laser beam strikes your eyes, close your eyes imme-
diately and move your head out of the path of the beam.
Working with current transformers
Dangerous high voltages may occur when a current transformer is operated

with an open secondary circuit. This can lead to injuries and property dam-
age.
▪ Never operate a current transformer with an open secondary circuit; short-
circuit the current transformer to prevent this.
▪ Observe the information in the current transformer operating instructions.
Handling electrical components
Electrical components can be damaged by electrostatic discharge.

▪ Never touch electrical components during commissioning, operation or
maintenance work.
▪ Take suitable measures (such as covers) to ensure that personnel cannot
touch components.
▪ Wear suitable personal protective equipment.
Hand crank aperture
Reaching into the hand crank aperture during a tap-change operation may
lead to injuries caused by a rotating drive shaft.
▪ Never reach into the hand crank aperture.
Securing the motor-drive unit
If you open the motor-drive unit during operation, there is a danger of electric
shock due to live components behind the swing frame.
▪ Secure the motor-drive unit against unauthorized opening during opera-
tion by using a padlock.
▪ The motor-drive unit may only be opened by an electrically skilled person.
Opening the swing frame
Opening the swing frame while the motor-drive unit is in operation may result
in electric shocks due to live components.
▪ The swing frame may only be opened by an electrically skilled person.

2 Safety
Explosion protection
Highly flammable or explosive gases, vapors and dusts can cause serious
explosions and fire. This increases the danger to life and limb.
▪ Do not install, operate or perform maintenance work on the product in ar-
eas where a risk of explosion is present.
Safety markings
Warning signs and safety information plates are safety markings on the
product. They are an important aspect of the safety concept.
▪ Observe all safety markings on the product.
▪ Make sure all safety markings on the product remain intact and legible.
▪ Replace safety markings that are damaged or missing.
Ambient conditions
To ensure reliable and safe operation, the product must only be operated
under the ambient conditions specified in the technical data.
▪ Observe the specified operating conditions and requirements for the in-
stallation location.
Auxiliary materials and operating materials
Auxiliary materials and operating materials not approved by the manufac-

turer can lead to personal injury, damage to property and malfunctions of the
product.
▪ Only use conductive and grounded hoses, pipes, and pump equipment
that are approved for flammable liquids.
▪ Only use lubricants and auxiliary materials approved by the manufacturer.
▪ Contact the manufacturer.
Modifications and conversions
Unauthorized or inappropriate changes to the product may lead to personal

injury, material damage and operational faults.
▪ Only modify the product after consultation with Maschinenfabrik Rein-
hausen GmbH.
Spare parts
Spare parts not approved by Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH may lead

to physical injury, damage to the product and malfunctions.
▪ Only use spare parts that have been approved by Maschinenfabrik Rein-
hausen GmbH.
▪ Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.

2 Safety
2.4 Personnel qualification

The person responsible for assembly, commissioning, operation, mainte-
nance and inspection must ensure that the personnel are sufficiently quali-
fied.
Electrically skilled person
The electrically skilled person has a technical qualification and therefore has
the required knowledge and experience, and is also conversant with the ap-
plicable standards and regulations. The electrically skilled person is also pro-
ficient in the following:
▪ Can identify potential dangers independently and is able to avoid them.
▪ Is able to perform work on electrical systems.
▪ Is specially trained for the working environment in which (s)he works.
▪ Must satisfy the requirements of the applicable statutory regulations for
accident prevention.
Electrically trained persons
An electrically trained person receives instruction and guidance from an

electrically skilled person in relation to the tasks undertaken and the poten-
tial dangers in the event of inappropriate handling as well as the protective
devices and safety measures. The electrically trained person works exclu-
sively under the guidance and supervision of an electrically skilled person.
Operator
The operator uses and operates the product in line with this technical file.
The operating company provides the operator with instruction and training
on the specific tasks and the associated potential dangers arising from im-
proper handling.
Technical Service
We strongly recommend having maintenance, repairs and retrofitting carried

out by our Technical Service department. This ensures that all work is per-
formed correctly. If maintenance is not carried out by our Technical Service
department, please ensure that the personnel who carry out the mainte-
nance are trained and authorized by Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH to
carry out the work.
Authorized personnel
Authorized personnel are trained by Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH to

carry out special maintenance.

2 Safety
2.5 Personal protective equipment

Personal protective equipment must be worn during work to minimize risks to
health.
▪ Always wear the personal protective equipment required for the job at
hand.
▪ Never wear damaged personal protective equipment.
▪ Observe information about personal protective equipment provided in the
work area.
Protective clothing Close-fitting work clothing with a low tearing strength,
with tight sleeves and with no protruding parts. It mainly
serves to protect the wearer against being caught by
moving machine parts.
Safety shoes To protect against falling heavy objects and slipping on
slippery surfaces.
Safety glasses To protect the eyes from flying parts and splashing liq-
uids.
Visor To protect the face from flying parts and splashing liq-
uids or other dangerous substances.
Hard hat To protect against falling and flying parts and materials.
Hearing protection To protect against hearing damage.
Protective gloves To protect against mechanical, thermal, and electrical
hazards.
Table 4: Personal protective equipment

3 IT security
3 IT security
Observe the following recommendations to operate the product safely.
3.1 General
▪ Ensure that only authorized personnel have access to the device.
▪ Only use the device within an ESP (electronic security perimeter). Do not
connect the device to the Internet in an unprotected state. Use mecha-
nisms for vertical and horizontal network segmentation and security gate-
ways (firewalls) at the transition points.
▪ Ensure that the device is only operated by trained personnel who are fa-
miliar with IT security.
▪ Check regularly whether software updates are available for the device and
perform the updates.
3.2 Commissioning
Observe the following recommendations for device commissioning:
▪ User IDs must be unique and assignable. Do not use a "Group account"
function or the "Auto login" function.
▪ Activate the "Auto logout [►Section 8.1.3.2, Page 171]" function.
▪ Restrict the rights of the individual user groups as much as is feasible; this
helps avoid errors during operations. A user with the "Operator" role, for
example, should only perform operations and should not be able to
change any device settings.
▪ Delete or disable the default "admin" user ID. This requires first creating a
new user account with the "Administrator" role. You can then use it to
delete or disable the default "admin" account.
▪ Deactivate service user access [►Section 8.1.3.3, Page 172].
▪ Enable SSL/TLS encryption [►Section 8.1.3, Page 169]; access to the
device is then only possible using the SSL/TLS protocol. In addition to en-
crypting communication, this protocol also checks the authenticity of the
server.
▪ Use TLS version 1.2 or higher wherever possible.
▪ Integrate the device into a public key infrastructure. Create your own SSL
certificates for this if necessary and then import them.
▪ Connect the device to a central log server by using the syslog interface
[►Section 8.1.7, Page 180].
▪ Only use the [►Section 8.1.3.4, Page 173]SNMP function if you can en-
sure that the communication is protected by external security equipment.
▪ Media converter with managed switch (assembly SW 3-3) [►Section
8.1.22, Page 251]:
– Change user account and password.
– Disable unnecessary services.

3 IT security
3.3 Operation
Observe the following recommendations during device operation:
▪ Change the password at regular intervals.
▪ Export the security log [►Section 8.1.21.1, Page 248] at regular intervals.
▪ Check the log files regularly for unauthorized system access and other se-
curity-related events.
▪ Media converter with managed switch (assembly SW 3-3): Check at regu-
lar intervals whether the manufacturer Belden/Hirschmann has released
an update for the product “EES 25” and, where necessary, perform a
firmware update [►Section 8.1.22.3, Page 255].
3.4 Interfaces
The device uses the following interfaces for communication:
CPU
RUN
INIT
9
9
COM 1
CAN 1
CAN 2
ERR
2 4 6
0 8 L
1
E C A
2 4 6
8 H
C A
TEST
9
PROG
COM 2
RUN
USB2.0
24V DC
ETH 1 ETH 2.1 ETH 2.2

+
-
Figure 1: CPU assembly interfaces
Interface Protocol Port Description

CAN 1 - - DIO assembly connection
CAN 2 - - Communication with other ISM® devices
(e.g. parallel operation)
COM 1 - - Internal system interface
COM 2 - - Serial interface (SCADA)
USB - - Import or export of data
ETH 1 TCP 80 HTTP for web-based visualization1), 2)
ETH 1 TCP 443 HTTPS for web-based visualization2)
ETH 1 TCP 102 IEC 61850
ETH 1 TCP 502 Modbus3)
ETH 1 TCP 20000 DNP33)

3 IT security

ETH 1 UDP 161 SNMP4)
ETH 2.x TCP 21 FTP1) (only for MR service)
ETH 2.x TCP 80 HTTP for web-based visualization1)
ETH 2.x TCP 443 HTTPS for web-based visualization
ETH 2.x TCP 990 FTPS (only for MR service)
ETH 2.x TCP 8080 HTTP for web-based visualization1)
ETH 2.x TCP 8081 HTTPS for web-based visualization
ETH 2.x UDP 161 SNMP4)
Table 5: Interfaces and open ports of the CPU assembly
1)
Port is closed if you activate the device's SSL encryption.
2)
Depending on the setting of the parameter Visualization release [►Page
175].
3)
Default setting; if you have modified the port for the control system proto-
col, only the set port is open.
4)
Depending on the setting of the SNMP agent [►Page 173] parameter.
Figure 2: Assembly SW 3-3 interfaces

ETH 2.3, TCP 22 SSH1)
ETH 2.4
23 Telnet1)
80 HTTP for web-based visualization1)
443 HTTPS for web-based visualization1)
UDP 161 SNMP1)
Table 6: Interfaces and open ports of the SW 3-3 assembly

3 IT security
1)
Port is closed if the corresponding service is disabled.
CP - 8050
RS-232
X5
SICAM A8000
RS-485
X4
ETH
X3
RY ER
ETH
X2
2
X1
1
Figure 3: CPU assembly interfaces

X2 TCP 102 IEC 61850
X2 TCP 502 Modbus1)
X2 TCP 20000 DNP31)
X2 TCP 2404 IEC 60870-5-1041)
X2 UDP 123 SNTP
X2 - - Bus extension (optional)
X3 TCP 80 HTTP for web-based visualization2)
X3 TCP 443 HTTPS for web-based visualization
X3 TCP 22 SSH (only for MR Service)3)
X3 UDP/TCP 514 Syslog
X4 - - Serial interface (SCADA)
X5 - - Serial interface (SCADA)
Table 7: Interfaces and open ports of the CPU assembly
1)
Default setting; if you have modified the port for the control system proto-
col, only the set port is open.
2)
Port is closed if you activate the device's SSL encryption.
3)
Port is closed if you deactivate the Service user access [►Section 8.1.3.3,
Page 172].

3 IT security
CI - 8520
ETH
X5
SICAM A8000
ETH
X4
ETH
X3
RY ER
ETH
X2
ETH
X1
Figure 4: COM-ETH assembly interfaces

X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
Table 8: Interfaces and open ports of the COM-ETH assembly
3.5 Encryption standards

The device supports the following TLS versions:
▪ TLS 1.0
▪ TLS 1.1
▪ TLS 1.2

3 IT security
The device uses the following cipher suites for a TLS-secured connection:
Key exchange Authentication Encryption Key length Operating Hash func-
mode tion
TLS ECDHE RSA WITH AES 128 CBC SHA1)
DHE SHA265
ECDHE ECDSA GCM SHA256
ECDH 256 CBC SHA1)
RSA1) SHA256
GCM SHA384
Table 9: Cipher suite
1)
Not available with TLS version >= 1.2
The device uses the SHA256 hash function to save passwords.
The SW 3-3 assembly supports the following TLS version:

▪ TLS 1.2
The assembly uses the following cipher suites for a TLS-secured connec-
tion:
Key exchange Authentication Encryption Key length Operating Hash func-
mode tion
TLS ECDHE RSA WITH AES 128 GCM SHA265
DHE CBC SHA
Table 10: Cipher suite
The device uses the following encryption standards in accordance with tech-
nical directive TR-02102-4 from Germany's Federal Office for Information
Security:
▪ Key agreement:
– diffie-hellman-group1-sha1
– diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha256
– ecdh-sha2-nistp256
▪ Server authentication:
– ssh-rsa
– rsa-sha2-512
– rsa-sha2-256

3 IT security
▪ Encryption algorithms:
– aes128-ctr
– aes128-gcm@openssh.com
– chacha20-poly1305@openssh.com
▪ MAC protection:
– hmac-sha1
– hmac-sha2-256
– hmac-sha1-etm@openssh.com
– hmac-sha2-256-etm@openssh.com
▪ Compression:
– None
– zlib@openssh.com
– Zlib

4 Product description
4.1 Scope of delivery

▪ Control cabinet
▪ Product documentation
▪ Gear motor (pre-installed on the on-load tap-changer)
▪ Connection cable
▪ For each bushing to be monitored (3 or 6):
– Bushing adapter
– Connection cable for the bushing adapter and bushing coupling unit
– Bushing coupling unit
– Set of fasteners for the bushing coupling unit
– Connection cable for the bushing coupling unit and the control cabinet
▪ Vibration sensor VS 1 with adapter and kick guard
▪ Sensor cable
▪ Terminating resistor for CAN bus
Please note the following:

1. Check the shipment for completeness using the shipping documents.
2. Store the parts in a dry place until installation.
3. The product must remain in its airtight, protective wrapping and may only
be removed immediately before installation.
4.2 Function description

The ETOS® product (Embedded Transformer Operating System) is a modu-
lar system for controlling, regulating and monitoring a transformer. The com-
ponents necessary for this are installed in a housing. Depending on your or-
der, the product is equipped with various function packages.

The motor-drive unit function package is used to adjust the operating posi-
tion of on-load tap-changers in regulating transformers to the individual oper-
ating requirements.
Side Drive
The tap-change operation is initiated by activating the motor-drive unit (a sin-

gle control impulse is triggered, for example via the optional "On-load tap-
changer regulation" function package). This adjustment operation is always
completed regardless of any other control impulses issued during the tap-
change operation. In the standard design, the next tap-change operation can
only proceed once all control devices have reached their resting positions.

Behavior in the event of a voltage interruption
On-load tap-changes are only possible if the controller is ready for operation.
Should the voltage be interrupted during an on-load tap-change operation,
once the voltage supply returns, the motor-drive unit completes the started
on-load tap-change operation.
Top Drive
The on-load tap-changer is delivered with a pre-installed gear motor that is

controlled by an electronic control unit. The electronic control unit is located
in a control cabinet and is connected to the gear motor via a connection ca-
ble.
A complex installation of drive shafts and bevel gears and the associated
coupling and centering of the individual modules is not required for the
ETOS® TD.
The motor-drive unit control unit can be configured and the measured values
and results can be displayed using the web-based visualization. Here, the
functional scope is based on the ordered product version.
Figure 5: ETOS® TD and on-load tap-changer on one power transformer
On-load tap-changes are only possible if the controller is ready for operation.
4.2.1.1 Motor-drive unit active power measurement (option)
The device can be equipped with an optional assembly for measuring the
active power of the motor-drive unit. This assembly transmits the active
power to the device as an analog signal (4…20 mA).

The device can transmit the measured active power via the control system.
Moreover, the device triggers an event message if the analog signal is not
within the permissible range (4…20 mA).
4.2.2 On-load tap-changer regulation

The on-load tap-changer regulation function package is used to automati-
cally adjust the tap position of an on-load tap-changer with motor-drive unit.
▪ Automatic voltage regulation
– 1 desired value
– Delay time T1 (linear)
▪ Automatic voltage regulation
– 3 desired values or TDSC
– Delay time T1 (linear/integral) und delay time T2
▪ Parallel operation
▪ Line drop compensation
▪ Reactive power regulation
▪ Active power regulation
▪ Limit value monitoring
– Voltage U<, U>
– Current I<, I>
▪ Limit value monitoring
– Voltage U<<, U<, U>, U>>
– Current I<<, I<, I>, I>>
– Power S<<, S<, S>, S>>, P<<, P<, P>, P>>, Q<<, Q<, Q>, Q>>
– Phase angle cosφ<, cosφ<<
▪ Bandwidth monitoring
▪ Function monitoring
4.2.2.1 Power regulation (optional)
If your device is equipped with the optional power regulation function, you
can regulate the active power or reactive power of a transformer with on-
load tap-changer. The device measures the active power or reactive power
and compares it to the desired value set. The difference between the mea-
sured value and the desired value is the control deviation. If the control devi-
ation is greater than the set bandwidth, the device triggers a tap-change op-
eration.

Note the following function limitations if your device is equipped with the
power regulation function:
▪ Parallel operation is only possible with the tap synchronization method for
both the voltage regulation and for the power regulation.
▪ The line drop compensation only has an effect on the voltage regulation.
▪ The "Active power-dependent adjustment of desired voltage
value" (TDSC) function only has an effect on the voltage regulation.
4.2.3 On-load tap-changer monitoring

The on-load tap-changer monitoring function package is used for monitoring
on-load tap-changers on power transformers/reactors. It contains the follow-
ing functions:
▪ Motor-drive unit status (motor protective switch, motor is running)
▪ Tap-change statistics of on-load tap-changer
▪ Maintenance interval calculation
▪ OLTC temperature monitoring
▪ On-load tap-changer oil level
▪ Contact wear calculation (only for OILTAP® V, M, R, RM, MS, G)
▪ Oil carbonization (only for OILTAP® V, M, R)
▪ Motor Current Index
▪ Vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-changer
▪ Torque monitoring
4.2.3.1 Vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-changer (VAM)
The vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-changer (VAM) function

package is used for monitoring on-load tap-changers on power transformers/
reactors. You can use the product to detect time and amplitude anomalies in
the progression of the vibro-acoustic signal sent by the on-load tap-changer
and to receive event messages when anomalies are detected.
The on-load tap-changer is equipped with measuring equipment through

which the system records and analyses the vibro-acoustic signal throughout
the tap change sequence. In addition, the system determines the changed
tap position and the oil temperature in the on-load tap-changer.
Using the implemented algorithms, the monitoring system can reliably detect
any potential anomalies that occur in the vibro-acoustic signal progression,
taking the temperature variations of the on-load tap-changer oil into account.
In addition, the system also includes a self-learning function for limit value
adjustment at oil temperatures above 15°C.
You must perform approximately 5 tap-change operations per evaluation

cluster (e.g. 5x from step 1 to step 2 in reverse tap-change operation) be-
fore the device can display the first limit value curve.

Status message
The MSENSE® VAM monitoring system produces a 3-stage status mes-

sage:
Status Device/visualization dis- SCADA/digital output re-
play mote signaling
Normal OK message through blue No remote signaling
status message
Warning The first and the second No remote signaling
anomalies in an evaluation
cluster are indicated via a
yellow status message in
the VAM analysis (Infor-
mation menu).
Alarm A third anomaly arising in This event message is
an evaluation cluster or transmitted to a connected
the third successive anom- SCADA system.
aly triggers an additional In addition, it can also be
event message (Events sent to a digital output.
menu).
4.2.4 Transformer monitoring

The transformer monitoring function package is used for monitoring the
transformer. It contains the following functions:
▪ Asset intelligence
▪ Temperature monitoring
– Ambient temperature
– Top-oil temperature
– Bottom-oil temperature (optional)
– Calculation of the hot-spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7
or IEEE C57.91
– Calculation of paper moisture content
– Calculation of the bubbling temperature
– Calculation of the transformer overload capability (emergency opera-
tion)
▪ Gas in oil analysis
▪ Winding temperature measurement

The bushing monitoring function package is used to monitor capacitance
graded bushings on power transformers. You can use the product to detect
breakdowns at partial capacitances in the bushings and to monitor aging in
the bushings.

To determine the state of the bushing, the bushings are equipped with a
measuring device which the system uses to continuously measures the
change in capacitance ΔC1 of the bushings during operation.
Depending on the device configuration, the system can measure the voltage
of the 3-phase reference system and determine the change in the dissipation
factor Δtanδ of the bushings. In the version with constant reference system,
the reference voltage is set as a parameter and is not measured.
The monitoring system takes advantage of the implemented algorithms to

largely compensate for voltage fluctuations and temperature fluctuations in
the 3-phase system, thereby ensuring reliable monitoring for the bushings.
Figure 6: Operating principle (with the option "Reference measuring")
Bushing monitoring with constant reference system (optional)
The "Bushing monitoring with constant reference system" option is used to

monitor the bushings in systems in which it is not possible to measure the
voltage of the reference system. The system uses a constant reference grid
voltage for this. The angle between phases is a constant 120°.
If the voltage of the reference system is not measured, significant asymme-

tries in the grid can lead to the incorrect triggering of events.
4.2.6 Cooling system control

The cooling system control function package is used for controlling the cool-
ing system of a power transformer. It contains the following functions:
▪ Control of 2, 4 or 6 cooling groups
▪ Conventional control via relay contacts of a thermometer
▪ Intelligent control
– Temperature-dependent switching point control
– Load-dependent mode

– Periodic mode
– Alternating mode
▪ Frequency-based cooling system control
4.2.7 Cooling system monitoring

The cooling system monitoring function package is used for monitoring the
cooling system of a power transformer. It contains the following functions:
▪ Monitoring of 2, 4 or 6 cooling groups
– Operating status
– Number of starts
– Operating duration
▪ Cooling efficiency monitoring
– Thermal resistance Rth
– Comparison of the measured and the calculated upper oil temperature
– Comparison of the cooling system feed temperature and the return tem-
perature
4.2.8 Additional digital inputs and outputs

This function package includes additional digital inputs and outputs which
you can use freely. You can link these inputs and outputs with functions,
event messages or control system messages.
4.2.9 Additional analog inputs and outputs

This function package includes additional analog inputs and outputs which
you can use freely.
4.2.10 TPLE
You can use the TAPCON® Personal Logic Editor (TPLE) function to pro-
gram simple logical links via the web-based visualization. You can also link
the inputs and outputs available on the device using function modules.

4.2.11 Communication
The communication function package is used for communication between
the product and other systems. It contains the following functions:
▪ Web-based visualization
▪ IEC 60870-5-101
▪ IEC 60870-5-103
▪ IEC 60870-5-104
▪ IEC 61850 (edition 1 and edition 2)
▪ Modbus RTU
▪ Modbus TCP
▪ Modbus ASCII
▪ DNP3
▪ Redundancy protocol (HSR or PRP)
▪ MQTT
▪ MR sensor bus
▪ User authentication via RADIUS

4.3 Operating modes

You can select the device operating mode using the rotary switch in the con-
trol cabinet [►Section 4.4.1, Page 42]. Depending on the device version,
the rotary switch is designated S32 (without on-load tap-changer control) or
S132 (with on-load tap-changer control). You can operate the device in the
following operating modes:
LOCAL (S32/S132 in position LOC)
In the Local operating mode, you can only actuate the device using the oper-
ating elements in the control cabinet. Commands via digital inputs or SCADA
are not possible. There is no automatic on-load tap-changer control.
REMOTE (S32/S132 in position REM)
In the Remote operating mode, you can actuate the device, depending on
the setting of the Remote behavior [►Page 170] parameter, only via external
key or SCADA commands. You can activate (AR AUTO) or deactivate (AVR
manual) the optional on-load tap-changer control function via digital inputs or
SCADA.
OFF (S132 in position OFF)
In OFF operating mode, you cannot operate the motor-drive unit via control
switch or digital inputs. This operating mode is used to prevent the motor-
drive unit from starting up inadvertently (e.g., during maintenance work).
AUTO (S132 in position AUTO, only with option "Automatic on-load

tap-changer control")
Automatic on-load tap-changer control is active only in the Auto operating

mode. You cannot actuate the motor-drive unit manually in this mode. Com-
mands via SCADA are possible depending on the setting of the Remote be-
havior [►Page 170] parameter.
LOCAL REMOTE OFF AUTO
Control using S3 control Yes No No No
switch
Control using digital inputs No Yes No No
Control using SCADA 1 No Yes - No
On-load tap-changer regula- AVR MAN- AVR MAN- - AVR AUTO
tion 2 UAL UAL
AVR AUTO
Table 11: Overview of operating modes
1 Optional when connecting the motor-drive unit to a control system (SCADA).

2 Only available if the device is equipped with the "On-load tap-changer control" option.

4.3.1 Emergency operation during switching blocking (X100 bridge)

The monitoring function of the on-load tap-changer is only active when the
device is ready for operation and issues a signal at the digital output Status
OK.
If your device is equipped with the OLTC monitoring expert function pack-
age, the monitoring system can block further tap-change operations where
necessary. In this case, the monitoring system will report the event Blocking
active. If operation needs to be resumed despite the cause of the event not
being eliminated, you can activate emergency operation by inserting the
X100 bridge.
If the X100 bridge is inserted, drive blocking by the monitoring system is

switched to inactive. All operating values continue to be recorded and stored
by the monitoring system.
NOTICE Damage to the transformer and/or on-load tap-changer

If the Blocking active event is present in the monitoring system, the cause of
the event has to be analyzed before activating emergency operation. Per-
forming additional tap-change operations on the motor-drive unit without an-
alyzing the cause may lead to on-load tap-changer and/or transformer dam-
age.
► Check what caused the Blocking active event and, based on the cause,
decide whether to continue operating the on-load tap-changer.
► Export the service data and contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
If emergency operation is active, this is displayed in the visualization of the

device:
Emergency operation of motor-drive unit (X100) active
Figure 7: Emergency operation of motor-drive unit (X100) active

4.4 Design
This chapter contains an overview of the design of the product.
4.4.1 Control cabinet
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
9
10
15 11
14 13 12
Figure 8: Control cabinet layout (side drive)
1 Door of the control cabinet 2 Viewing window

3 Eyebolt 4 Transmission gear cover plate
5 Indication field 6 Output shaft
7 Hand crank aperture with hand 8 Fixing lug
crank interlock switch
9 Hand crank 10 Motor protective switch Q1
11 S3 control switch 12 Swing frame / anti-condensation
heater
13 Base plate for cable bushings 14 Briefcase
15 Display (optional)

1 2 3 4
5
6
7
11
10 9 8
Figure 9: Control cabinet layout (top drive)
1 Door of the control cabinet 2 Viewing window

3 Eyebolt 4 Indication field
5 Fixing lug 6 Motor protective switch Q1
7 S3 control switch 8 Swing frame / anti-condensation
heater
9 Base plate for cable bushings 10 Briefcase
11 Display (optional)

4.4.1.1 Motor-drive unit
4.4.1.1.1 Indication field
An indication field is fitted in the control cabinet. The pointer and operations
counter are mechanically driven and indicate the tap-change operation se-
quence and operating position of the motor-drive unit. The reset wheel on
the operations counter is sealed at the factory.
1 2 1 3
4
Figure 10: Indication field
1 The two drag hands indicate the 2 Tap position indicator

regulating range currently used
3 Tap-change indicator: Shows the 4 Mechanical operations counter
current position of the control cam
(33 tap-change indicator sections
per operating position)
4.4.1.1.2 Position transmitter equipment
NOTICE Damage to the on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit!

Damage to on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit due to incorrect use of
position transmitter equipment.
► Only circuits stated in the chapter Technical data for position transmitter
equipment [►Section 12.3.2, Page 491] may be connected to the posi-
tion transmitter module connections.
► The switchover point of the position transmitter equipment in the motor-
drive unit is not the same as the switchover point of the diverter switch
operation. This depends on the type of diverter switch. This fact should
be noted when project planning the locking circuits between the motor-
drive unit and external equipment (e.g. transformer circuit breaker).
► Therefore, the "Tap changer in operation" position transit contact shown
in the connection diagram should be used for external monitoring, locking
and control purposes instead of the position transmitter equipment.

The position transmitter equipment is used to indicate the operating position

of the on-load tap-changer/de-energized tap-changer when idle.
The remote displays are available in various versions.
The position transmitter module for connection by the customer is located on

the terminal rail.
For more information about the position transmitter equipment, see Techni-
cal data for position transmitter equipment [►Section 12.3.2, Page 491].
4.4.1.1.3 Transmission gear cover plate
WARNING Danger of death and severe injury from electrical voltage!

Danger of death and severe injury from electrical voltage if the transmission
gear cover plate is not fitted.
► Never start up motor-drive unit without transmission gear cover plate.
► Upon successful removal during assembly, reconnect the ground connec-
tion.
The touch-protected transmission gear cover plate features an opening for

the hand crank used in manual mode.
Figure 11: Transmission gear cover plate
4.4.1.1.4 Protective devices
The following protective devices are fitted in the motor-drive unit:

▪ End stop device (mechanical and electric)
▪ Device protecting against unintentional passage
▪ Motor protection device
▪ Protection against accidental contact

4.4.1.2 Anti-condensation heater
The heating element is integrated onto the cap rail in the swing frame. Regu-
lation is via a thermostat or a hygrostat (optional).
4.4.1.3 Swing frame/terminal rail
The swing frame protects all electrical and mechanical parts of the motor-
drive unit behind the swing frame against accidental contact.
The terminal rail behind the swing frame enables easy electrical connection
of the motor-drive unit. Vertically arranged cap rails with the correspondingly
mounted terminal bars ensure that the connection wiring is easy to install.
4.4.1.4 Base plate for cable bushing
The base plate is used for cable bushings in the control cabinet. Depending
on your order, the device is equipped with one of the following base plates:
▪ Blind plate for creating your own cable bushing
▪ Two-piece blind plate for creating your own cable bushing
▪ Base plate with Roxtec CF32 cable bushing
▪ Base plate with metric cable glands (2x M20, 20x M25, 5x M32, 3x M40)
▪ Base plate with flange opening FL21
4.4.1.5 ISM® assemblies
4.4.1.5.1 Power supply QS3.241
The G1 PULS DIMENSION QS3.241 assembly supplies power to the ISM®

assemblies.
Figure 12: PULS DIMENSION QS3.241 assembly

4.4.1.5.2 Power supply CP5.241
The PULS DIMENSION CP5.241 assembly supplies power to the ISM® as-
semblies.
Figure 13: PULS DIMENSION CP5.241 assembly
4.4.1.5.3 Power supply PS
The PS assembly contains the power supply unit for supplying power to the
ISM® assemblies. The RY LED signals that the assembly is ready for opera-
tion. PS - 8640
SICAM A8000
RY
4 -
3
X1
2
1 +
Figure 14: PS assembly
4.4.1.5.4 CPU (central processing unit) I
The CPU I assembly is the central processing unit for the device. It contains
the following interfaces:
▪ Internal system interface RS232 (COM1)
▪ Serial interface RS232/485 (COM2)
▪ 3x Ethernet (ETH1, ETH 2.1, ETH 2.2)

▪ USB (USB 2.0)

▪ 2x CAN bus (CAN 1, CAN 2)
CPU
RUN
INIT
9
COM 1
CAN 1
CAN 2
ERR
2 4 6
0 8 L
1
E C A
2 4 6
8 H
C A
TEST
9
PROG
COM 2
RUN
USB2.0
1
24V DC

+
-
Figure 15: CPU I assembly
4.4.1.5.5 CPU (central processing unit)
The CPU assembly is the central processing unit for the device. It contains
the following interfaces:
▪ Serial interface RS485/422 (electrically isolated, X4)
▪ Internal system interface RS232 (X5)
▪ 2x Ethernet 10/100 Mbps (electrically isolated, X2, X3)
CP - 8050
RS-232
X5
SICAM A8000
RS-485
X4
ETH
X3
RY ER
ETH
X2
2
X1
1
Figure 16: CPU assembly

4.4.1.5.6 UI 1 voltage measurement and current measurement
The UI 1 assembly is used for measuring 1-phase voltage and current.
Figure 17: UI 1 assembly
Warning of a danger point. Read the information given in the product oper-
ating instructions.
Warning of dangerous electrical voltage.
This assembly is protected via double insulation or reinforced insulation.
Table 12: Safety-relevant symbols on the assembly

4.4.1.5.7 UI 3 voltage measurement and current measurement
The UI 3 assembly is used for measuring 3-phase voltage and current.
Figure 18: UI 3 assembly
ating instructions.

4.4.1.5.8 UI 5-3 voltage measurement and current measurement
The UI 5-3 assembly is used for measuring 3-phase voltage and current.
Figure 19: UI 5-3 assembly
ating instructions.

4.4.1.5.9 UI 5-4 voltage measurement and current measurement
The UI 5-4 assembly is used for measuring 3-phase voltage and current.
Figure 20: UI 5-4 assembly
ating instructions.

4.4.1.5.10 Voltage measurement U 3
The U3 assembly is used for measuring 3-phase voltage. The RY LED sig-
nals that the assembly is ready for operation.
AI - 8340
10
SICAM A8000
7
1 X2
RY
2
X1
1
Figure 21: U 3 assembly
4.4.1.5.11 Current measurement I 3
The I 3 assembly is used for measuring 3-phase voltage and current. The
RY LED signals that the assembly is ready for operation.
AI - 8330
6
I1
SICAM A8000
4
I2
3
2
I3
1
X1
RY
Figure 22: I 3 assembly

4.4.1.5.12 DIO 28-15 digital inputs and outputs
The DIO 28-15 assembly makes 28 inputs and 15 outputs (6 N/O contacts, 9
change-over contacts) available.
Figure 23: DIO 28-15 assembly
ating instructions.

4.4.1.5.13 Digital inputs and outputs DIO 42-20 (HL)
The assembly DIO 42-20/DIO 42-20 HL makes 42 inputs and 20 outputs (8

N/O contacts, 12 change-over contacts) available.
Figure 24: Assembly DIO 42-20/DIO 42-20 HL
ating instructions.

4.4.1.5.14 Digital inputs DI 16-24 V
The DI 16-24V assembly has 16 digital inputs with a nominal voltage of

24 V DC. The RY LED signals that the assembly is ready for operation.
DI - 811x
10
SICAM A8000
6
2
X2
1
RY
10
2
X1
1
Figure 25: DI 16-24V assembly

DI - 811x
10
7
SICAM A8000
2
X2
1
RY
10
2
X1
1


DI - 811x
10
SICAM A8000
6
2
X2
1
RY
10
2
X1
1

DI - 811x
10
7
SICAM A8000
2
X2
1
RY
10
2
X1
1

4.4.1.5.18 Digital outputs DO 8
The DO 8 assembly provides you with 8 digital outputs (relays). The RY LED
signals that the assembly is ready for operation.
DI - 8212
4
2
X4
SICAM A8000
1
2
X3
1
RY
2
X2
1
2
X1
1
Figure 29: DO 8 assembly
4.4.1.5.19 AIO 2 analog inputs and outputs
The AIO 2 assembly provides 2 channels for analog inputs and outputs.
In accordance with the device configuration, the AIO assembly supports one
of the following signal types:
Input Output
Voltage Current Voltage Current
0 to 10 V 0...20 mA 0 to 10 V 0...20 mA
4...20 mA 4...20 mA
Resistance measurement (e.g. PT100, resistor contact series)
Table 18: Signal types supported by the AIO assembly

Figure 30: AIO 2 assembly
The AIO 4 assembly provides 4 channels for analog inputs and outputs.

In accordance with the device configuration, the AIO assembly supports one
of the following signal types:
Input Output
Voltage Current Voltage Current
0 to 10 V 0...20 mA 0 to 10 V 0...20 mA
4...20 mA 4...20 mA
Resistance measurement (e.g. PT100, resistor contact series)
Table 19: Signal types supported by the AIO assembly
The AIO 8 assembly provides 8 channels for analog inputs. In accordance

with the device configuration, the AIO assembly supports one of the follow-
ing signal types:
▪ Voltage: 0...10 V
▪ Current: 0/4...20 mA (only channels 1, 2, 7 and 8)
▪ Resistance measurement (e.g. PT100)

4.4.1.5.22 Analog inputs AI 4-T
The AI 4-T assembly provides you with 4 analog inputs for temperature mea-
suring (PT100, PT1000). The RY LED signals that the assembly is ready for
operation.
AI - 8310
10
7
SICAM A8000
2
X2
1
RY
10
2
X1
1
Figure 33: AI 4-T assembly

4.4.1.5.23 Analog inputs AI 4
The AI 4 assembly provides you with 4 analog inputs for measuring the cur-
rent (-20...+20 mA) or voltage (-10...+10 V) of analog sensors. The RY LED
signals that the assembly is ready for operation.
AI - 8320
4
2
X4
SICAM A8000
1
2
X3
1
RY
2
X2
1
2
X1
1
Figure 34: AI 4 assembly
4.4.1.5.24 Analog outputs AO 4
The AO 4 assembly provides you with 4 analog outputs for issuing measure-
ment values (-20...+20 mA, -10...+10 V). The RY LED signals that the as-
sembly is ready for operation.
AI - 8380
2
X4
SICAM A8000
2
X3
1
RY
2
X2
1
2
X1
1
Figure 35: AO 4 assembly

4.4.1.5.25 System networking MC 2-2
The MC 2-2 assembly is a media converter, which converts 2 electrical con-

nections (RJ45) to one fiber-optic cable connection each. Each is converted
independently of the other. The following interfaces are available:
▪ 2x RJ45 (ETH12, ETH22)
▪ 2x Duplex-LC (SFP module) (ETH11, ETH21)
The media converter is designed to be transparent for the network and does
not have its own IP address.
Figure 36: MC 2-2 assembly
4.4.1.5.26 System networking SW 3-3
The assembly SW 3-3 is a media converter with managed switch. It com-

bines two independent functions and provides you with the following inter-
faces:
▪ A media converter converts an electric connection (RJ45) into a fiber-optic
cable connection
– RJ45 (ETH12)
– Duplex-LC (SFP module) (ETH11)
▪ Managed switch with redundancy function (PRP or RSTP)
– 2x RJ45 (ETH23, ETH24), device-internal connection
– 2x Duplex-LC (SFP module) (ETH21, ETH22), redundancy connection
The following redundancy functions are available to you according to your

order:
▪ PRP (standard setting)
▪ RSTP

Figure 37: SW 3-3 assembly
4.4.1.5.27 System networking BEM1/BES1
The assemblies BEM 1 (master) and BES 1 (slave) are bus extension mod-
ules which are used to extend the system by one additional busbar with ad-
ditional assemblies. Data is transmitted via fiber-optic cable. The assembly
BES 1 has a connection for supplying voltage to the additional busbar.
Figure 38: Assemblies BEM 1 and BES 1

4.4.1.5.28 System networking COM-ETH
The COM-ETH assembly provides you with 5 Ethernet interfaces.
CI - 8520
ETH
X5
SICAM A8000
ETH
X4
ETH
X3
RY ER
ETH
X2
ETH
X1
Figure 39: COM-ETH assembly
4.4.1.5.29 System networking BES
The BES assembly is a bus extension module and extends the device by
one additional bus rail with additional assemblies. The RY LED signals that
the assembly is ready for operation. The ER LED signals that the device has
detected an error.
CI - 8530
ETH
X3
SICAM A8000
ETH
X2
45
23
6
I/0
789
F01
A
E
B CD
RY ER
4 -
3
X1
2
1 +
Figure 40: BES assembly

4.4.1.5.30 Vibroacoustics VI 4
The VI 4 assembly records the vibration sensor signals via an IEPE inter-
face. The abbreviation IEPE refers to an industry standard for piezo-electri-
cal sensors (IEPE = Integrated Electronics Piezo Electric).
Figure 41: Assembly VI 4
The measured signals are processed with evaluation algorithms.
4.4.1.5.31 Control status message
The device reports the status of the control via digital outputs:
▪ OFF: Control is switched off.
▪ ON: Control is switched on.
▪ RDY: Control is ready.
▪ ERR: There is an error.
Output Configuration OFF ON RDY ERR
DIO: Status Ok NO, High active 0 1 1 0
DIO: Status Ok NC, High active 1 0 0 1
Table 20: Status message (DIO 28-15 or DIO 42-20)
Output Configuration OFF ON RDY ERR

DO 8: Status Ok NO, High active 0 1 1 0
DO 8: Status Ok NO, Low active 0 0 0 1
CPU: Watchdog NO, High active 0 1 - -
CPU: Watchdog NC, High active 1 0 - -
Table 21: Status message (DO 8 and CPU)

4.4.1.6 Safety markings
The following safety markings are used on the product:
3 2
Figure 42: Overview of the safety markings (ETOS SD)
1 Warning of rotating parts 2 Warning of dangerous electrical

voltage
3 Warning of hot surface
1 2
Figure 43: Overview of the safety markings (ETOS, ETOS TD)
1 Warning of hot surface 2 Warning of dangerous electrical

voltage
4.4.1.7 Main switch (optional)
You can shut the motor-drive unit down using the main switch. Depending
on the control cabinet version, the main switch is either inside the control
cabinet or on the outside of the door.

WARNING Electric shock!

The main switch does not de-energize the complete control cabinet. Per-
forming work in the control cabinet when the control cabinet is energized
can lead to death or serious injuries.
► Before working in the control cabinet, completely de-energize the control
cabinet using an all-phase isolating device.
4.4.1.8 Operation switch (optional)
You can use the operation switch to select the operating mode [►Section
4.3, Page 40] of the motor-drive unit.
Position Description
LOC "LOCAL" operating mode activated.
REM "REMOTE" operating mode activated.
Table 22: Operation switch S32 (LOCAL/REMOTE)
AUTO "Automatic voltage regulation" operating mode activated.
Table 23: Operation switch S132 (LOCAL/AUTO/REMOTE)
OFF "OFF" operating mode activated.
Table 24: Operation switch S132 (LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE)

4.4.2 Gear motor (versions)

The gear motor is on the head of the on-load tap-changer. It is connected di-
rectly to the drive shaft of the on-load tap-changer and carries out the on-
load tap change operation. The gear motor is delivered pre-installed with the
on-load tap-changer and does not normally have to be uninstalled. The gear
motor is available in the following versions:
Figure 44: Gear motor
Figure 45: Gear motor

4.4.3 Sensors
4.4.3.1 Vibroacoustics
4.4.3.1.1 VS 1 sensor assembly
Figure 46: VAM sensor assembly
1 Sensor cable 2 Kick guard

3 Vibration sensor 4 Adapter
4.4.3.2 Ambient temperature sensor (optional)
As an option, the device is equipped with a temperature sensor for recording

the ambient temperature. The temperature sensor is on the right-hand side
of the protective housing.
Ensure that there is sufficient circulation of the ambient air around the tem-
perature sensor. Otherwise, there may be errors in torque monitoring.

Figure 47: Ambient temperature sensor (ETOS ED)
1 Ambient temperature sensor
Figure 48: Ambient temperature sensor (ETOS, ETOS TD)
1 Ambient temperature sensor

4.4.3.3 Bushing adapter and bushing coupling unit
The bushing adapter is used to pick up the measured voltage at the bushing
test tap. The downstream bushing coupling unit is used to adjust the mea-
sured voltage. Both components are tuned to the bushings to be monitored
in accordance with your order. They may be used only for those bushings.
The following components are used:

▪ Bushing adapter (A001...A010)
Type Bushing types
A001 Micafil RTKF
Micafil RTKG
A002 HSP SETFt 1550/420-1800
HSP SETFt 600/123-2000
A003 ABB GOB 1050-750-1100-0.6-B
ABB GSA 123-OA/1600/0.5
ABB GSA 52-OA/2000/0.5
A004 Trench COT 750-800
A005 HSP SETFt 750-170-4000
HSP SETFt 1200/245-1250
HSP SETFt 1425-420-1600
HSP SESTFt 1050-245-B E6 B
HSP SESTFt 1425-420-B E6 B-1600A
HSP EKTG 72.5-800 kV
A006 PCORE CSA standard POC ser. 2
ABB GOE, GSB (245...550 kV)
A007 PCORE B-81515-57-70
A008 Passoni Villa PNO, POBO, PCTO, PAO < 110 kV
A010 ABB O Plus C (O Plus Dry)
Table 25: Bushing adapter
▪ C002: Bushing coupling unit
4.4.3.4 Motor-drive unit active power measurement (option)
The device can be equipped with an optional assembly for measuring the
active power of the motor-drive unit. This assembly transmits the active
power to the device as an analog signal (4…20 mA).
The device can transmit the measured active power via the control system.
Moreover, the device triggers an event message if the analog signal is not
within the permissible range (4…20 mA).

4.4.4 Nameplate
The nameplate is in the control cabinet.
Figure 49: Nameplate in the control cabinet (ETOS ED)
1 Nameplate
Figure 50: Nameplate in the control cabinet (ETOS, ETOS TD)
1 Nameplate

4.5 Visualization
4.5.1 Main screen

The web-based visualization is split into various areas.
Figure 51: Main screen
1 Display area 2 Secondary navigation

3 Primary navigation 4 Status bar
The most important measured values of the transformer are displayed on the
main screen. The individual status displays of the transformer shown can be
selected directly when accessing them via the web browser. They act as
links to the corresponding menu items. If you are operating the device via
the front panel, you are only able to call up the elements via the Information
menu.
If the device does not have one of the optional functions, this will be indi-
cated in the main screen via a small padlock .
Depending on the device configuration, the main screen displays the

schematic representation of a transformer for network applications or a
transformer for industrial applications.

4.5.1.1 Transformer for network applications
Figure 52: Transformer data
1 DGA (status) 2 Top-oil temperature

3 Hot-spot temperature 4 Cooling system (status)
5 Load current and load voltage of 6 Transformer name
phases L1, L2, L3
Figure 53: Apparent power, oil level, and ambient temperature
1 Asset intelligence 2 Total apparent power

3 Ambient temperature 4 Oil level (transformer on left,
on-load tap-changer on right)

Figure 54: On-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit
1 OLTC oil temperature 2 Current tap position, status of the

motor-drive unit
3 Voltage regulator 4 Tap-change operation statistics,
VAM
5 OLTC status message (collective 6 Oil filter unit status message
message)

4.5.1.2 Transformer for industrial applications
1 DGA (status) 2 Top-oil temperature

3 Hot-spot temperature 4 Cooling system (status)
5 Load current an load voltage of the 6 Transformer name
phases L1, L2, L3 (high-voltage
side)
Figure 56: Apparent power, oil level, and ambient temperature
1 Asset intelligence 2 Total apparent power

3 Ambient temperature 4 Oil level (transformer on left,
on-load tap-changer on right)

Figure 57: On-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit
1 OLTC oil temperature 2 Current tap position

3 Voltage regulator 4 Tap-change operation statistics
5 OLTC status message (collective
message)

4.5.2 Additional operating controls and display elements when using

the MControl touch panel (optional)
If you are using the device with the optionally available MControl touch
panel, additional operating controls and display elements are displayed on
the left edge of the screen. Depending on the device configuration, a variety
of keys are available.
Figure 58: Additional display elements and operating controls
Status LED status Status display

1) REMOTE key Select the operating mode:
▪ On: REMOTE
▪ Off: LOCAL
2) AVR AUTO key Activate auto mode.
2) RAISE key Send a control command to the motor-drive

unit to increase the voltage. Only possible in
manual mode.
2) AVR Manual key Activate manual mode.
2) LOWER key Send a control command to the motor-drive

unit to reduce the voltage. Only possible in
manual mode.
1)
Not available if local/remote is toggled using a digital input.
2)
Only available in the "Automatic voltage regulation" function package.
4.5.3 Operating concept

You can operate the device using the web-based ISM™ Intuitive Control In-
terface visualization via a PC.

User rights and user roles
The device is equipped with a rights system and a roles system. The display
and access rights to device settings or events can therefore be controlled at
user level.
You can configure the rights system and roles system to meet your require-
ments. You will find more information on user rights and user roles in the
User administration [►Section 8.1.18, Page 238] section.
You can only modify the device settings or parameters if you have the nec-
essary user rights.
Logging on, logging off and changing users
The control of access rights to device settings and parameters is user-

based. Various users can log in at the same time (e.g. via the visualization)
and access the device.
To log in as a user, proceed as follows:

1. Select the LOGIN or CHANGE button in the status line.
2. Enter your user name and password and select the OK button.
ð The name of the logged-in user appears in the status line.
To log out as a user, proceed as follows:

► Press the LOGOUT button in the status line.
Navigation
If you are operating the device using the web-based visualization, you can
navigate by clicking on the appropriate buttons.
Example To navigate to the "Date" parameter, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings.
2. Go to Parameters.
3. Go to Time synchronization.
4. Select Time.
In these operating instructions, the path for navigating to a parameter is al-

ways shown in an abridged form: Go to Settings > Parameters > Time syn-
chronization.

Parameter search
You can use the quick search function in the parameter menu to search for a
parameter. Enter the name of the desired parameter in the Search entry
field.
Figure 59: Quick search
Expert mode
The device has an expert mode for entering the parameters. You can enter
the parameters directly into the overview screen of the respective menu in
this mode.
Figure 60: Expert mode
To activate the expert mode, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings > Parameters.
2. Select the Expert mode checkbox.
ð Expert mode is active.

Hiding/showing parameters
Depending on how you set the parameters, the device will hide or show ad-
ditional parameters related to this function.

5 Packaging, transport and storage
5.1 Packaging
The products are sometimes supplied with sealed packaging and sometimes
in a dry state, depending on requirements.
Sealed packaging surrounds the packaged goods with plastic foil on all
sides.
Products that have also been dried are identified by a yellow label on the
sealed packaging. In the dry state, delivery is also possible in a transport
container.
The information in the following sections should be applied as appropriate.
5.1.1 Suitability
NOTICE Property damage due to incorrectly stacked crates!

Stacking the crates incorrectly can lead to damage to the packaged goods.
► The outer marking on the packaging states if, for example, the on-load
tap-changer or selector has been packed upright. Never stack these
crates.
► General rule: Do not stack crates above a height of 1.5 m.
► For other crates: Only stack up to 2 equally sized crates on top of one an-
other.
The packaging is suitable to ensure undamaged and fully functional means

of transportation in compliance with local transportation laws and regula-
tions.
The packaged goods are packed in a sturdy crate. This crate ensures that,
when in the intended transportation position, the packaged goods are stabi-
lized to prevent impermissible changes in position, and that none of the parts
touch the loading surface of the means of transport or touch the ground after
unloading.
Sealed packaging surrounds the packaged goods with plastic foil on all
sides. The packaged goods are protected from humidity using a desiccant.
The plastic foil was bonded after the desiccant is added.

5.1.2 Markings
The packaging bears a signature with instructions for safe transport and cor-
rect storage. The following symbols apply to the shipment of non-hazardous
goods. Adherence to these symbols is mandatory.
Protect against Top Fragile Attach lifting Center of mass

moisture gear here
Table 26: Shipping pictograms

5.2 Transportation, receipt and handling of shipments

WARNING Danger of death or severe injury!
Danger of death or serious injuries due to tipping or falling load.
► Only transport the crate when closed.
► Do not remove the securing material used in the crate during transport.
► If the product is delivered on a pallet, secure it sufficiently.
► Only trained and authorized persons may select the sling gear and se-
cure the load.
► Do not walk under the suspended load.
► Use means of transport and lifting gear with a sufficient carrying capacity
in accordance with the weight stated on the delivery slip.
In addition to oscillation stress, jolts must also be expected during trans-

portation. In order to prevent possible damage, avoid dropping, tipping,
knocking over and colliding with the product.
If a crate tips over, falls from a certain height (e.g. when slings tear) or expe-
riences an unbroken fall, damage must be expected regardless of the
weight.
Every delivered shipment must be checked for the following by the recipient
before acceptance (acknowledgment of receipt):
▪ Completeness based on the delivery slip
▪ External damage of any type
The checks must take place after unloading when the crate or transport con-
tainer can be accessed from all sides.
Visible damage If external transport damage is found upon receipt of the shipment, proceed
as follows:
▪ Immediately record the identified transport damage in the shipping docu-
ments and have this countersigned by the carrier.
▪ In the event of severe damage, total loss or high damage costs, immedi-
ately notify the manufacturer and the relevant insurance company.
▪ After identifying damage, do not modify the condition of the shipment fur-
ther and retain the packaging material until an inspection decision has
been made by the transport company or the insurance company.
▪ Record the details of the damage immediately on site together with the
carrier involved. This is essential for any claim for damages.
▪ Photograph damage to packaging and packaged goods. This also applies
to signs of corrosion on the packaged goods due to moisture inside the
packaging (rain, snow, condensation).
▪ NOTICE! Damage to packaged goods due to damaged sealed packag-
ing. If the product is delivered in sealed packaging, check the sealed
packaging immediately. If the sealed packaging is damaged, do not under

any circumstances install or commission the packaged goods. Either re-

dry the dried packaged goods as per the operating instructions, or contact
the manufacturer to agree on how to proceed.
▪ Identify the damaged parts.
Hidden damage When damages are not determined until unpacking after receipt of the ship-
ment (hidden damage), proceed as follows:
▪ Make the party responsible for the damage liable as soon as possible by
telephone and in writing, and prepare a damage report.
▪ Observe the time periods applicable to such actions in the respective
country. Inquire about these in good time.
With hidden damage, it is very hard to make the transportation company (or
other responsible party) liable. Any insurance claims for such damages can
only be successful if relevant provisions are expressly included in the insur-
ance terms and conditions.
5.3 Storage of shipments
Packaged goods dried by Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen
Upon receipt of the shipment, immediately remove the packaged goods

dried by Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen from the sealed packaging and store
air-tight in dry insulating fluid until used if the packaged goods were not sup-
plied in insulating fluid.
Non-dried packaged goods
Non-dried packaged goods with functional sealed packaging can be stored

outdoors when the following conditions are complied with.
When selecting and setting up the storage location, ensure the following:
▪ Protect stored goods against moisture (flooding, water from melting snow
and ice), dirt, pests such as rats, mice, termites and so on, and against
unauthorized access.
▪ Store the crates on timber beams and planks as a protection against ris-
ing damp and for better ventilation.
▪ Ensure sufficient carrying capacity of the ground.
▪ Keep entrance paths free.
▪ Check stored goods at regular intervals. Also take appropriate action after
storms, heavy rain or snow and so on.
Protect the packaging foil from direct sunlight so that it does not disintegrate
under the influence of UV rays, which would cause the packaging to lose its
sealing function.

If the product is installed more than 6 months after delivery, suitable mea-
sures must be taken without delay. The following measures can be used:
▪ Correctly regenerate the drying agent and restore the sealed packaging.
▪ Unpack the packed goods and store in a suitable storage space (well ven-
tilated, as dust-free as possible, humidity < 50% where possible).
Storing the product in particularly low ambient temperatures
If you want to store the product in ambient temperatures lower than the per-
missible storage temperature [►Section 12.2, Page 490], you must ensure
that the internal heater is in continuous operation. To do so, connect the
heater to the power supply via the optional emergency heating plug device in
the baseboard (terminal X29).
5.4 Unpacking shipments and checking for transportation

damages
▪ NOTICE! Transport the packaged crate to the place where the packaged
goods will be installed. Do not open the sealed packaging until just before
installation. Otherwise, damage to the packaged goods may occur due to
ineffectively sealed packaging.
▪ WARNING! When unpacking, check the condition of the packaged
goods. Place the packaged goods in an upright crate and protect them
from tipping out. Otherwise, the packaged goods may become damaged
and serious injuries may result.
▪ Check the completeness of the accessories kit based on the delivery slip.
▪ NOTICE! Do not set the device down on the pressure equalization ele-
ment on the rear side. Otherwise the pressure equalization may be dam-
aged.
Figure 61: Pressure equalization element on the rear of the device
1 Pressure equalization element

Attachment points for lifting gear
WARNING Danger of death and damage to property!

Danger of death and damage to property due to tipping or falling load!
cure the load.
in accordance with the weight stated in the Technical data section.
▪ WARNING! Serious injuries and damage to the control cabinet due to

falling load. Use all 4 but at least 2 diagonally opposing transport lugs.
Turn the transport lugs to face the lifting gear. Attach the lifting gear so
that the cable angle is always less than 45° in relation to the vertical.
Figure 62: Transport lugs for lifting gear
Figure 63: Maximum permissible cable angle for the lifting gear limit stop of the control cabinet

▪ WARNING! Serious injuries due to the control cabinet tipping and

damage to the cable gland if the control cabinet is set down, transported
or stored upright. Only set down, transport and store the control cabinet
on its back.
▪ Only remove the control cabinet from the crane once it has been fully con-
nected to the transformer.

6 Mounting
6 Mounting
This chapter describes how to correctly mount and connect the device. Ob-
serve the connection diagrams provided.
DANGER Electric shock!

Risk of fatal injury due to electrical voltage. Always observe the following
safety regulations when working in or on electrical equipment.
► Disconnect the equipment.
► Lock the equipment to prevent an unintentional restart.
► Make sure all poles are de-energized.
► Ground and short-circuit.
► Cover or cordon off adjacent energized parts.

Dangerous high voltages may occur when a current transformer is operated
with an open secondary circuit. This can lead to death, injuries and property
damage.
► Never operate a current transformer with an open secondary circuit;
short-circuit the current transformer to prevent this.
► Observe the information in the current transformer operating instructions.
6.1 Lacquering the control cabinet (optional)

The control cabinet only needs to be lacquered if the control cabinet was
procured without a lacquer coating or if the control cabinet lacquer coating is
damaged.
NOTICE Damage to the control cabinet due to lacquering

During lacquering, certain control cabinet components may become dam-
aged and/or have their function impaired.
► Cover or mask these components prior to lacquering.

6 Mounting
The following components may not be lacquered:
Figure 64: Temperature sensor, ground connection and water drain in the base plate
1 Temperature sensor 2 Ground connection

3 Water drain
Figure 65: Pressure equalization element on the rear of the control cabinet
1 Pressure equalization element

6 Mounting
6.2 Mounting the control cabinet

cure the load.
The control cabinet has four fixing attachments on the rear to secure it.
1. Attach four stud bolts (not supplied by MR) to the transformer tank. Rec-
ommended clearance between the control cabinet and floor is approx.
0.5…1 m.
Figure 66: Fastening the stud bolts
A 715 ± 2 mm (28.15 ± 0.08 in) B 750 ± 2 mm (29.53 ± 0.08 in)
2. For control cabinets with vibration damper: Attach the inner bracket to the
control cabinet. Attach the outer bracket to the transformer wall. The com-
plete contact surfaces of the brackets must be in contact.

6 Mounting
3. WARNING! Serious injuries and damage to the control cabinet due to


6 Mounting
4. Use the fixing attachments to attach the control cabinet to the stud bolts
and align it vertically on the transformer tank.
Figure 69: Attaching the control cabinet
5. NOTICE! Damage to the control cabinet due to mechanical tension if the

offset to the plane is greater than 5 mm. The offset must be compensated
using washers. Secure the control cabinet without subjecting it to mechan-
ical tension.
Figure 70: Securing the drive

6 Mounting
6. Connect the grounding cable to the control cabinet and transformer tank.
Figure 71: Connecting the grounding cable
6.3 Mounting the control cabinet (vibration-damped design)

cure the load.

6 Mounting
For vibration-damped mounting, you must use the supplied adapter bracket
to attach the control cabinet to the transformer tank.

6 Mounting
2. Fasten both adapter brackets on the control cabinet.
Figure 74: Mounting the adapter bracket
1 Adapter bracket 2 Washer

3 Fixing screw
3. Attach four stud bolts (not supplied by MR) to the transformer tank. Rec-
ommended clearance between the control cabinet and floor is approx.
0.5…1 m.
Figure 75: Fastening the stud bolts
A 715 ± 2 mm (28.15 ± 0.08 in) B 750 ± 2 mm (29.53 ± 0.08 in)
4. Push a thrust washer onto each stud bolt.

6 Mounting
5. Use the fixing attachments to attach the control cabinet with the adapter
bracket to the stud bolts and align it vertically on the transformer tank.
Figure 76: Fastening the control cabinet
1 Stud bolts 2 Thrust washer

3 Thrust washer 4 Nut
Figure 77: Aligning the control cabinet
6. NOTICE! Damage to the control cabinet due to mechanical tension if the

offset to the plane is greater than 5 mm. The offset must be compensated
using washers. Secure the control cabinet without subjecting it to mechan-
ical tension.

6 Mounting
7. Connect the grounding cable to the control cabinet and transformer tank.
Figure 78: Connecting the grounding cable
6.4 Motor-drive unit
6.4.1 Mounting drive shafts and bevel gear

The process of mounting the drive shafts and bevel gear is described in the
installation and commissioning instructions for the on-load tap-changer / de-
energized tap-changer.

6 Mounting
6.4.2 Centering on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit

Danger of death or severe injury due to motor-drive unit starting up by acci-
dent and due to electric voltage!
► Before starting any coupling work make sure that the motor protective
switch is tripped.
► Carry out any adjustment work in manual mode only.
► When manually operating the motor-drive unit only use the hand crank
provided for this purpose.
► Note that the hand crank safety switch causes a 2-pole disconnection of
the motor circuit but that the control circuit is not interrupted.
NOTICE Damage to property!

The on-load tap-changer will be damaged by incorrectly centering the mo-
tor-drive unit.
► Do not perform more than 250 tap-change operations on the on-load tap-
changer. If more than 250 tap-change operations are performed, com-
pletely fill oil compartment with insulating oil and lubricate sliding surfaces
of contacts on selector and selector gear with insulating oil.
The following steps for centering the on-load tap-changer and motor-drive
unit do not apply to the DEETAP® DU or COMTAP® ARS devices. The
process for centering the motor-drive unit and DEETAP® DU or COM-
TAP® ARS devices is described in the relevant operating instructions.
One on-load tap-change operation is represented by one rotation of the tap-

change indicator. This indicator is divided into 33 tap-change indicator sec-
tions, each of which corresponds to one hand crank revolution in the stan-
dard motor-drive unit design. The time of the switchover depends on the on-
load tap-changer / de-energized tap-changer type, but is always 2 tap-
change indicator sections upstream of the area marked in gray on the tap-
change indicator at the latest.
To center the on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit, proceed as follows.

1. NOTICE! Move the on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-changer and
the motor-drive unit into the adjustment position before commencing any
adjustment work. Ensure that the tap position indicators for the motor-

6 Mounting
drive unit and the on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-changer match.

Otherwise damage to the on-load tap-changer and transformer may re-
sult.
Figure 79: Adjustment position
2. Attach the hand crank in the motor-drive unit to the shaft end located in
the upper cover plate. By doing so, the hand crank safety switch that trig-
gers the motor protective switch is actuated.
Figure 80: Hand crank

6 Mounting
3. Turn the hand crank clockwise until the diverter switch operation begins.
When turning the hand crank, observe the tap-change indicator, which
mechanically reflects the progress of the tap-change operation.
Figure 81: Turning the hand crank
4. Once the diverter switch operation begins, continue to turn in the same di-
rection while counting the tap-change indicator sections required for the
pointer to reach the mid-position of the area marked in gray on the tap-
change indicator. Note the number counted (value A) and the direction of
rotation (example: A=2).
Figure 82: Counting the tap changes needed to reach the mid-position
5. If value A is greater than 8 tap-change indicator sections, the tap-change

operation has been completed correctly. If value A is less than 8 tap-
change indicator sections, turn another 8-A tap-change indicator sections

6 Mounting
in the same direction (example: 8-2=6) to complete the tap-change opera-

tion. Then turn in the opposite direction until the pointer is in the mid-posi-
tion of the area marked in gray on the tap-change indicator.
Figure 83: Completing the diverter switch operation
6. Turn the hand crank counter-clockwise until the diverter switch operation
begins.
Figure 84: Turning the hand crank in the opposite direction

6 Mounting
7. Once the diverter switch operation begins, continue to turn in the same di-
rection while counting the tap-change indicator sections required for the
pointer to reach the mid-position of the area marked in gray on the tap-
change indicator. Note the number counted (value B) and the direction of
rotation (example: B=5).
Figure 85: Counting the tap-change indicator sections needed to reach the mid-position
8. If value B is greater than 8 tap-change indicator sections, the tap-change

operation has been completed correctly. If value B is less than 8 tap-
change indicator sections, turn another 8 B tap-change indicator sections
in the same direction (example: 8-5=3) to complete the tap-change opera-
tion. Then turn in the opposite direction until the pointer is in the mid-posi-
tion of the area marked in gray on the tap-change indicator.
Figure 86: Completing the diverter switch operation
9. If the values obtained for A and B are identical, the on-load tap-changer
and the motor-drive unit are correctly coupled (a slight imbalance of maxi-
mum 1 tap-change indicator section is permitted). If the values obtained
for A and B are different, establish correction value C by halving the differ-
ence between A and B: C=|(A-B) x 0.5|
Example: C=|(2-5) x 0.5|=|-1.5|=1.5

6 Mounting
Also take numbers after the decimal point into account.
10. If the correction value |C| is less than 0.5 tap-change indicator sections,
no further action is required. Refer to item 18 for how to proceed next.
11. Use the hand crank to crank in the direction in which the determined
value A or B was higher (example: counter-clockwise, because B > A)
until the diverter switch operation begins.
12. Once the diverter switch operation begins, continue turning another 8
hand crank revolutions in the same direction to correctly complete the di-
verter switch operation.

6 Mounting
13. Uncouple the motor-drive unit and vertical drive shaft by removing the
coupling brackets. After uncoupling, do not turn the drive shaft any fur-
ther.
Figure 87: Uncoupling the motor-drive unit and drive shaft
14. Operate the motor-drive unit using the hand crank in the same direction,
continuing by C tap-change indicator sections on the tap-change indica-
tor (example: 1.5 tap-change indicator sections).
15. Couple the motor-drive unit and on-load tap-changer by refitting the verti-
cal drive shaft (tightening torque 9 Nm). Do not turn the drive shaft or
output shaft of the bevel gear or motor-drive unit any further.
16. Continue to turn in the same direction while counting the tap-change in-
dicator sections required for the pointer to reach the mid-position of the
area marked in gray on the tap-change indicator. Note the number
counted (value A) and the direction of rotation. If value A is greater than
8 tap-change indicator sections, the tap-change operation has been

6 Mounting
completed correctly. If value A is less than 8 tap-change indicator sec-

tions, turn another 8 A tap-change indicator sections in the same direc-
tion (example: 8-4=4) to complete the tap-change operation. Then turn in
the opposite direction until the indicator is in the mid-position of the area
marked in gray on the tap-change indicator. Check the coupling again as
described previously.
17. The pointer of the tap-change indicator must be in the mid-position of the
area marked in gray once the on-load tap-change operation with the
hand crank is complete.
Figure 88: Pointer in the mid-position
18. Once coupling is complete in both directions, check by carrying out sev-
eral on-load tap-change operations and check that the on-load tap-
changer and motor-drive unit are in the same tap position.
6.4.3 Connecting the gear motor
NOTICE Damage to the connecting cable!

Damage to the connecting cable due to impermissibly small bending radii
and kinks.
► When routing the connection cable, observe the minimum bending ra-
diuses: min. 51 mm for fixed routing, min. 170 mm if moved occasionally.
► When routing the connection cable, make sure that the maximum permit-
ted cable jacket temperature of 80°C is not exceeded during operation.

6 Mounting
To connect the gear motor, proceed as follows:

ü The control cabinet is installed at the desired location.
ü Use only the specified cables for wiring. Note cable recommendation.
1. Remove and dispose of the transport protective cap for the plug connector
of the gear motor.
2. Connect the connection cable provided to the plug connector of the gear
motor. Connect the other end of the connection cable to the terminal in
the control cabinet in accordance with the connection diagram provided.
Figure 89: Connecting the connection cable to the gear motor
3. Connect the earthing cable to the ground connection of the gear motor
and connect it to the ground connection on the on-load tap-changer head
or transformer.
Figure 90: Connection of the earthing cable on the earthing bar of the gear motor
1 Grounding bar

6 Mounting
4. Place the cable shield on the earthing bar of the control cabinet using the
clamping bracket.
Figure 91: Placing the cable shield with clamping bracket on the earthing bar
5. Optional with torque monitoring: Connect the rotary encoder connection

cable to the terminal in the control cabinet in accordance with the connec-
tion diagram provided.
6. Connect the shield of the connection cable (rotary encoder) provided us-
ing shielded clamps to the grounding bar in the control cabinet.

6 Mounting
6.5 Vibro-acoustic monitoring of the on-load tap-changer

(VAM)
6.5.1 Mounting the vibration sensor

When selecting the mounting position, ensure that there is the greatest pos-
sible clearance to the drive motor, drive shafts and pipelines to reduce the
disruptive effect on the vibro-acoustic recording to a minimum.
To mount the VAM sensor, proceed as follows:

1. Remove one bolt from the on-load tap-changer cover. Reuse the washer
that is present.
Figure 92: Removing bolt
2. NOTICE! Incorrect mounting can destroy the vibration sensor. Only apply
a tool with wrench size 17 to the lower hexagon of the adapter to attach
the sensor assembly. Place the washer over the open tapped hole and
screw in the sensor assembly (vibration sensor with adapter and kick
guard) with a torque of 34 Nm.

6 Mounting
Figure 93: Mounting the vibration sensor
6.5.2 Connecting the vibration sensor to the control cabinet

Depending on the application, one or more vibration sensors are included in
the scope of delivery. Repeat the following steps for a multi-column applica-
tion.
You must connect the vibration sensor to the control cabinet using the sen-
sor cable provided. Note the following information when routing the sensor
cable:
▪ Route the sensor cable with as much shielding as possible on the trans-
former (e.g. in the tube or cable duct) and along a conductive grounded
surface that runs without interruption.
▪ Route sensor cables separately from supply lines and do not create any
unnecessary loops.
▪ The vibration sensor cable can also be routed together with the tempera-
ture sensor cable in a protective tube.
▪ On the control cabinet, it is advantageous to have routing parallel to the
earthing cable that connects the transformer and the control cabinet to-
gether.

6 Mounting
To route the sensor cable, proceed as follows:

1. Remove the vibration sensor cover cap.
Figure 94: Vibration sensor cover cap
2. Ensure that the sensor cable plug and the socket on the sensor are dry
and free of dirt. If this is not the case, clean and dry them with a cloth.

6 Mounting
3. Plug in the sensor cable plug and screw it in by hand.
Figure 95: Plugging in the sensor cable
4. Route the sensor cable on the transformer to the control cabinet with
shielding to prevent mechanical damage and interference.

6 Mounting
5. Shorten the sensor cable to the desired length. Loops or coil windings of
an excessive length are not permitted when routing the cable.
Figure 96: Sensor cable routing
1 Temperature sensor cable 2 Control cabinet

3 Vibration sensor cable 4 Transformer
5 On-load tap-changer head cover
If the control cabinet is farther away, extend the sensor cable with a
shielded cable in the motor drive cabinet or in a metal intermediate terminal
box.
Follow the information in the Cable recommendation section and implement
continuous shielding.

6 Mounting
For the control cabinet connection, proceed as follows:

clamping bracket.
2. Connect the sensor cable in accordance with the connection diagram pro-
vided (blue = signal, brown = signal ground, black = ground in control cab-
inet).
6.5.3 Connecting the temperature sensor

Depending on the application, one or more temperature sensors are in-
cluded in the scope of delivery. When making the connection, follow the con-
nection diagram on the associated dimensional drawing. Make the connec-
tion to the control cabinet in accordance with the connection diagram pro-
vided for the monitoring system.

6 Mounting
6.6 Bushing monitoring
6.6.1 Preparation
Before installation, check that the serial numbers of the bushing adapter and
bushing coupling unit match those on the delivery slip and are appropriate
for the bushing you have specified.
6.6.2 Installing the bushing adapter

Carry out the operating steps listed below on all bushings.
To install the bushing adapter, proceed as follows:

1. Remove the safety cap for the bushing test tap. Store the safety cap in a
safe place for possible operation of the bushing later without the monitor-
ing system.
2. Ensure that the test tap and the bushing adapter are dry and free of dirt. If
this is not the case, clean and dry them with a cloth.
3. Ensure that the sealing ring of the bushing adapter is present and posi-
tioned correctly.
Figure 98: Checking the sealing ring (bushing adapter A001 and A002)

6 Mounting
4. Visually check that the pin of the test tap fits mechanically into the port of
the bushing adapter.
Figure 99: Checking the connection
5. NOTICE! Install the bushing adapter at the bushing test tap. Compare the
following reference values for the tightening torque with the specifications
of the bushing manufacturer and consult them if necessary. Otherwise,
leakage or damage to the bushing may occur.
Figure 100: Installing the bushing adapter (example using bushing adapter A002)
Type Tightening torque reference value

A001 6 ± 2 Nm
A002 30 Nm
A003 50 Nm
A004 10 Nm
A005 25 Nm

6 Mounting
Type Tightening torque reference value

A006 160 Nm
A007 35 Nm
A008 5 ± 1 Nm
A010 40 Nm
Table 27: Tightening torque reference values
6.6.3 Installing the bushing coupling unit
WARNING Time delayed explosion hazard and fire hazard!

Installing a bushing coupling unit with an incorrect capacitance value can
cause a malfunction and failure of the protective device. As a result, over-
heating occurs, posing a risk of explosion and serious injury.
► Perform a plausibility check in accordance with the following description.
► Proceed with installation and commissioning only if the target range of
the measured voltage is maintained. Otherwise, contact the manufacturer
and replace the bushing coupling unit.
Plausibility check
1. Check fields 1 and 2 separately to see if the respective capacitance value
of the bushing coupling unit is correct.
2. Use the following formula to calculate the measured voltage at the output
of the bushing coupling unit:
Figure 101: Formula for plausibility check
Uout Measured voltage (output of bush- Ur Nominal voltage of transformer

ing coupling unit)
C1 Main capacitance of the bushing CBCU Capacitance of bushing coupling
unit
3. Compare the calculated value for Uout with the target range 55 V ≤ Uout
≤ 100 V.
4. If the calculated value is outside the target range, replace the bushing
coupling unit.
5. Proceed with assembly only if the bushing coupling unit is designed cor-
rectly. If in doubt, contact MR.
You can also use your own supporting plate instead of the provided sup-
porting plate. In this case, you must ensure that the bushing coupling unit is
continuously connected to the transformer tank by a low-resistance connec-
tion (e.g. via lock washers under the screw heads of the M4 fixing screws).
The necessary dimensions for the holes can be found in the technical data
for the bushing coupling unit [►Section 12.4.2.2, Page 497].

6 Mounting
Carry out the operating steps listed below on all bushings.
Install the bushing coupling unit onto the bushing flange near the bushing
adapter.
1. Unscrew the cover bolts for the bushing coupling unit and lift off the cover.
Figure 102: Loosening the screws and removing the cover
2. Align the supporting plate so that the grounding symbol is still clearly visi-
ble after installation. Insert Allen screws with lock washers into the in-
tended holes and fasten the supporting plate on the other side with lock
washers and nuts.
Figure 103: Fastening the bushing coupling unit to the supporting plate

6 Mounting
3. Place the cover on the bushing coupling unit and screw it in place.
Figure 104: Fastening the cover
4. Unscrew the fixing screw for the bushing flange.

5. Install the supporting plate on the bushing flange.
Figure 105: Installing the supporting plate on the bushing flange

6 Mounting
6. Connect the earthing cable to the supporting plate and transformer.
Figure 106: Connecting the earthing cable
6.6.4 Connecting the bushing adapter to the bushing coupling unit

The bushing adapter must be connected to the bushing coupling unit with
the connection cable provided. To do so, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the N female connector safety cap from the bushing adapter.
2. Ensure that the plug of the connection cable and the connections of the
bushing adapter and bushing coupling unit are dry and free of dirt. If this is
not the case, clean and dry them with a cloth.
3. Attach the connection cable plug to the bushing adapter and screw it in
place. Details on the thread can be found in the technical data.
Figure 107: Connecting the connection cable to the bushing adapter

6 Mounting
4. Attach the connection cable plug to the bushing coupling unit and screw it
in place.
Figure 108: Connecting the connection cable to the bushing coupling unit
6.6.5 Connecting the bushing coupling unit to the control cabinet

The bushing coupling unit must be connected to the control cabinet with the
connection cable provided. To do so, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the safety cap from the U connection of the bushing coupling
unit.
2. Ensure that the plug of the connection cable and the U connection of the
bushing coupling unit are dry and free of dirt. If this is not the case, clean
and dry them with a cloth.

6 Mounting
3. Attach the connection cable plug to the U connection of the bushing cou-
pling unit and screw it in place.
Figure 109: Connecting the connection cable to the bushing coupling unit

6 Mounting
4. NOTICE! Laying the connection cable on the transformer to the control

cabinet. While doing so, maintain the minimum permissible bending radius
of 50 mm and take precautions to protect the cable from mechanical dam-
age (e.g. protective tube). Otherwise, the connection cable may become
damaged.
Figure 110: Laying the connection cable to the control cabinet
5. Shorten the connection cable to the desired length.

6 Mounting
Connecting the connection cable in the control cabinet
The connection cable must be connected to the terminal in the control cabi-
net in accordance with the connection diagram. You must place the cable
shield on the earthing bar using the clamping bracket.
clamping bracket.
2. Connect the connection cable to the measuring card as shown in the con-
nection diagram.
3. NOTICE! Do not install this line together with the load line.
6.6.6 Connecting the voltage transformers for the reference system
NOTICE Damage to the device!

If the voltage transformer and device have different potentials, current may
flow across the shielding. This current may damage the device.
► Connect the devices to a potential equalization rail to equalize the poten-
tial.
► If both devices have different potentials, only connect the cable's shield-
ing to one device.

6 Mounting
To connect the voltage transformers for the reference system, proceed as

follows:
1. Remove the cable insulation and crimp a wire end sleeve to the end.
Figure 112: Removing the cable insulation
2. Connect the voltage transformers to terminal X10 in accordance with the

connection diagram.
UI
L1 L2 L3 N
VT VT VT
L1
L2
L3
Figure 113: Connecting the voltage transformers for the reference system

6 Mounting
clamping bracket.

6 Mounting
6.7 Connecting the control cabinet

Current flow through the shielding of signal lines can cause the device to
become damaged.
► Use potential equalization to ensure that the control cabinet and trans-
former are on the same potential and connect the shielding of the signal
lines on both ends.
► If potential equalization cannot be assured, only connect the shielding of
the signal lines in the control cabinet. In this case, the effectiveness of the
shielding against interference is reduced.
To connect the control cabinet, proceed as follows:

ü Observe information in the following chapters.
ü Observe the connection diagrams in the document pouch.
1. Connect the signal lines in accordance with the connection diagram.
2. Connect the power supply in accordance with the connection diagram.
6.7.1 Cable recommendation

Please note the following Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH recommenda-
tion when wiring the device.
▪ Electromagnetic interference on signal lines, which can be expected due
to the transformer's surroundings, can disrupt the proper operation of the
device.
▪ Where possible, route signal lines with shielding.
▪ Excessive line capacitance can prevent the relay contacts from interrupt-
ing the contact current. In control circuits operated with alternating current,
take into account the effect of the line capacitance of long control cables
on the function of the relay contacts.
▪ If you want to route Ethernet connections from a control cabinet or build-
ing, we recommend using fiber-optic cables (in accordance with the
IEC 61850-90-4 recommendation). If use of fiber-optic cables is not possi-
ble, you must ensure that the cable shield is placed in the control cabinet
(e.g. on the grounding bar or using a network socket for cap rail installa-
tion).
▪ Ensure that the copper cables used have a temperature resistance of
70°C.
Cable Assembly Cable type Conductor Conductor Max. length
cross-section material
Voltage measurement UI 1, UI 3, UI 5-4 Shielded 2.5 mm² Copper -
Current measurement UI 1, UI 3, UI 5-4 Unshielded 4 mm² Copper -
Voltage measurement U 3 Shielded 2.5 mm² Copper -
Current measurement I 3 Unshielded 2.5 mm² Copper -

6 Mounting
Cable Assembly Cable type Conductor Conductor Max. length

cross-section material
Signal inputs DIO 28-15, Shielded 1.5 mm2 Copper 400 m (<25 Ω/km)
DIO 42-20
Signal outputs DIO 28-15, Shielded 1.5 mm2 Copper -
DIO 42-20
Signal inputs DI 16 Shielded 1.5 mm2 Copper 400 m (<25 Ω/km)
2
Signal outputs DO 8 Shielded 1.5 mm Copper -
2
Signal inputs AIO 2, AIO 4, Shielded 1 mm Copper 400 m (<25 Ω/km)
AIO 8
Signal outputs AIO 2, AIO 4, Shielded 1 mm2 Copper -
AIO 8
Signal inputs AI 4, AI 4-T Shielded 1 mm2 Copper 400 m (<25 Ω/km)
2
Signal outputs AO 4 Shielded 1 mm Copper -
2
RS232, SUB-D CPU I, CPU II Shielded 0.25 mm - 25 m
2
RS485; SUB-D CPU I, CPU II Shielded 0.25 mm - 140 m
CAN bus CPU I Shielded 0.75 mm² - 2,000 m (total
CAN bus)
Ethernet RJ45 CPU I Min. CAT5, - - 100 m
shielded S/FTP
RS232, RJ45 CPU Shielded 0.25 mm2 - 2.5 m (internal)
2
RS485; RJ45 CPU Shielded 0.25 mm - 140 m
Ethernet RJ45 CPU Min. CAT5, - - 100 m
shielded S/FTP
Ethernet FO MC 2-2, SW 3-3 Duplex LC - - 2000 m
Multimode, OM3,
1310 nm
Ethernet RJ45 COM-ETH Min. CAT5, - - 100 m
shielded S/FTP
Table 28: Recommendation for connection cables
Circuit Function Type Material

Motor circuit Power supply Unshielded, separate Copper
cable
Control circuit Power supply Unshielded, separate Copper
cable
Tap-change super- Shielded Copper
visory control
Pulse circuit, raise/ Shielded Copper
lower
Tripping circuit Q1- Shielded Copper
Off
Monitoring circuit Temperature sen- Shielded Copper
sor

6 Mounting
Circuit Function Type Material

Signaling circuits Signal transmission Shielded Copper
Cross wiring between Power supply Unshielded, separate Copper
motor-drive units cable
Tap-change super- Shielded Copper
visory control
Pulse circuit, raise/ Shielded Copper
lower
Tripping circuit Q1- Shielded Copper
Off
6.7.2 Cable bushing in the base plate of the control cabinet

Depending on the configuration, the product can be equipped with different
types of cable bushings in the base plate of the control cabinet. Observe the
instructions described below for handling.
6.7.2.1 Base plate with Roxtec CF32 cable bushing
The base plate is equipped with a cable bushing of type Roxtec CF32.
Figure 115: Base plate with Roxtec CF32 cable bushing
1 Dummy plug 2 Terminal module
The following parts are included:

▪ Prepress tool for CF8/32
▪ Lubricant to grease the sealing module
▪ 14x sealing module CM 20w40 for two cables with a diameter of
3.5...16.5 mm

6 Mounting
▪ 1x sealing module CM 40 10-32 for one cable with a diameter of

9.5...32.5 mm
▪ Installation instructions
You will find more information on handling the cable bushing on the manu-
facturer website (www.roxtec.com).
To feed through the cable, proceed as follows. Also follow the included in-
stallation instructions.
1. Unscrew the nut and remove the terminal module.
2. Remove the required number of dummy plugs.
3. Clean the installation frame and then grease it with the lubricant.
4. Feed in the cable through the installation frame.
5. Remove the inserts of the sealing module so that the distance between
the two parts of the sealing module is 0.1...1 mm when the cable is in-
serted.
6. Grease the sealing module with the lubricant on all sides.
7. Mount both parts of the sealing module with the cable in the installation
frame. If there is more than one sealing module, start with the largest.
8. Press the sealing modules together with the prepress tool to then be able
to insert the terminal module.
9. Insert the terminal module.
10. Tighten the nut of the terminal module with a tightening torque of
8...12 Nm.

6 Mounting
6.7.2.2 Base plate with metric cable glands
The base plate is equipped with holes for metric cable glands. The cable
glands are optionally included depending on your order. If you would like to
use your own cable glands, then follow the installation instructions of the ca-
ble gland manufacturer.
Figure 116: Base plate with metric cable gland
1 3x M40 2 5x M32
3 20x M25 4 2x M20
Mounting your own cable bushings
Mount the cable bushings based on the instructions from the manufacturer.

Cable bushings made of metal may carry current in the event of a fault and
could cause an electric shock when touched. They must therefore be effec-
tively connected to the protective ground of the control cabinet.
► Connect metal cable bushings to the control cabinet in an electrically con-
ductive manner. To do so, use toothed lock washers for the screw con-
nection on the inside of the control cabinet or remove the paint on the in-
side of the control cabinet around the hole.
Mounting cable bushings (optionally included)
Note that the degree of protection of the control cabinet is reduced if the ca-
ble glands have a lower degree of protection than IP66. Information on the
degree of protection of the included cable glands can be found in the corre-
sponding dimensional drawing.

6 Mounting
Nominal size Width across flat Tightening torque x

A
Plastic Stainless steel
M20 25 6 Nm 8 Nm
M25 30 8 Nm 10 Nm
M32 36 10 Nm 20 Nm
M40 46 13 Nm 20 Nm
Table 29: Tightening torque for included intermediate supports and cap nuts
To feed through the cable, proceed as follows:

1. Remove the blank cover using a screwdriver; hold against the hexagon
nut inside of the control cabinet using an open-end wrench when doing
so.
Figure 117: Removing the blank cover
2. Mount the intermediate supports and screw in with the tightening torque
according to the table mentioned above.
Figure 118: Mounting the intermediate supports
3. Thread the cap nut onto the cable.

6 Mounting
4. Pull the cable through the bushing and the cap nut with the tightening
torque according to the table mentioned above.
Figure 119: Fastening the cable bushing
6.7.2.3 Base plate with flange opening FL21
The base plate is equipped with three flange openings of size FL21. The
flange openings are closed with blank covers in the delivery state. You can
mount an FL21 size cable bushing or insert your own cable glands in the
blank covers.
Figure 120: Base plate with FL21 flange openings
1 Flange opening with blank cover
To feed through the cable, proceed as follows:

1. Remove the blank cover.
2. Insert cable bushing size FL21 or cable gland in blank cover.
3. Feed the cable through the cable bushing in accordance with the manu-
facturer's specifications.
4. Mount the cable bushing or the blank cover and tighten with a tightening
torque of 20 Nm.

6 Mounting
6.7.3 Electromagnetic compatibility

The device has been developed in accordance with applicable EMC stan-
dards. The following points must be noted in order to maintain the EMC
standards.
6.7.3.1 Wiring requirement of installation site
Note the following when selecting the installation site:

▪ The system's overvoltage protection must be effective.
▪ The system's ground connection must comply with all technical regula-
tions.
▪ Separate system parts must be joined by a potential equalization.
▪ The device and its wiring must be at least 10 m away from circuit-break-
ers, load disconnectors and busbars.
6.7.3.2 Wiring requirement of operating site
Note the following when wiring the operating site:

▪ Route the connecting leads in grounded metal cable ducts.
▪ Do not route lines which cause interference (e.g. power lines) and lines
susceptible to interference (e.g. signal lines) in the same cable duct.
▪ Maintain a distance of more than 100 mm between lines which cause in-
terference and those which are susceptible to interference.
Figure 121: Recommended wiring
1 Cable duct for lines causing inter- 3 Cable duct for lines susceptible to
ference interference
2 Line causing interference (e.g. 4 Line susceptible to interference
power line) (e.g. signal line)
▪ Short-circuit and ground reserve lines.

▪ Never connect the device with a multi-wire collective pipe.

6 Mounting
▪ For signal transmission, use shielded lines with individual conductors (out-
going conductor / return conductor) twisted in pairs.
▪ Connect full surface of shielding (360º) to device or to a nearby grounding
bar.
Using single conductors may limit the effectiveness of the shielding. Con-
nect close-fitting shielding to cover all areas.
Figure 122: Recommended connection of the shielding
1 Connection of the shielding via a 2 Full-surface connection of the

single conductor shielding
6.7.3.3 Wiring requirement in control cabinet
Note the following when wiring in the control cabinet:

▪ The control cabinet where the device will be installed must be prepared in
accordance with EMC requirements:
– Functional division of the control cabinet (physical separation)
– Constant potential equalization (all metal parts are joined)
– Line routing in accordance with EMC requirements (separation of lines
which cause interference and those susceptible to interference)
– Optimum shielding (metal housing)
– Overvoltage protection (lightning protection)
– Collective grounding (main grounding rail)
– Cable bushings in accordance with EMC requirements
– Any contactor coils present must be interconnected
▪ The device's connection cables must be laid in close contact with the
grounded metal housing or in metallic cable ducts with a ground connec-
tion.
▪ Signal lines and supply lines / switching lines must be laid in separate ca-
ble ducts.

6 Mounting
Figure 123: Cable ducts and grounding bar in the control cabinet
1 Cable duct for supply cables and 2 Grounding bar

switching lines
3 Cable duct for signal lines
6.7.4 Information about connecting serial interfaces RS232 and RS485

Using the wrong data cable may damage the device.
► Only use data cables which comply with the description below.
RS232 (D-SUB 9-pin)
To connect the device via the RS232 interface (COM2), use a data cable
with the following structure:
Figure 124: RS232 data cable (9-pin)

6 Mounting
RS485 (D-SUB 9-pin)
To connect the device via the RS485 interface (COM2), use a data cable
with the following structure:
Figure 125: RS485 data cable
D-SUB 9-pin plug connection
Only use 9-pin D-SUB plugs with the following characteristics:

▪ Plug housing is metallic or metal-plated
▪ Cable shielding is connected with the plug using one of the following two
variants:
– Shielding is screwed down with traction relief.
– Shielding is soldered to the plug housing.
Figure 126: Example of a soldered shielding on a plug housing

6 Mounting
6.7.5 Information on connecting to the CAN bus
6.7.5.1 Mounting terminating resistor of CAN bus
If you want to operate the device in parallel operation, you need to mount a
120 Ω terminating resistor at both ends of the CAN bus. Use the plug con-
nector with terminating resistor provided as an option.
Figure 127: Terminating resistor of CAN bus
6.7.5.2 Information about shielding the CAN bus
In order for the CAN bus to operate faultlessly, you have to connect the
shielding using one of the following variants. If you are not able to use any of
the variants detailed below, we recommend using fiber-optic cables. Fiber-
optic cables decouple the devices and are not sensitive to electromagnetic
interference (surge and burst).

If you connect the CAN bus cable to devices with different potentials, cur-
rent may flow across the shielding. This current may damage the device.
► Connect the devices to a potential equalization rail to equalize the poten-
tial.
► If both devices have different potentials, only connect the CAN bus cable
shielding to one device.
Variant 1: The connected devices share the same potential
If the devices to be connected share the same potential, proceed as follows:

1. Connect all devices to a potential equalization rail to equalize the poten-
tial.
2. Connect the CAN bus cable shielding to all connected devices.

6 Mounting
Variant 2: The connected devices have different potential levels
Note that the shielding is less effective with this variant.
If the devices to be connected have different potential levels, proceed as fol-

lows:
► Connect the CAN bus cable shielding to just one device.
Connecting shielding
Connect the shielding for the CAN bus cable to the 9-pin D-sub connector:
5 9
1 6
Figure 128: Connection of CAN bus cable shielding to the 9-pin D-sub connector
6.7.6 Information about connecting analog sensors
NOTICE Damage to the device and sensors!

Incorrectly connected and configured analog inputs/outputs may result in
damage to the device and sensor.
► Follow information about connecting analog sensors [►Section 6.7.6,
Page 140].
► Configure analog inputs and outputs according to the connected sensors.
6.7.6.1 Information about shielding the cables for analog signals
In order to correctly record the analog signals, you must place the cable
shielding on the grounding bar in the control cabinet. The cable shielding
should only be removed just prior to connecting to ensure that the section
with unshielded cables is kept as short as possible. Observe the notes in the
connection diagram.

6 Mounting
Direct connection to ISM assemblies
If you connect the analog signals directly to the ISM assembly, you must
place the cable shield on the grounding bar in the control cabinet using a
clamping bracket.
Figure 129: Placing the cable shield with clamping bracket on the grounding bar
Connection to transfer module
If you connect the analog signals to the transfer module, you must place the
cable shield on the transfer module using a shielding terminal.
Figure 130: Placing cable shield on transfer module

6 Mounting
6.7.6.2 AIO connection example
The AIO assembly has a separate plug connector for each channel (input or
output). The plugs are assigned as follows:
RDY
AIO
1 11
2
3
12
13
1
4 14
5 15
1
2
24V DC
+ 2
-
3 3
4
6 16 4
7
8
9
17
18
19
5
10 20
5
Figure 131: Plug assignment of the AIO module (illustration using module AIO 4 as an example)
Interface Pin Description

1 6 11 16 I OUT (+): Current output +
2 7 12 17 I/U IN (+) U OUT (+): Voltage input
+, current input +, voltage output +
3 8 13 18 I/U IN (-): Voltage input -, current in-
put -
4 9 14 19 I/U OUT (-): Voltage output -, current
output -
5 10 15 20 Not used
Table 30: Analog inputs and outputs
You can connect the following types of analog sensors:

▪ 4...20 mA
▪ PT100/PT1000 (2-wire, 3-wire, 4-wire)

6 Mounting
4...20 mA sensor
You must connect a 4...20 mA sensor to the pins and . You must also
connect the included bridge to the pins , and .
4...20 mA signal source
1 I OUT (+)
I/U IN (+)
2 U OUT (+)
3 I/U IN (-)
4 I/U OUT (+)
5 ---
Figure 132: Connection example for a 4...20 mA sensor
PT100/PT1000 sensor
Depending on type, you must connect a PT100 sensor or PT1000 sensor as

follows:
▪ 2-wire: pin and
▪ 3-wire: pin , and
▪ 4-wire: pin , , and
PT100/PT1000
2-wire 3-wire 4-wire
1 I OUT (+) 1 I OUT (+) 1 I OUT (+)
I/U IN (+) I/U IN (+) I/U IN (+)

2 U OUT (+) 2 U OUT (+) 2 U OUT (+)
3 I/U IN (-) 3 I/U IN (-) 3 I/U IN (-)
4 I/U OUT (+) 4 I/U OUT (+) 4 I/U OUT (+)
5 --- 5 --- 5 ---
Figure 133: Connection example for a PT100/PT1000 sensor

6 Mounting
6.7.6.3 AI 4 connection example
The AI 4 assembly has a separate plug connector for each channel. The
plugs are assigned as follows:
4 U- voltage input
4 3 I- current input
3
2 I+ current output
2
1 U+ voltage output
1
Table 31: Plug assignment for assembly AI 4

▪ 4...20 mA
▪ 0…10 V
4...20 mA
signal source
4 U-
3 I-
2 I+
1 U+
Figure 134: Connection example for a 4...20 mA sensor

6 Mounting
0...10 V
signal source
4 U-
3 I-
2 I+
1 U+
Figure 135: Connection example for a 0...10 V sensor
6.7.6.4 AI 4-T connection example
The AI 4-T assembly has a separate plug connector for every two channels.
The plugs are assigned as follows:
10 IREF- current output B
10 9 IN V- voltage input B
9
8 IN V+ voltage input B
8
7 IREF+ current output B
7
6
6 Not used
5 5 Not used
4 4 IREF- current output A
3
3 IN V- voltage input A
2
2 IN V+ voltage input A
1
1 IREF+ current output A
Table 32: Plug assignment

▪ PT100/PT1000 (2-wire)
▪ PT100/PT1000 (3-wire)
▪ PT100/PT1000 (4-wire)

6 Mounting
PT100/PT1000
2-wire 3-wire 4-wire
A B A B A B
5 6 --- 5 6 --- 5 6 ---
4 10 IREF- 4 10 IREF- 4 10 IREF-
3 9 IN V- 3 9 IN V- 3 9 IN V-
2 8 IN V+ 2 8 IN V+ 2 8 IN V+
1 7 IREF+ 1 7 IREF+ 1 7 IREF+
Figure 136: Connection example for a PT100/PT1000 sensor
6.7.6.5 AO 4 connection example
The AO 4 assembly has a separate plug connector for each channel. The
plugs are assigned as follows:
4 Not used
4 3 V- current input
3
2 V+ current output
2
1 Not used
1
Table 33: Plug assignment for assembly AO 4
They can output the following signal types:

▪ 4...20 mA
▪ 0…10 V

6 Mounting
4...20 mA
0...10 V
4 ---
3 V-
2 V+
1 ---
Figure 137: Connection example of an analog display device
6.7.7 Information on connecting the socket circuit

Connecting a socket that is not suitable for the grid type can lead to electric
shock. This can lead to death or severe injuries.
► Connect the socket circuit in accordance with the connection diagram.
► Fuse the socket circuit in accordance with the specifications in the con-
nection diagram.
6.7.8 Information on connecting the power supply

Observe the following information on connecting the control cabinet to the
power supply.
6.7.8.1 Requirements on the power supply

The connection of the device to an isolated supply grid (IT system) makes
the protective grounding of the device ineffective. As a result, parts of the
device (e.g. housing) can conduct voltage in the event of a malfunction and
can result in electric shock when touched. This can lead to death, injuries
and property damage.
► Connect the device exclusively to supply grids that correspond to the TT
system or TN system in accordance with IEC 60364-1.
ETOS SD The power supply for the motor-drive unit must be able to provide 5…7 times
the nominal operating current of the motor-drive unit for one second. A maxi-
mum voltage tolerance of -15%…+10% of the nominal voltage must be ob-
served to avoid damage to the drive.

6 Mounting
ETOS TD You have to connect the motor-drive unit to an uninterruptible power supply
to be able to switch the on-load tap-changer if the power supply fails.
6.7.8.2 Disconnecting switch and fuses
Observe the following requirements on the disconnecting switch and fuses

for the control cabinet circuits.
Integrated fuse disconnect switch (optional)
If the control cabinet is fitted with an integrated fuse disconnect switch, you
can connect the circuit directly to the power supply.
Circuits without integrated fuse disconnect switch
You may only connect the control cabinet to circuits with an external over-
current protection device and an isolating device with all poles disconnected
so the equipment can be fully de-energized if required (service, maintenance
etc.).
Suitable equipment includes isolating devices in accordance with

IEC 60947-3 (e.g. switch disconnectors). Observe the properties of the rele-
vant circuits (voltage, maximum currents) when selecting the circuit breaker
type. In addition, observe the following:
▪ It must be easy for the operator to access the isolating device
▪ The isolating device must be labeled for the device and the circuits to be
isolated
▪ The isolating device may not be a part of the power line
▪ The isolating device may not interrupt the main protective conductor
Select the miniature circuit breaker based on the product's electrical power
data (voltage and current; see nameplate) and the internal wiring's conductor
cross-sections (see connection diagram):
▪ Max. 10 A at 0.75 mm²
▪ Max. 16 A at 1.5...2.5 mm²
6.7.8.3 Conductor cross-section
Unless specified otherwise, the connections for the supply circuits must have
a conductor cross-section of at least 2.5 mm2 (AWG 13). Check applicable
standards and directives to ensure that the specified minimum cross-section
of the supply line is sufficient.

6 Mounting
6.8 Checking functional reliability

To ensure that the device is wired correctly, check its functional reliability.
NOTICE Damage to device and system periphery!

An incorrectly connected device can cause damage to the device and sys-
tem periphery.
► Check the entire configuration before commissioning.
With ambient temperatures below 0°C, we recommend switching the control

cabinet heater on for at least 1 hour prior to commissioning.
► Apply voltage to the control cabinet.

ð The device control system boots up; after a brief period the relay switches
the operating contact STATUS OK.
The device is fully mounted and can be configured. The actions required for
this are described in the following chapter.

7 Commissioning
7 Commissioning
7.1 Commissioning the ETOS® ED motor-drive unit
Preparation
1. Make sure that the motor-drive unit is connected as shown in the connec-
tion diagram provided.
2. Ensure that all protective conductors are connected correctly.
3. Ensure that the preliminary fuse is selectively configured for the protective
devices in the motor-drive unit.
4. Ensure that motor-drive unit and on-load tap-changer are correctly cou-
pled and the operating positions of the motor-drive unit and on-load tap-
changer match.
5. Ensure that the hand crank is not inserted in the hand crank aperture.
6. Ensure that all signaling contacts provided in the connection diagram are
output and monitored in the control room.
7. Ensure that the motor protective switch and control circuit fuse are dis-
abled.
Commissioning
ü With ambient temperatures below 0°C, we recommend switching the con-
trol cabinet heater on for at least 1 hour prior to commissioning.
1. Apply voltage to the motor-drive unit.
2. Measure the voltage and frequency of the motor circuit at terminal X1 and
compare with the details on the nameplate. The details must match.
3. As an option with separate control-circuit supply: Measure the voltage and
frequency of the control circuit at terminal X1 and compare with the details
on the nameplate. The details must match.
4. As an option with separate heating-circuit supply: Measure the voltage of
the heater circuit at terminal X1 and compare with the details on the con-
nection diagram. The details must match.
5. As an option with three-phase motor: Ensure that the voltage applied to
the connection terminals has a clockwise phase sequence.
6. As an option with DC motor: Ensure that the motor voltage has the right
potential connection.
7. Engage the motor protective switch and fuses for the control circuit and
heater circuit (if present).
ð The voltage monitor LED and thermostat LED (if present) on the rear of
the swing frame must light up green.
8. Close the motor-drive unit and secure it against unauthorized opening by
using a padlock.
ð Commissioning is complete.

7 Commissioning
Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH if anything is not clear or you

encounter problems during commissioning.

7 Commissioning
7.2 Commissioning the ISM®
7.2.1 Establishing connection to visualization

You can use the ETH2.1 interface or the optional ETH2.2 interface of the
CPU assembly to establish the connection to the visualization. The inter-
faces do not use a DHCP server. Therefore, you must assign a static IP ad-
dress to your PC. To do this, observe the following configuration example:
Interface Configuration
Standard ETH2.1 IP address: 192.168.165.1 (not adjustable)
PC IP address: 192.168.165.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Optional ETH2.2 IP address: 192.0.1.230 (factory setting) [►Section
8.1.4, Page 173]
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
PC IP address: 192.0.1.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Table 34: Interface configuration example
System requirements
To access the web-based visualization, you need a PC with an HTML5-ca-

pable browser. The display is optimized for the following browsers:
▪ Microsoft® Internet Explorer 11
▪ Google Chrome™
To establish a connection, proceed as follows:

1. Connect the PC and device using an Ethernet cable (RJ45 plug) via the
ETH2.1 or ETH2.2 interface.
Figure 138: Establishing a connection via the ETH2.1 or ETH2.2 interface

7 Commissioning
2. Assign a unique IP address to the PC. This IP address must be in the

same subnet as the device (e.g. ETH2.1: 192.168.165.100).
3. Enter the IP address of the visualization (e.g. ETH2.1:
http://192.168.165.1; if SSL encryption is active, enter
https://192.168.165.1) in the browser on the PC.
ð The visualization is accessed.

To establish a connection for visualization, you must connect the CPU as-
sembly to a PC via interface X2. The interface does not use a DHCP server,
so you must assign a fixed IP address to your PC. To do this, observe the
following configuration example:
CPU-X2 IP address: 192.168.165.1 (not adjustable)
PC IP address: 192.168.165.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
System requirements


7 Commissioning

1. Connect PC and device via the CPU-X2 interface using an Ethernet cable
(RJ45 plug).
CP - 8050
RS-232
X5
SICAM A8000
RS-485
X4
ETH
X3
RY ER
ETH
X2
2
X1
1
Figure 139: Establishing a connection via the CPU-X2 interface

3. Enter the visualization IP address (http://192.168.165.1, or, with
active SSL encryption, https://192.168.165.1) in the browser on the
PC.
7.2.3 Setting the language

You can use this parameter to set the display language for the device. The
device comes with a maximum of four languages.
English Italian*
German Portuguese*
French* Russian*
Spanish* Chinese*
Korean* Polish*
Table 36: Available display languages

7 Commissioning
*) Language is available as an option

1. Select the Language button in the status bar, or as an alternative, go to
Settings> System > General > Language.
Figure 140: Setting the language
2. Select the desired language from the list box.

3. Press the Accept button to save the modified parameter.
ð The "Restart device" dialog appears.
4. Restart the device to apply the changed language setting.
7.2.4 Commissioning wizard

If you want the device to help when setting the relevant parameters, you can
use the commissioning wizard. The commissioning wizard provides a selec-
tion of parameters that you can configure in order.
A detailed description of each of the parameters can be found in the Opera-

tion [►Section 8, Page 167] chapter.
To call up the commissioning wizard, you will need the necessary access
rights [►Section 8.1.18, Page 238].
When in delivery status, you can log in as the administrator as follows:

▪ User name: admin
▪ Password: admin

7 Commissioning
To set the parameters with the help of the commissioning wizard, proceed
as follows:
1. Log in as a user with the necessary access rights.
2. Go to Settings > Commissioning wizard.
Figure 141: Calling up the commissioning wizard
3. Press the Next button to launch the commissioning wizard.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Once you have entered all of the parameters relevant to commissioning,

continue with the function test.
Downloading the operating instructions
Download the operating instructions from the device to start device parame-
terization.
► Select in the status line.
ð The operating instructions will be downloaded.
The document is also available for download in the MR Customer Portal and
on our website www.reinhausen.com.
7.2.5 Configuring analog inputs and outputs (optional)

You can flexibly configure the device's analog inputs and outputs and assign
device functions.
The device supports analog sensors with linear characteristic curves and
only outputs analog signals with linear characteristic curves.

7 Commissioning
Correction factor and offset Setting a correction offsets systematic errors of the analog signals. The cor-
rection is determined by multiplying a factor by the sum of the offset. The
minimum and maximum values of the function values apply as a limit value
for the correction. There is no limit for the correction offset.
Measured variable
Max.
Correction factor
Correction offset
Min.
Min. Max. Analog signal
Figure 142: Analog signal with linear characteristic curve, correction factor <1 and correction off-
set
If you have connected sensors over the MR sensor bus, you must select the
"Modbus" signal type for the desired functions. Observe the additional infor-
mation provided in the MR sensor bus [►Section 8.1.14, Page 218] section.

Page 140].
The following information is displayed in tabular form for configuring the ana-
log inputs and outputs. Grayed-out elements cannot be changed.
Property Options
Function Function of the analog input (I: ...) or the analog output
(O: ...). You can adjust the designation.
Signal type Select signal type of analog sensor or deactivate analog
output.
▪ 4...20 mA
▪ PT100-2/3/4, PT1000-2/3/4
▪ Modbus (MR sensor bus)
1)
Card/channel Select the slot and channel of the analog sensor. Note the
connection diagram supplied.
Unit 1) Set the unit of the signal.
1)
Decimal places Set up to three decimal places.

7 Commissioning
Property Options
Minimum/maximum Set the minimum and maximum values of the sensor, e.g.
value 2) with a 4...20 mA signal, the corresponding measured
value for 4 mA and the corresponding value for 20 mA.
Correction factor 3) Set the correction factor (m) for the correction of the func-
tion value (x). The corrected function value (y) is:
y = (m * x) + t
Correction offset 3) Set the offset (t) for the correction of the function value
(x). The corrected function value (y) is: y = (m * x) + t
Table 37: Configuration of the analog inputs and outputs
1)
Only available for GPAI.
2)
Not available with sensors connected over the MR sensor bus (Modbus).
3)
Only available for inputs.
Property Options
output.
▪ 4...20 mA
▪ PT100-2/3/4, PT1000-2/3/4
1)
value with a 4...20 mA signal, the corresponding measured
y = (m * x) + t
1)

7 Commissioning
2)
Figure 143: Configuring analog inputs/outputs
You can only change the configuration of the analog inputs and outputs if
you have a Parameter Configurator or Administrator role.

▪ Password: admin
Creating a backup
You need to create a backup to be able to reset the system in the event that
any incorrect configuration settings are made. To do so, proceed as follows:
1. Go to Settings > Export.
2. Go to the option Settings to export a backup copy of the current settings.
3. Select the desired Interface (USB or PC).
4. Press the Export button to start the export.
Configuring AIO
1. Go to Settings > AIO configuration.
2. Configure properties such as function, signal type and card/channel.

7 Commissioning
3. Select the button to configure the values as desired.
Figure 144: Entering values
4. Press the Accept button.

5. Confirm the security prompt with Save to save the changes.
7.2.6 Checking measured values and status of digital inputs and

outputs
Upon commissioning the device, check whether the measured values and
status of digital inputs and outputs are plausible. To do so, use an additional
measuring device if necessary in order to check the individual measured val-
ues.
To display the status of the digital inputs and outputs, proceed as follows:
1. Go to Information > Hardware.
2. Select the individual assemblies one after another and check the individ-
ual measured values or the status of digital inputs and outputs.
3. If errors arise, check the measurement path and the wiring.
7.2.7 Checking the temperature measurement

To commission the device, check whether the measured temperatures are
plausible, the temperature sensors are correctly wired and are assigned to
the desired functions. To do so, proceed as follows:
1. Display the temperature curve [►Section 8.4.3, Page 350].
2. Use a suitable measuring instrument to measure the temperatures at the
measurement points and compare these values to the displayed tempera-
tures.
ð The temperatures must match, though small deviations are permitted
due to the measurement tolerances.

7 Commissioning
3. If the temperatures do not match, use the connection diagram to check

the wiring. Check configuration of the analog inputs [►Section 7.2.5,
Page 156]. Check the function of the temperature sensors.

7 Commissioning
7.3 ETOS® ED motor-drive unit function test

Risk of death or severe injury due to electrical voltage!
► Make sure that the motor-drive unit is correctly connected as shown in
the connection diagrams provided.
► Make sure that the supply voltage is matched to the technical data of the
motor-drive unit.
► Ensure contact safety before performing the checks and tests. The trans-
mission gear cover plate must be fitted and the motor and swing frame
closed.
► Ensure that the motor-drive unit and on-load tap-changer/de-energized
tap-changer are correctly coupled and that they are in the same tap posi-
tion for each operating position.
Please contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH (MR) if any aspect of

the tests is not clear.
7.3.1 Checking correct electric switch-off

1. Change over motor-drive unit by moving control switch S3.
2. Check that the pointer of the tap-change indicator stops within the gray
field after completing a tap-change operation.
3. Carry out this test in both directions.
7.3.2 Checking mechanical and electric end stop of on-load tap-

changer/de-energized tap-changer and motor-drive unit
1. Press the S3 control switch to switch the motor-drive unit to the second-
to-last operating position.
2. Open the control cabinet door and switch off motor protective switch Q1
(position O).
3. Using the hand crank, operate the motor-drive unit to move it to its last op-
erating position. If the last operating position is not reached, check the
coupling between the on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-changer
and motor-drive unit.
4. Continue turning the motor-drive unit in the same direction with the hand
crank until the motor-drive unit is mechanically blocked.
5. Turn back the motor-drive unit with the hand crank to the mid-position of
the tap-change indicator.
6. Remove the hand crank.
7. Switch on motor protective switch Q1 (position I).

7 Commissioning
8. Check that the motor-drive unit no longer starts up when the S3 switch is
turned further in the same operating direction as under item 1.
9. Perform the check for both end positions.
7.3.3 Checking tripping of motor protective switch

Proceed as follows to check tripping of the motor protective switch:
ü The motor protective switch Q1 is switched on (position I).
1. Close X1:14 - X1:15 Q1 OFF connection to trip the motor protective
switch.
ð The motor protective switch is tripped (position O). If the motor protec-
tive switch is not tripped, contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
2. Switch on motor protective switch again (position I).
ð The tripping of the motor protective switch is checked.

7 Commissioning
7.4 ETOS® TD motor-drive unit function test

Danger of death or severe injury due to electrical voltage and incorrect as-
sembly!
► Ensure that the motor-drive unit is connected in accordance with the con-
nection diagrams provided.
► Ensure protection against contact; the cover plates must be closed.
To check that the motor-drive unit is functioning, proceed as follows:

1. Synchronize the motor-drive unit [►Section 8.6.7, Page 425].
2. Move the motor-drive unit into the lowest operating position.
3. Lower the tap position of the motor-drive unit once more.
ð The motor-drive unit tap position must not change since it is in the end
position.
4. Move the motor-drive unit into the highest operating position.
5. Raise the tap position of the motor-drive unit once more.
ð The motor-drive unit tap position must not change since it is in the end
position.
ð The motor-drive unit function test is complete. Contact Maschinenfabrik
Reinhausen if faults occurred during the function test.
7.5 Tests on the transformer

Please contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH (MR) if any aspect of
the tests is not clear.
7.5.1 High-voltage tests on the transformer

Before performing the lightning and impulse voltage test on the transformer,
the following must be ensured:
▪ The connecting cable between the sealing module and the control cabinet
does not need to be disconnected.
▪ Disconnect the control cabinet from the electrical supply grid.
▪ Disconnect the supply cable from the control cabinet.
▪ Coil the supply cable and position it safely directly on the control cabinet.

7 Commissioning
Note the following points before performing high-voltage tests on the trans-
former:
▪ Ensure that the oil compartment of the on-load tap-changer is completely
filled with insulating fluid.
▪ Ensure that the on-load tap-changer is filled completely with insulating
fluid.
▪ Ensure that all protective devices for the on-load tap-changer are function-
ing correctly and are ready for use.
▪ Check that the ground connections on the control cabinet and the control
cabinet fixings are free of paint.
▪ Only perform a high voltage test with the control cabinet door closed.
▪ Disconnect the sensor cable and other external connections to electronic
components in the control cabinet to prevent damage through overvolt-
age.
▪ Disconnect the sensor cables on external sensors to avoid damaging the
sensor due to overvoltage.
▪ Remove the bushing adapter and fit the cap of the bushing test tap.
▪ When connecting the control cabinet supply voltage, only use the cable
bushings provided for this in the control cabinet base.
▪ Guide all ground connecting leads to one central connection point (estab-
lishment of suitable reference earth).
▪ Disconnect all electronic components before the high voltage test. Before
a dielectric test of the wiring, remove all devices with a withstand voltage
of < 1,000 V.
▪ Remove leads used for testing before the high voltage test, because
these function as antennas.
▪ Wherever possible, route the measurement leads and data leads sepa-
rately to the energy cables.
Contact the manufacturer if you have any questions about possible sources
of danger.
7.5.2 Dielectric tests on transformer wiring

Note the following points for dielectric tests on the transformer wiring:
The motor-drive unit is put through dielectric tests before delivery.

► Before the dielectric test for the transformer wiring, disconnect drive from
the section to be tested to rule out increased component loading for those
components fitted in the motor-drive unit.

7 Commissioning
7.6 Transporting transformer to the operating site

If the drive must be removed in order to transport the transformer, proceed
as follows:
1. Ensure that the drive and the on-load tap-changer are in the adjustment
position.
2. Remove the drive.
3. Do not actuate the drive while the on-load tap-changer is uncoupled and
do not turn the output shaft.
4. Do not actuate an on-load tap-changer which is uncoupled and do not turn
its drive shaft.
5. Transport the drive to the installation site in the MR delivery packaging.
6. Fit drive and drive shaft to transformer at the installation site.
7.7 Commissioning the transformer at the operating site

Damage to the device due to condensate in the control cabinet.
► Always keep the control cabinet tightly closed.
► In the event of downtimes of more than 8 weeks prior to initial commis-
sioning or an operational interruption of more than 2 weeks, connect and
operate the anti-condensation heater in the control cabinet. If this is not
possible, place a sufficient amount of desiccant (silicon-free) in the con-
trol cabinet.
NOTICE Damage to the on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit!

Damage to on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit due to incorrect use of
position transmitter equipment.
► Only circuits stated in the chapter Technical data for position transmitter
equipment [►Section 12.3.2, Page 491] may be connected to the posi-
tion transmitter module connections.
► The switchover point of the position transmitter equipment in the motor-
drive unit is not the same as the switchover point of the diverter switch
operation. This depends on the type of diverter switch. This fact should
be noted when project planning the locking circuits between the motor-
drive unit and external equipment (e.g. transformer circuit breaker).
► Therefore, the "Tap changer in operation" position transit contact shown
in the connection diagram should be used for external monitoring, locking
and control purposes instead of the position transmitter equipment.
1. Commission motor-drive unit.

2. Ensure correct function of motor-drive unit.
3. Commission the transformer.

8 Operation
8 Operation
This chapter describes all the functions and setting options for the device.
8.1 System

You can use the ETH2.1 interface or the optional ETH2.2 interface of the
CPU assembly to establish the connection to the visualization. The inter-
faces do not use a DHCP server. Therefore, you must assign a static IP ad-
dress to your PC. To do this, observe the following configuration example:
Standard ETH2.1 IP address: 192.168.165.1 (not adjustable)
PC IP address: 192.168.165.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Optional ETH2.2 IP address: 192.0.1.230 (factory setting) [►Section
8.1.4, Page 173]
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
PC IP address: 192.0.1.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
System requirements


8 Operation

1. Connect the PC and device using an Ethernet cable (RJ45 plug) via the
ETH2.1 or ETH2.2 interface.
Figure 145: Establishing a connection via the ETH2.1 or ETH2.2 interface

3. Enter the IP address of the visualization (e.g. ETH2.1:
http://192.168.165.1; if SSL encryption is active, enter
https://192.168.165.1) in the browser on the PC.

To establish a connection for visualization, you must connect the CPU as-
sembly to a PC via interface X2. The interface does not use a DHCP server,
so you must assign a fixed IP address to your PC. To do this, observe the
following configuration example:
CPU-X2 IP address: 192.168.165.1 (not adjustable)
PC IP address: 192.168.165.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
System requirements


8 Operation

1. Connect PC and device via the CPU-X2 interface using an Ethernet cable
(RJ45 plug).
CP - 8050
RS-232
X5
SICAM A8000
RS-485
X4
ETH
X3
RY ER
ETH
X2
2
X1
1
Figure 146: Establishing a connection via the CPU-X2 interface

3. Enter the visualization IP address (http://192.168.165.1, or, with
active SSL encryption, https://192.168.165.1) in the browser on the
PC.
8.1.3 General
You can set general parameters in this menu item.

8 Operation
8.1.3.1 Setting general device functions
You can set general device functions with the following parameters.
Settings Parameters General
Name Value
Home
Language English
Commissioning wizard Yes
Auto-logout Off
Time until auto-logout 15.0 min Events
Measured value display Primary values
Transformer name Transformer
Remote behavior Hardware and SCADA
USB interface Off Information
Service user access activation Activated

SNMP Agent Off
Recorder
EN CHANGE REBOOT admin 14.04.2020 14:22 Settings
Figure 147: General
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > System > General.

2. Select the desired parameter.
3. Set the parameter.
Commissioning wizard
You can use this parameter to set whether the commissioning wizard
[►Section 7.2.4, Page 155] is to launch automatically when the device is
restarted.
Measured value display
You can use this parameter to set whether the displayed measured values
and control parameters are to refer to the primary side or secondary side of
the measuring transducers.
Transformer name
You can use this parameter to enter a transformer name for identification
purposes. The transformer name will be displayed on the main screen in the
visualization.
Remote behavior
You can use this parameter to select the behavior of the device in remote
operating mode. Depending on the device configuration, you can set the re-
mote behavior as follows:
▪ Through the visualization (optional)
▪ By setting the digital inputs (optional)

8 Operation
You can select the following settings:

Setting Description
Hardware only The device accepts commands through digital inputs.
SCADA only The device accepts commands via SCADA.
Hardware and SCADA The device accepts commands via digital inputs and
SCADA.
Table 41: Selecting remote behavior
USB interface
You can use this parameter to deactivate the USB interface. You can select
the following options:
▪ On: USB interface is activated
▪ Off: USB interface is deactivated
Control system protocol
You can use this parameter to set which control system protocol the device
should use.
8.1.3.2 Set up automatic logout
You can change the settings so that the device of a logged-in user automati-
cally logs the user out after a certain period of inactivity.
These settings apply to all users. If you have activated the Auto login
[►Section 8.1.18.3, Page 241] function for a user, then this user will not be
automatically logged out.
Name Value
Home
Language English
Auto-logout Off

SNMP Agent Off
Recorder
Figure 148: General

8 Operation

Auto logout
You can use this parameter to activate th automatic logout function.
Time until auto logout
You can use this parameter to set the time period of inactivity after which a
user is automatically logged out.
8.1.3.3 Activating/deactivating service user access
The device is equipped with user access for the Maschinenfabrik Rein-
hausen GmbH Technical Service department. This access is for error diag-
nostics and troubleshooting in the event of device faults. Only activate ser-
vice user access for a limited time period for remedying faults in order to
safeguard IT security.
If you deactivate the service user access and lose your password for the ad-
ministrator role, it is not possible to reset the administrator password. If the
administrator password is lost, the device must be reset to the default set-
tings. When doing so, all information stored on the device (parameters,
measured values, etc.) will be lost.
Name Value
Home
Language English
Auto-logout Off

SNMP Agent Off
Recorder
Figure 149: General
You must be assigned the administrator role to set parameters.

▪ Password: admin

8 Operation

5. Restart the device to apply the change.
Service user access activation
You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate service user access.
8.1.3.4 Setting SNMP
The device supports the SNMP network management protocol (SNMPv1

and SNMPv2c). The protocol uses the port 161/UDP. To use SNMP, you
must activate the SNMP agent.
Name Value
Home
Language English
Auto-logout Off

SNMP Agent Off
Recorder
Figure 150: General

SNMP agent
You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate the SNMP agent. If you
change the setting, you must then restart the device.
8.1.4 Configuring the network

You can use this menu item to configure the network interfaces of the CPU
assembly.

8 Operation
You can only set the parameters for ETH 1 if the device is equipped with the
optional control system connection via Ethernet (TCP/IP):
▪ IEC 61850
▪ IEC 60870-5-104
▪ Modbus (Modbus type TCP active)
▪ DNP3 (DNP3 transmission type TCP active)
▪ MQTT
You can only set the parameters for ETH 2.2 if the device is equipped with
the optional interface for visualization.
Settings Parameters Network se...ngs
Name Value
Home
IP address Eth 1 192.168.10.254
Subnet mask ETH 1 255.255.255.0
Gateway address ETH 1 0.0.0.0
Target address gateway ETH 1 0.0.0.0 Events
IP address Eth 2.2 192.0.1.230
Subnet mask ETH 2.2 255.255.255.0
Gateway address ETH 2.2 0.0.0.0
Target address gateway ETH 2.2 0.0.0.0 Information
Visualization release Only ETH 2.x

SSL/TLS encryption Off
TLS version >= 1.0
Recorder
Figure 151: Network settings
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Network settings.

IP address ETH 1/ETH 2.2
You can use this parameter to assign an IP address to the device.
Assign IP addresses to both web-based visualization and SCADA (optional)

in different subnets. Otherwise you will not be able to establish a connec-
tion.
Subnet mask ETH 1/ETH 2.2
You can use this parameter to set the subnet mask.
Be sure to enter a valid network mask that is not 0.0.0.0, otherwise it will not
be possible to connect to the device.

8 Operation
Gateway address ETH 1/ETH 2.2
You can use this parameter to set the gateway's IP address.
If you set the value to 0.0.0.0, no gateway is used.
Gateway ETH 1/ETH 2.2 target address
You can use this parameter to set the gateway's IP address.
Visualization release
You can use this parameter to set the interfaces via which you can access
the visualization:
▪ Only ETH 2.x
▪ ETH 1 and ETH 2.x
You can only set this parameter if the device is equipped with the optional
control system connection via Ethernet (TCP/IP) and the optional interface
for visualization.
SSL/TLS encryption
You can use this parameter to set whether the process for accessing the vi-
sualization should be carried out over an SSL/TLS-encrypted connection.
TLS version
You can use this parameter to set the accepted TLS versions. If you would
like to establish an encrypted connection to the visualization, you must use
an accepted TLS version. You can select the following options:
Option Accepted TLS versions
>= 1.0 ▪ 1.0
▪ 1.1
▪ 1.2
>= 1.1 ▪ 1.1
▪ 1.2
1)
>= 1.2 ▪ 1.2
Table 42: TLS version
1)
This option can be selected only if the TLS version is supported by the
connected peripheral equipment.

8 Operation
Activate DNS (optional)
You can use this parameter to activate DNS for name resolution. If you
would like to use the MQTT protocol, you can establish the connection to the
MQTT via a DNS server as an option. Also set the parameters necessary for
the MQTT [►Section 8.1.5, Page 176] protocol.
DNS server (optional)
You can use this parameter to set the IP address of the DNS server.
8.1.5 MQTT
You can activate and configure the MQTT message protocol in this menu
point. To do so, you must connect the device to an MQTT server (Broker) via
Ethernet via the ETH 1 or ETH2.x interface on the CPU assembly. Note that
the device will only send messages (publish). The receive message function
is not active.
There are 2 options available for configuring the protocol:

▪ Via the IP address of the MQTT server:
– Enter the IP address as the broker address.
– It is not necessary to configure a DNS server.
▪ Via DNS server:
– Configure the DNS server in "Network settings".
– Enter the URL as the broker address.
Settings Parameters MQTT
Name Value
Home
Activate MQTT Off
Broker address
Broker port 8883
Client username Events
Password
SSL/TLS encryption Off
Information
Recorder
Figure 152: MQTT

8 Operation
ü When using a URL on the broker, it may be necessary to enter and acti-
vate [►Page 176] the IP address [►Page 176] of the DNS server.
ü If a DNS server is not available, enter the IP address [►Page 174] of the
MQTT server.
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > System > MQTT.
Activate MQTT
You can use this parameter to activate the transmission of messages to the
MQTT server (broker).
Broker address
If you use a URL address, you can use this parameter to enter the domain
name of the MQTT server (broker). Otherwise, you can enter the IP address
of the MQTT server.
Broker port
You can use this parameter to set the port of the MQTT server (broker). The
following ports are used as standard:
▪ 8883 (SSL/TLS)
▪ 1883
Client username (optional)
You can use this parameter to set the client user name for authentication at
the broker. When using authentication, you must configure the broker ac-
cordingly.
Password (optional)
You can use this parameter to set the password for authentication at the bro-
ker. When using authentication, you must configure the broker accordingly.
SSL/TLS encryption
You can use this parameter to set whether the data should be transmitted
over an SSL/TLS-encrypted connection.
Note that an encrypted data transmission does not work if you are using an
SSL proxy.

8 Operation
8.1.6 Setting the device time

You can set the device time manually or automatically via a time server. The
device must be connected to a time server via Ethernet for this purpose.
You can operate SNTP and PTP at the same time. In this case, the PTP
time is queried in slave operation.
Settings Parameters Time synch...ion
Name Value
Home
Time synchronization via SNTP Off
Time synchronization via SNTP Off
SNTP time server 0.0.0.0
Synchronization interval 60 s Events
PTP hops 1
PTP version IEEE 1588-2008
PTP interface ETH 2.x
Automatic Daylight Savings Time Off Information
Time zone UTC +01:00

Time zone (UTC+01:00) Amsterdam, Berlin,
Activate second time server Off
Recorder
SNTP time server 2 0.0.0.0
Figure 153: Time synchronization
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Time synchronization.

Time synchronization via SNTP
You can use this parameter to activate time synchronization using an SNTP
time server.
SNTP time server
You can use this parameter to enter the IP address of a SNTP time server. If
you are using a time server, the device uses the time of the time server as
the system time.
Be sure to enter a valid time server address that is not 0.0.0.0, otherwise it
will not be possible to connect to the device.
Synchronization interval
You can use this parameter to set the interval at which the device is to call
up the time from the time server.

8 Operation
Automatic daylight saving / standard time
You can use this parameter to activate the automatic switchover between
daylight saving time and standard time. Depending on the time zone (region)
set, the device switches automatically between daylight saving time and
standard time on the specified days.
Time zone
If the time information is transmitted to the device by a network service

(SNTP or SCADA), this time is transferred depending on the set reference
time. To adjust the device time to your local time, you can use the time shift
parameter to set the time shift to UTC.
Example:
Region Time shift to UTC
Mumbai, India UTC +5:30 h
Beijing, China UTC +8:00 h
Brasilia, Brazil UTC -3:00 h
Table 43: Time shift to UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)
Time
You can use this parameter to set the date and time manually.
SNTP time server 2 (optional)
You can use this parameter to enter the IP address of the second time
server (optional).
Time synchronization via PTP
You can use this parameter to activate time synchronization via a PTP time
server.
PTP hops
You can use this parameter to enter the number of network sections be-
tween master and slave. You can set up to 16 hops.
PTP version
You can use this parameter to select the PTP version.

▪ PTP version 1 (IEEE 1588-2002)
▪ PTP version 2 (IEEE 1588-2008)

8 Operation
PTP interface
You can use this parameter to select the interface that the device is to use
for PTP.
8.1.7 Configuring syslog

The device supports the transmission of log messages via the syslog proto-
col in accordance with the standards RFC 5424 and RFC 3164.
Settings Parameters Syslog
Name Value
Home
Activate syslog Off
Syslog standard RFC 5425
Syslog server 0.0.0.0
Syslog server port 6514 Events
Reconnect delay time 10 s
Device designation m200
Emergency severity level Off
Alert severity level Off Information
Critical severity level Off

Error severity level Off
Warning severity level Off
Recorder
Notice severity level Off
Info severity level Off
Figure 154: Syslog
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Syslog.

Activate syslog
You can use this parameter to activate transmission of syslog messages via
the device.
Syslog standard
You can use this parameter to adjust the transmission process and the for-
mat for the syslog messages. You can select the following options:
Standard Transport Message format
RFC 5425 (recom- TLS RFC 5424
mended)
RFC 5426 UDP
RFC 6587 TCP
RFC 3164 UDP RFC 3164
Table 44: Syslog standard

8 Operation
If you use the standard RFC 5245 (TLS), you have to import the root certifi-
cate and the client certificate with the corresponding key to the syslog
server. For more information, refer to the section titled Importing data
[►Section 8.1.21.2, Page 250].
Syslog server
You can use this parameter to set the IP address of the syslog server.
Syslog server port
You can use this parameter to set the port of the syslog server.
Reconnect delay time
You can use this parameter to determine how long the device will wait be-
fore it attempts to reconnect after the connection has been interrupted earlier
or a syslog message could not be transmitted (only for TCP or TLS).
Device designation
You can use this parameter to set the device designation that the device will
be identified with on the syslog server.
Severity level
You can set which syslog messages the device will send. You can also acti-
vate or deactivate messages for each severity level.
Severity level Description
Emergency The system is unusable.
Alert Immediate intervention required.
Critical Critical state
Error Error state
Warning Warning state
Notice Notice state
Info Information state
Debug Debug state
Table 45: Severity levels
8.1.8 SCADA
The following section describes how you can configure the device to connect
to a control system (SCADA). You can download the data points with the
help of the export manager [►Section 8.1.21, Page 248].

8 Operation
8.1.8.1 Configuring IEC 61850 (optional)
If you want to use the IEC 61850 control system protocol, you must set the
following parameters. Also refer to the section Configuring the network
► Go to Settings > Parameters > System > IEC 61850.
Settings Parameters IEC 61850
Name Value
Home
IED name TAPCON
Device ID TAPCON
Access point MRTCAP
Edition Edition 1 Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 155: IEC 61850
IED name
You can use this parameter to assign the device an IED name in order for it
to be identified in the IEC 61850 network.
Device ID
You can use this parameter to assign a device ID to the device in order that
it can be identified in the IEC 61850 network.
Access point
You can use this parameter to assign a name to the access point in the IEC
61850 network.
Edition
You can use this parameter to switch between edition 1 and edition 2 of the
IEC 61850 control system protocol.
IP address client 1...6
With these parameters, you can set the IP addresses of clients 1 to 6.

8 Operation
8.1.8.1.1 Downloading an ICD file
You can download the ICD file from the device via the Import/Export Man-
ager [►Section 8.1.21, Page 248]. To do this, you have to establish an Eth-
ernet connection between the device and your PC.
8.1.8.1.2 Importing CID/SCD file (optional)
Note the following definitions for importing a CID file or SCD file.
Only the following elements may differ between the imported IED and the
exported IED from the TEMPLATE.icd.
▪ DataSet elements can be created in each LN
▪ ReportControl elements can be created in the LN containing the associ-
ated DataSet
▪ IP address (if this is not present, the preset one is used)
▪ Subnet mask (if this is not present, the preset one is used)
▪ Gateway IP address (if this is not present, the preset one is used)
▪ Name of IED (IED name)
▪ Name of AccessPoint (AccessPoint attribute name)
▪ Name of logical device (LDevice attribute inst)
OSI-PSEL, OSI-SSEL, and OSI-TSEL cannot be adjusted.
The SCD file may contain no more than 45 IEDs. It may take several min-
utes to import a complete SCD file. The SCD file should only contain the
IEDs needed.
You can import the CID/SCD file via the Import/Export Manager. To do so,
proceed as follows:
1. Go to Settings > Import.
2. Select and import the desired CID/SCD file.

8 Operation
8.1.8.2 Configuring IEC 60870-5-101 (optional)
If you want to use the IEC 60870-5-101 control system protocol, you must
set the following parameters.
Settings Parameters IEC 60870-5-101
Name Value
Home
Serial interface RS232
Baud rate 9600
Transmission procedure Unbalanced
Number of link address octets 1 Events
Link address 1
Number of ASDU address octets 1
ASDU address 1
No. of information object address... 1 Information
Number of cause of transmission o... 1

Number of databits 8
Parity Even
Recorder
Number of stop bits 1
ASDU single character confirmatio... Off
Figure 156: IEC 60870-5-101
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > System > IEC 60870-5-101.

Serial interface
You can use this parameter to select the serial interface for data transmis-
sion. You can select the following options:
▪ RS232
▪ RS485
Baud rate
You can use this parameter to set the serial interface's baud rate. You can
select the following options:
▪ 9600 baud
▪ 19200 baud
▪ 38400 baud
▪ 57600 baud
▪ 115200 baud

8 Operation
Transmission procedure
You can use this parameter to set the transmission procedure. You can se-
lect the following options:
▪ Unbalanced transmission
▪ Balanced transmission
Number of link address octets
You can use this parameter to set how many octets are provided for the link
address.
Link address
You can use this parameter to set the link address.
Number of ASDU address octets
You can use this parameter to set how many octets are provided for the
ASDU address.
ASDU address
You can use this parameter to set the address of the ASDU.
No. of information object address octets
You can use this parameter to set how many octets are provided for the in-
formation object address.
Number of cause of transmission octets
You can use this parameter to set how many octets are provided for the
cause of transmission.
Number of data bits
You can use this parameter to set the number of databits.
Parity
You can use this parameter to set the parity. You can select the following
options:
▪ None
▪ Even
▪ Odd
Number of stop bits
You can use this parameter to set the number of stop bits.

8 Operation
ASDU single character confirmation
You can use this parameter to set whether a confirmation is to be sent as

single characters instead of as a complete message. Single character confir-
mation is only possible for requesting data of class 2 (Class 2 Request).
RES bit test
You can use this parameter to set whether the device is to check the RES bit
(Reserved Bit) in the control field. You can select the following options:
Option Description
On Messages from the master with RES bit = 1 are declined
by the device.
Off Messages from the master with RES bit = 1 are accepted
by the device.
Table 46: RES bit test
ASDU sequence optimization
With this parameter, you can set which method is to be used for optimizing
the ASDU types. The standard enables optimization in order to be able to
transfer multiple value changes in a telegram in a sequence of ascending in-
formation object addresses. This is displayed by the sequence bit. The se-
lection of ASDU types for which this optimization is allowed is based on the
edition of the standard.
You can select the following options:

Option Description
None The device does not optimize the ASDU types.
Ed. 1 Optimization in accordance with IEC 60870 Edition 1
(Type 1, 3, 9, 11, 21, 126).
Ed. 1 Amendment2 Optimization in accordance with IEC 60870 Edition 1,
Amendment 2 (Type 1, 3, 9, 11, 13, 15 21, 126).
(Type 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 20, 21, 126).
Table 47: ASDU sequence optimization

8 Operation
Reference time
You can use this parameter to set which time is to be transmitted by the con-
trol system. The device uses this information for time synchronization
[►Section 8.1.6, Page 178]. You can select the following options:
Option Description
Local The control system transmits the local time.
Note: If you use this option, you must deactivate the au-
tomatic changeover between daylight saving time and
standard time [►Page 179]. Otherwise the device will
use an incorrect time.
UTC The control system transmits the time as UTC. The de-
vice calculates the local time from UTC and the set time
zone [►Page 179].
Table 48: Reference time
set the following parameters.
Name Value
Home
Baud rate 9600
ASDU address 1
Number of databits 8 Events
Parity Even
DFC compatibility Standard
Reference time UTC Information
Recorder
Figure 157: IEC 60870-5-103

Serial interface
▪ RS232
▪ RS485

8 Operation
Baud rate
▪ 9600 baud
▪ 19200 baud
▪ 38400 baud
▪ 57600 baud
▪ 115200 baud
ASDU address
Number of data bits
Parity
options:
▪ None
▪ Even
▪ Odd
Number of stop bits
DFC compatibility
You can use this parameter to set how the device is to use the DFC bit (Data
Flow Control) in the control field. You can select the following options:
Option Description
Standard The device sets the DFC bit in each response to a com-
mand. The device thus indicates that the master may not
send any further commands. The master must react to
the ACD bit (Access Demand) and retrieve the response
to the command e.g. via a request for data of class 1
from the slave queue.
Alternative The device sets the DFC bit in a response if a second
command is received without the master having previ-
ously sent a request for data of class 1.
Table 49: DFC compatibility

8 Operation
Reference time
Option Description
zone [►Page 179].
set the following parameters. Also refer to the section Configuring the net-
work [►Section 8.1.4, Page 173].
Name Value
Home
TCP port 2404
ASDU address 1
ASDU sequence optimization None
Reference time UTC Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 158: IEC 60870-5-104

TCP port
You can use this parameter to set the TCP port.

8 Operation
ASDU address
ASDU sequence optimization
With this parameter, you can set which method is to be used for optimizing
the ASDU types. The standard enables optimization in order to be able to
transfer multiple value changes in a telegram in a sequence of ascending in-
formation object addresses. This is displayed by the sequence bit. The se-
lection of ASDU types for which this optimization is allowed is based on the
edition of the standard.

Option Description
None The device does not optimize the ASDU types.
(Type 1, 3, 9, 11, 21, 126).
Ed. 1 Amendment2 Optimization in accordance with IEC 60870 Edition 1,
Amendment 2 (Type 1, 3, 9, 11, 13, 15 21, 126).
(Type 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 20, 21, 126).
Table 51: ASDU sequence optimization
Reference time
Option Description
zone [►Page 179].
IP address Client 1/2/3 (optional)
If you use the optional "Multi-client" function, you can use these parameters
to set the IP addresses of the SCADA clients. The device only accepts com-
mands through the control system from end devices that have their IP ad-
dresses set here.

8 Operation
Note that all SCADA clients communicate with the device on an equal basis,
because the device does not prioritize commands. If you transmit com-
mands from several SCADA clients to the device at the same time, the de-
vice will execute the last transmitted command.
Receiver IP address
You can use this parameter to set the IP address of the receiver.
8.1.8.5 Configuring Modbus (optional)
If you want to use the Modbus control system protocol, you must set the cor-
responding parameters depending on the Modbus type selected. Also refer
to the section Configuring the network [►Section 8.1.4, Page 173] if you
want to use Modbus TCP.
Settings Parameters Modbus
Name Value
Home
Modbus type RTU
Modbus address 1
TCP port 502
Maximum TCP connections 10 Events
TCP Keepalive Off
Baud rate 9600
Number of databits 8 Information
Parity Even
Recorder
Figure 159: Modbus
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Modbus.

Modbus type
You can use this parameter to set the Modbus type. You can select the fol-
lowing options:
▪ RTU
▪ TCP
▪ ASCII
Modbus address
You can use this parameter to set the Modbus address.

8 Operation
TCP port
Maximum TCP connections
You can use this parameter to set the maximum number of TCP connec-
tions.
TCP Keepalive
You can use this parameter to activate/deactivate the "TCP Keepalive" func-
tion.
Serial interface
▪ RS232
▪ RS485
Baud rate
▪ 9600 baud
▪ 19200 baud
▪ 38400 baud
▪ 57600 baud
▪ 115200 baud
Number of data bits
Parity
options:
▪ None
▪ Even
▪ Odd
Number of stop bits
Receiver IP address

8 Operation
8.1.8.6 Configuring DNP3 (optional)
If you would like to use the DNP3 control system protocol, you must set the
parameters listed below. Also refer to the section Configuring the network
[►Section 8.1.4, Page 173] if you want to use the DNP3 via TCP.
Settings Parameters DNP3
Name Value
Home
DNP3 transmission type TCP
TCP port 20000
Device address 1
Timeout for response confirmation 5 s Events
Unsolicited messages Off
Destination address 10000
Timeout confirmation 5 s
Indefinite unsolicited retries Off Information
Number of unsolicited retries 3

User ID code ISM
Reference time UTC
Recorder
Figure 160: DNP3
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > System > DNP3.

8.1.8.6.1 DNP3 transmission type
You can use this parameter to set the transmission type. You can select the
following options:
▪ TCP
▪ Serial
TCP port
Serial interface
▪ RS232
▪ RS485

8 Operation
Baud rate
▪ 9600 baud
▪ 19200 baud
▪ 38400 baud
▪ 57600 baud
▪ 115200 baud
Number of data bits
Number of stop bits
Parity
options:
▪ None
▪ Even
▪ Odd
Device address
You can use this parameter to set the device link address.
Destination address
You can use this parameter to set the destination master link address.
Unsolicited messages
You can use this parameter to set whether the device is to support unso-
licited messages. If you activate unsolicited messages, the device sends a
message via the control system every time a value is changed.
Repetition of unsolicited messages
You can use this parameter to set how often the device is to send an unso-
licited message until it receives a response from the DNP3 master.
Repeat unsolicited messages indefinitely
You can use this parameter to set the device to send an indefinite number of
unsolicited messages until it receives a response from the DNP3 master.

8 Operation
Timeout
You can use this parameter to set the timeout for unsolicited messages.
Timeout for response confirmation
You can use this parameter to set the timeout for response confirmation for
unsolicited messages.
User ID code
You can use this parameter to set the user ID code.
Reference time
Option Description
zone [►Page 179].
Receiver IP address
8.1.8.7 Configuring GOOSE (optional)
You can use the optional GOOSE function to send GOOSE messages
(GOOSE publisher) or receive GOOSE messages (GOOSE subscriber) via
the IEC 61850 control system protocol with the device.
The configuration of GOOSE is described in the following chapters.
8.1.8.7.1 Configuring GOOSE publisher
If you configure the device as a GOOSE publisher, you can send all data
points which the device provides via MMS as GOOSE messages. To do this,
you have to configure the data points using DataSets in an SCD/CID file.

8 Operation
SCD/CID file requirements

▪ The GOOSE control block (GSEControl) and the associated DataSet can
only be created in LLN0.
▪ GSE elements for the configuration of the GOOSE message can be cre-
ated under ConnectedAP.
▪ The maximum number of data points per GOOSE message is defined in
Private Element type="MR-MAX-GOOSE-PUBLISH-FCDA". You cannot
adjust this value.
▪ The maximum number of usable GSEControl elements is defined in TEM-
PLATE.icd under Services GOOSE. You cannot adjust this value.
▪ The shortest repeat time is defined in Private Element type="MR-
MINTIME-GOOSE". You cannot adjust this value.
Example:
Configuration
To configure the device as a GOOSE publisher, you have to call up the vi-
sualization via a PC. You must have a parameter configurator or administra-
tor user role.

8 Operation
To configure the device as a GOOSE publisher, proceed as follows:

Figure 161: Exporting SCADA configuration
2. Select the SCADA configuration option.

ð The SCADA configuration is exported as a zip archive.
3. Unzip the zip archive and adapt the TEMPLATE.icd file to the require-
ments.
5. Select the PC or USB option, select the SCD/CID file, and select Trans-
fer.
Figure 162: Importing an SCD/ICD file

8 Operation
6. Select the desired IED with the configuration that is to be imported and
select Accept to start the import.
Figure 163: Selecting an IED
7. Upon successful completion of the import, restart the device.

ð The system restarts and checks the configuration. If the configuration
failed, an error message appears and the device resets the configuration
to the one with which it was delivered.
8.1.8.7.2 Configuring GOOSE subscriber
If you configure the device as a GOOSE subscriber, you can receive

GOOSE messages from an IED in the network and link them to device func-
tions. You can use this function to display all of the device's digital input sig-
nals via GOOSE.
GOOSE datagram requirements
The data point string may contain a maximum of 52 characters. The data
point string is comprised of the following values: IED name, FCDA IdInst,
prefix, InClass, InInst, fc, doName, daName.
In order to link GOOSE datagrams of an IED with device functions, the IED
must contain a GOOSE control block (GSEControl) in the LN0 node and a
valid DataSet and GSE block. The referenced DataSet may contain data ob-
jects (DO) or data attributes (DA). The maximum number of usable data
points per GOOSE message is defined in Private Element type="MR-MAX-
GOOSE-SUBSCRIBER-FCDA". You cannot adjust this value.

8 Operation
You can only use data points with bType BOOLEAN (true | false) and Dbpos
(intermediate-state | off | on | bad-state). The functional constraint must be of
type ST.
Value Description
true | on Is used as logical value 1
false | off Is used as logical value 0
intermediate-state Last value received is retained
bad-state Error status, value is identified as invalid
Table 54: Description of values
The device automatically assesses the quality. If the device receives a qual-
ity not equal to 0, the value is also interpreted as invalid. The device then
generates the IEC 61850 GOOSE communication defective event message.
Example:
Configuration
To configure the device as a GOOSE subscriber, you have to call up the vi-
sualization via a PC. You must have a parameter configurator or administra-
tor user role.

8 Operation
To configure the device as a GOOSE subscriber, proceed as follows:

ü The SCD file for your system with all required IEDs has been imported.
1. Go to Settings > Mapping.
ð The list of functions available on the device appears.
Figure 164: Overview of device functions available
2. Select the desired function.

3. Select the desired IED, AccessPoint, LDevice, and GSEControl.
4. Select the desired data point.
Figure 165: Selecting the data point
5. Press the Accept button to save the configuration.

ð The Restart device dialog appears.
6. Select Cancel if you want to configure other data points or OK to com-
plete the modified configuration by restarting the device.

8 Operation
Deleting a configuration
If necessary, you can delete the data point configuration. To do so, proceed
as follows:
1. Go to Settings > Mapping.
2. Select the desired function.
3. Press the Delete button to delete the configuration.
8.1.8.8 Configure data points (optional)
You can use the optional "Configure data points" function to adjust the con-
trol system data points of the device. You can only configure the data points
on a PC using the web-based visualization.
8.1.8.8.1 Configuring IEC 60870-5-101 data points
You can adjust the following data point properties for the IEC 60870-5-101
control system protocol:
Column Description Modifiable Setting range
Active You can use the checkbox to set whether the data point is Yes Active/inactive
to be transferred via the control system protocol or not.
IOA Data point address. The setting range is based on the set- Yes Octet 2: 1...65,535
ting for the "Octet number of information object address" Octet 3:
parameter (octet 2 or 3). 1...16,777,215
Name Data point designation. No -
Type Data point type. No -
Group Data point group or groups. You must enter the group Yes 00000...11111
membership as a binary code (5 bits). A maximum of 5
groups is possible. Example:
▪ 00000: belongs to no groups
▪ 00001: group 1
▪ 01000: group 4
▪ 01001: group 1 and group 4
INTG The value indicates whether the data point is to be in- Yes 0, 1
cluded in a general query (1) or not (0).

8 Operation

TH Threshold value for measured values. The data point is Yes 0...32,768
only transferred again if the change of value is greater
than the threshold value.
▪ If you enter the value 0, no threshold value is active.
▪ If you do not enter any value, the device adopts the
threshold value defined by the device parameter. If no
device parameter is available for the threshold value,
no threshold value is active either.
▪ Notice: You can only enter a threshold value for data
points of type 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 21, 34, 35 or 36.
CT Interval in ms for periodic transmission of the data point. If Yes 0...10,000
you set 0, the data point is not transmitted periodically.
Notice: You can only enter an interval for data points of
type 9, 11 or 13.
Table 55: Configuring IEC 60870-5-101 data points
Figure 166: Configuring IEC 60870-5-101 data points
Proceed as follows to configure the data points:

1. Go to Settings > Data point configuration.
2. Adjust the data points as required.
3. Press the Accept button to adopt the modified list of data points.
4. Restart the device to activate the modified list of data points.

8 Operation
TYP Data point type code. No -
FUN Data point function type. Yes 0...255
Notice: You can only use function type 254 for data points
with type code 10 or 11.
INF Data point information number. Yes 0...255
Notice: You can only use information number 0 for data
points with function type 254.
GIN Data point generic identification number. Yes 0...65,535
Notice: You can only use generic identification number 0
for data points with a function type other than 254.
Data Type Data point data type. No -
Interrogation The value indicates whether the data point is to be in- Yes 0, 1
Threshold Threshold value for measured values. The data point is Yes 0...1,000,000,000

8 Operation

IOA Data point address. Yes 1...16,777,215
Type Data point type. No -
Group Data point group or groups. You must enter the group Yes 00000...11111
membership as a binary code (5 bits). A maximum of 5
groups is possible. Example:
▪ 00000: belongs to no groups
▪ 00001: group 1
▪ 01000: group 4
▪ 01001: group 1 and group 4
INTG The value indicates whether the data point is to be in- Yes 0, 1
TH Threshold value for measured values. The data point is Yes 0...32,768
Notice: You can only enter a threshold value for data
points of type 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 21, 34, 35 or 36.
CT Interval in ms for periodic transmission of the data point. If Yes 0...10,000
you set 0, the data point is not transmitted periodically.
Notice: You can only enter an interval for data points of
type 9, 11 or 13.

8 Operation

8.1.8.8.4 Configuring Modbus data points
You can adjust the following data point properties for the Modbus control
system protocol:
Type Data point type No -
Index1 Data point address Yes 0...65,535
Index2 Optional second data point address. This is used auto- No -
matically for data points able to transfer values greater
than 16 bits. Please note that the Index2 address always
follows on from the Index1 address exactly.
Name Data point designation No -
Table 58: Configuring Modbus data points

8 Operation
Figure 169: Configuring Modbus data points

8.1.8.8.5 Configuring DNP3 data points
You can adjust the following data point properties for the DNP3 control sys-
tem protocol:
OBJGROUP The OBJGROUP column indicates the data point object No -
group:
▪ AI = Analog Input
▪ AO = Analog Output
▪ BI = Binary Input
▪ BO = Binary Output
▪ CT = Counter
INDEXADDR Data point address. Yes 0...4,294,967,296
CLASS Data point class. Yes 0...3
▪ 0: Static
▪ 1...3: Event
Notice: You can only set the data point class for data
points of object groups AI, BI, and CT.

8 Operation

PREFSTATICVAR For a data point of class 0 (Static), you can define the fol- Yes 0...6
lowing variation depending on the object group:
▪ BI: 1, 2
▪ BO: 2
▪ AI: 2, 4
▪ AO: 2
▪ CT: 1, 2, 5, 6
PREFEVENTVAR For a data point of classes 1...3 (Event), you can define Yes 0...6
the following variation depending on the object group:
▪ BI: 1, 2, 3
▪ BO: no value
▪ AI: 2, 4
▪ AO: no value
▪ CT: 1, 2, 5, 6
NAME Data point designation. No -
Deadband Threshold value for analog inputs. The data point is only Yes 0...32,768
transferred again if the change of value is greater than the
threshold value.
Notice: The threshold value has the same unit as the data
point value. Take note of the list of data points.
Table 59: Configuring DNP3 data points
Figure 170: Configuring DNP3 data points

8 Operation

8.1.8.8.6 Resetting the data point configuration to factory settings
If you want to reset the data point configuration to factory settings, proceed
as follows:
2. Press the Reset button.
ð The message Reset appears.
3. Press the Yes button to reset the data point configuration to the factory
settings.
8.1.8.8.7 Exporting and importing the data point configuration
You can export the data point configuration, e.g., to back it up or import it
into another device. You will find more information in the Import/Export Man-
ager [►Section 8.1.21, Page 248] section.
8.1.9 Name plate

You can enter the data of the nameplates from the transformer, on-load tap-
changer and motor-drive unit and display it later.
When operating ETOS® with the MSENSE® VAM option, you must enter
the correct serial number for every on-load tap-changer. This entry is neces-
sary to ensure the correct assignment of the vibro-acoustic records in the
external database.

8 Operation
8.1.9.1 Enter the name plate data
You can enter the name plate data for the transformer, the on-load tap-
changer and the motor-drive unit.
Figure 171: Nameplate
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Nameplate.

8.1.9.2 Displaying the name plate
You can display the nameplate data for the transformer, on-load tap-
changer, and motor-drive unit.
Figure 172: Transformer nameplate
► Go to Information > System > Nameplate > Transformer/On-load tap-

changer/Motor-drive unit.

8 Operation
8.1.10 Displaying measured value recorder (optional)

You can use the optional measured value recorder function to display the
progress of measured values and signals over time.
If you access it via the web visualization, you can select a maximum of 10
measured values.
To display the measured value recorder, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Recorder.
Figure 173: Recorder
2. Select the signals to be displayed in the list.

3. If necessary, set the desired axis for each signal.
4. Enter the start time and end time for the measured value display.
5. Press Display to call up the measured value display (data log).
Figure 174: Data log

8 Operation
6. Move the mouse pointer to a measurement point for more information.

7. Use the mouse to produce a selection window or turn the mouse wheel to
zoom into or out of the diagram. If necessary, you can move an enlarged
diagram with the right mouse button.
8. Press to save the displayed measured values as a csv file.
Trend curves
If you call up the measured value recorder using a PC, you can display a
trend curve instead of the measured values. The trend curve can, for exam-
ple, be a moving average over a configurable time period.
Figure 175: Creating trend curves
To create the trend curves, proceed as follows:

1. Call up the measurement recorder and the desired measured value se-
ries.
2. Press the Trend button.
3. Select the desired measured values.
4. Select the desired trend function.
5. Entire the desired time period for the calculation of the trend curve.
6. Press the Accept button to display the trend curves.
8.1.11 Setting the measured value recorder

The measured value recorder records a maximum of 500,000 values per
measured variable. Depending on the set average value interval, the mea-
sured value recorder can display the measured values over a shorter or
longer time period:
▪ Average value interval = 1 s: approx. 6 days
▪ Average value interval = 86400 s (= 24 h): approx. 1340 years

8 Operation
Note that, for measured values via analog input signals (e.g. temperature),
a maximum of 100,000 measured values with an average value interval of
3,600 s (= 1 h) will be saved. This is equivalent to a time period of approx.
11 years.
Settings Parameters Recorder
Name Value
Home
Mean value interval 360 s
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 176: Recorder
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Recorder.

Average value interval
You can use this parameter to set the average value interval of the mea-
sured value recorder for electrical measured variables (current, voltage,
phase angle etc.).

8 Operation
8.1.12 Generic temperatures (optional)

If you are using additional temperature sensors (generic temperature 1...8),
you can display the temperature curve for these temperatures over the last
10 days.
Figure 177: Generic temperatures
► Go to Information > System > Gener. temperatures.
8.1.13 Linking signals and events

The device enables you to link digital inputs (GPI) and control system com-
mands (SCADA) with device functions, digital outputs (GPO), and control
system messages.
The digital inputs available are each permanently linked to a Generic digital
input event message and the control system commands available are each
permanently linked to aGeneric SCADA command event message for this
purpose.
Input/command Event message
1)
Digital input 1 Generic digital input 1
1)
Digital input 2 Generic digital input 2
... ...
Digital input 421) Generic digital input 42
Generic SCADA command 1 Generic SCADA command 1
... ...
Table 60: Linking of digital inputs and control system commands with event messages
1)
The number of available digital inputs depends on the order-specific device
configuration.

8 Operation
You can link the event messages with device functions, digital outputs, and
control system messages. You can also link all other event messages (e.g.
Undervoltage U<) with digital outputs and control system messages. Corre-
sponding parameters, for which you need to enter the relevant event num-
ber, are provided for this purpose.
8.1.13.1 Linking functions
You can link the Generic digital input or Generic SCADA command events
with device functions. This allows you to remotely control the device using
digital inputs or commands via the control system (SCADA). Depending on
your device configuration, various functions are available for this purpose via
parameters.
In order to establish the link, you have to enter the corresponding event
number in the desired parameter.
Note that you can only enter the event numbers of the Generic digital input
or Generic SCADA command events.
If you enter event number 500, the link is disabled.
Settings Parameters Link functions
Name Value
Home
Master parallel operation method 500
Follower parallel operation metho... 500
Parallel op. meth. auto. tap sync... 500
Independent regulation 500 Events
Blocking 500
High-speed return 500
Target-tap-position operation 500
Activate desired value 1 500 Information
Activate desired value 2 500

Activate desired value 3 500
Recorder
Figure 178: Linking functions
ü The desired event number is known.

1. Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Link functions.
3. Enter the desired event number.
Master parallel operation method
If the assigned event is active, the device activates the master parallel oper-
ation method.

8 Operation
Follower parallel operation method
If the assigned event is active, the device activates the follower parallel oper-
ation method.
Automatic tap synchronization parallel operation method
If the assigned event is active, the device activates the automatic tap syn-
chronization parallel operation method.
Independent regulation
If the assigned event is active, the device activates the independent regula-
tion independent mode.
Deactivate parallel operation
If the assigned event is active, the device deactivates the parallel operation.
Blocking
If the assigned event is active, automatic control is blocked.
Activate remote mode
If the assigned event is active, the device activates remote mode.
High-speed return
If the assigned event is active, the device activates high-speed return. With
high-speed return, the device ignores the set delay time of automatic voltage
regulation.
Target-tap-position operation
If the assigned event is active, the device switches to the defined target tap
position.
Activate desired value 1
If the assigned event is active, the device activates the desired value 1.

8 Operation
Increase desired value
If the assigned event is active, the device prompts an increase in the desired
value.
Decrease desired value
If the assigned event is active, the device prompts a decrease in the desired
value.
8.1.13.2 Linking digital outputs
You can link each event with a digital output. The device provides a maxi-
mum of 20 digital outputs for this purpose. When you link a digital output to
an event, the device issues a signal to this output if the event occurs. The
signal persists until the event stops. A parameter is available for each avail-
able digital output.
To forward input signals or control system commands, you need to link the
digital outputs or control system messages with the Generic digital input or
Generic SCADA command events.
Settings Parameters Link outputs
Name Value
Home
Generic digital output 1 500
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 179: Linking digital outputs
ü The desired event number is known [►Section 8.1.17, Page 234].

1. Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Link outputs.

8 Operation
Generic digital output X
You can use this parameter to link the digital output with an event message.
To do so, enter the desired event number.
8.1.13.3 Linking control system messages
You can link each event with a control system message. The device pro-
vides 10 SCADA messages for this purpose. When you link a SCADA mes-
sage to an event, the device sets the data point to "On" when the event oc-
curs. When the event stops, the device sets the data point to "Off". A param-
eter is available for each available SCADA message.
To forward control system commands, you need to link the control system
messages to the Generic digital input or Generic SCADA command events.
Settings Parameters Link messages
Name Value
Home
Generic SCADA status message 1 500
Generic SCADA status message 4 500 Events
Generic SCADA status message 8 500 Information

Recorder
Figure 180: Linking SCADA messages
ü The desired event number is known.

1. Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Link messages.
Generic status message X
You can use this parameter to link the SCADA message with an event mes-
sage. To do so, enter the desired event number.

8 Operation
8.1.14 MR sensor bus

The optionally available MR sensor bus function lets you connect digital and
analog sensors to the device over Modbus RTU. The MR sensor bus sup-
ports the connection of up to 31 sensors (Modbus slaves). The ISM® device
operates as the Modbus master.
Ensure that no other Modbus master is connected over the MR sensor bus.
Assign a unique Modbus address to each sensor you are connecting over
MR sensor bus. The MR sensor bus may experience errors if multiple sen-
sors are using the same Modbus address.
8.1.14.1 Configuring MR sensor bus
If you would like to use the MR sensor bus, you can configure the Modbus
protocol with the following parameters.
Note that the data transmission depends heavily on the number of sensors
and data points as well as the query rate and send delay time parameters.
Value changes can be transmitted on a delay lasting from several seconds
to a few minutes as a result.
The data values transmitted over Modbus do not get checked for validity
(valid flag). Therefore, the failure of a sensing element cannot be detected.
Settings Parameters Sensorbus
Name Value
Home
Baud rate 19200
Number of databits 8
Parity Even Events
Polling rate 1 s
Send delay time 0.075 s
Information
Recorder
Figure 181: Sensor bus
The operation described below is only possible if you access the visualiza-
tion using a computer. You must also have a Parameterizer or Administrator
user role.

8 Operation
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > System > Sensor bus.

Baud rate
▪ 9600 baud
▪ 19200 baud
▪ 38400 baud
▪ 57600 baud
▪ 115200 baud
Number of data bits
Parity
options:
▪ None
▪ Even
▪ Odd
Number of stop bits
8.1.14.2 Managing sensors
This menu lets you manage sensors connected to the device over the MR
sensor bus. The following information is displayed:
▪ Sensor name
▪ Sensor version
▪ Sensor manufacturer
▪ Sensor Modbus address
▪ Status
– Blue: The sensor is connected to the sensor bus
– Red: The sensor is not connected to the sensor bus

8 Operation
Figure 182: Managing sensors
user role.
Adding a sensor
If you would like to add a sensor, then you have to set the Modbus address,
sensor name and version. In addition, you can select whether the device is
to perform an automatic function assignment of the data points.
Proceed as follows to add a sensor:

1. Go to Settings > Sensor bus > Sensor management.
2. Press the New sensor button.
Figure 183: Add sensor
3. Enter the Modbus address or press the Next free address button.
4. Select the Sensor name.

8 Operation
5. Select the Version.

6. If necessary, enable the Assign functions option.
8. After adding a sensor or several sensors, restart the device to apply the
changes.
Before restarting the device, you can add even more sensors or change ad-
ditional settings such as the function assignment or configuration of analog
or digital inputs.
Removing a sensor
Proceed as follows to delete a sensor:

1. Go to Settings > Manage sensor.
2. Press the button to delete the sensor.
8.1.14.3 Function assignment
You can link the transmitted signals from the sensor to functions on the de-
vice. This requires configuring the desired device functions of the digital and
analog inputs for Modbus. Observe the following sections for more informa-
tion:
▪ Linking digital inputs and outputs [►Section 8.1.16, Page 232]
▪ Linking analog inputs and outputs [►Section 8.1.15, Page 228]
If device functions are configured for Modbus, you can link the functions to
the data points of the sensors.
Figure 184: Assigning functions
user role.

8 Operation
Proceed as follows to assign the functions:

ü The functions of the digital signals [►Section 8.1.16, Page 232] and ana-
log signals [►Section 8.1.15, Page 228] are configured for Modbus.
1. Go to Settings > Sensor bus > Function assignment.
2. Select the desired sensor address.
3. Select the desired data point.
4. Press the Accept button to save the changes.
5. After assigning the functions, reset the device to apply the changes.
8.1.14.4 Defining the sensors
This menu lets you define your own sensors, which you can connect to the
device over the MR sensor bus. The defined sensors are then available in
the sensor management function as a selection option.
The sensor editor shows you an overview of the defined sensors:

▪ Name
▪ Version
▪ Manufacturer
You can add, edit or delete sensor definitions.
Figure 185: Sensor editor
Incorrect configurations can cause unwanted device behavior. Ensure that

the sensor configuration is performed only by specialists with knowledge of
the overall system and use the two-man rule for reviewing the configuration.

8 Operation
Adding a sensor definition
You have to set the following values to add a sensor:

Value Description
Sensor name Entry field, max. 20 characters
Sensor version Format: X.Y.Z (e.g. 1.5.2), used together with the sensor
name to provide unique identification of the sensor in the
sensor management menu.
Sensor manufacturer Entry field, max. 15 characters
(optional)
Data points Configuration of the sensor data points
Table 61: Adding sensors
user role.
Proceed as follows to add a sensor:

1. Go to Settings > Sensor bus > Sensor editor.
2. Press the New sensor button.
Figure 186: Defining a new sensor
3. Enter the sensor name, sensor version and sensor manufacturer (op-
tional).
4. Press the Accept button to save the settings and configure the data
points.

8 Operation
Configuring data points
You must set the following values to configure a data point:

▪ Type
– IREG: Input register (analog input)
– DISC: Discrete input (digital input)
– HREG: Holding register
– COIL: Digital input/output
▪ Register
▪ Description
▪ Byte order
– Little-endian
– Big-endian
▪ Data type
▪ Multiplier (only with IREG or HREG)
▪ Optional: Validation (only with IREG or HREG)
– DISC or COIL for validation designation
– Minimum and maximum permitted value of the sensor (based on the
raw value determined by the sensor, setting range dependent on the
data type)
Figure 187: Configuring data points

8 Operation
To configure a data point, proceed as follows:

1. Select the desired type.
2. Press the + new button to add a new data point or press the button to
edit a data point.
Figure 188: Adding a data point
3. Enter a description.
4. Select a data type and register.
5. Select the byte order of the sensor.
6. Only with IREG or HREG: Enter the multiplier.
7. Optional (only with IREG or HREG): Enter the register of the DISC or
COIL for validation and select the value for validity (High-active: 1 = valid;
Low-active: 0 = valid).
8. Optional (only with IREG or HREG): Enter the minimum and maximum
value for the validation. If the raw value is not within the set range, the
value is interpreted as being invalid.
9. Press the Accept button to save the data point.
Editing a sensor definition
Editing the sensor definition does not have any effect on sensors that have
already been added to the sensor management function. The edited sensor
definition is available only if you add a new sensor to the sensor manage-
ment function.

8 Operation
To edit the sensor definition, proceed as follows:

2. Press the button.
Figure 189: Editing a sensor definition
3. Enter the sensor name, sensor version and sensor manufacturer (op-
tional).
4. Optional: Press the Edit button to go to the data point configuration. Any
changes made are applied in this case.
5. Press the Accept button to save the settings.
Deleting a sensor definition
Deleting the sensor definition does not have any effect on sensors that have
already been added to the sensor management function.
To delete the sensor definition, proceed as follows:

8.1.14.5 Displaying information on the connected sensors
You can display information on the status and the current values of all sen-
sors that you have added to the sensor management function. The overview
screen displays the following information:
▪ Sensor status
– Red: Error
– Blue: OK
▪ Name
▪ Version

8 Operation
▪ Manufacturer
▪ Modbus address
Figure 190: Overview screen
► Go to Information > System > Sensor bus.
Detailed information on the sensor
You can display the current transmitted data point for each sensor on the
overview screen. The following information is displayed:
▪ Register (Reg.)
▪ Description
▪ Raw value
▪ Function value
▪ Function

8 Operation
If a value is identified as being "invalid", this value is displayed in red. If you

have assigned a function to the sensor, the function value is also displayed.
Figure 191: Detailed information

2. Select the desired type.
8.1.15 Configuring analog inputs and outputs (optional)

You can flexibly configure the device's analog inputs and outputs and assign
device functions.
The device supports analog sensors with linear characteristic curves and
only outputs analog signals with linear characteristic curves.

8 Operation
Correction factor and offset Setting a correction offsets systematic errors of the analog signals. The cor-
rection is determined by multiplying a factor by the sum of the offset. The
minimum and maximum values of the function values apply as a limit value
for the correction. There is no limit for the correction offset.
Measured variable
Max.
Correction factor
Correction offset
Min.
Min. Max. Analog signal
Figure 192: Analog signal with linear characteristic curve, correction factor <1 and correction off-
set

Page 140].
The following information is displayed in tabular form for configuring the ana-
log inputs and outputs. Grayed-out elements cannot be changed.
Property Options
output.
▪ 4...20 mA
▪ PT100-2/3/4, PT1000-2/3/4
1)
1)

8 Operation
Property Options
value 2) with a 4...20 mA signal, the corresponding measured
y = (m * x) + t
1)
2)
3)
Property Options
output.
▪ 4...20 mA
▪ PT100-2/3/4, PT1000-2/3/4
1)
value with a 4...20 mA signal, the corresponding measured
y = (m * x) + t
1)

8 Operation
2)
Figure 193: Configuring analog inputs/outputs
You can only change the configuration of the analog inputs and outputs if
you have a Parameter Configurator or Administrator role.

▪ Password: admin
Creating a backup
You need to create a backup to be able to reset the system in the event that
Configuring AIO
1. Go to Settings > AIO configuration.
2. Configure properties such as function, signal type and card/channel.

8 Operation
3. Select the button to configure the values as desired.
Figure 194: Entering values

5. Confirm the security prompt with Save to save the changes.
8.1.16 Configuring digital inputs and outputs

Upon delivery, the configurable digital inputs and outputs of the device are
configured as follows:
▪ Input: High active
▪ Output: N/O contact (NO)
You can change this configuration if necessary.
Ensure that the configuration of the digital inputs and outputs is suitable for
the functions used. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur in the device and
the connected periphery.
The following information is displayed in tabular form for configuring the digi-
tal inputs and outputs. Grayed out elements cannot be changed.

8 Operation
Property Options
Function Function of the digital input (I: ...) or the digital output (O: ...). You
can adjust the designation.
Signal type Select signal type:
▪ Digital: Digital input
1)
Configuration DI: High active or low active
DO: N/O contact (NO), N/C contact (NC); Note: If the device is dis-
connected or in the event of an error, the digital outputs are always
open (no bi-stable relay).
Assembly/ Channel of the DIO assembly to which the function is linked. Func-
channel1) tions that are not linked with a channel are identified with "-". Note
the connection diagram supplied.
Table 64: Configuration of the digital inputs and outputs
1)
Property Options
Function Function of the digital input (I: ...) or the digital output (O: ...). You
can adjust the designation.
Signal type Select signal type: Digital input
Configuration DI: High active or low active
DO: N/O contact (NO), N/C contact (NC); Note: If the device is dis-
connected or in the event of an error, the digital outputs are always
open (no bi-stable relay).
Assembly/ Channel of the DIO assembly to which the function is linked.
channel Functions that are not linked with a channel are identified
with "-". Note the connection diagram supplied.
Table 65: Configuration of the digital inputs and outputs
Figure 195: Configuring digital inputs and outputs

8 Operation
tion using a computer. You can only change the configuration of the digital
inputs and outputs if you have a Parameter Configurator or Administrator
role.

▪ Password: admin
Creating a backup You need to create a backup to be able to reset the system in the event that
Configuring DIO To configure the device's digital inputs and outputs, proceed as follows:
1. Go to menu item Settings > DIO configuration.
2. Where necessary, select the buttons ▲ or ▼ to sort the properties in a
column alphabetically.
3. Configure the properties as desired.
5. Confirm the security prompt with Yes to save the changes.
8.1.17 Event management

The device is equipped with event management, which allows you to detect
various device operating statuses and to adapt the behavior of the device.
You can call up an overview of the possible events in the device.
8.1.17.1 Displaying and acknowledging events
To display the events currently active, proceed as follows:

► Go to Events.
ð A list of currently pending events appears.

8 Operation
Events
No. Event Time

Home
17.03.2020
8 Limit value I>>
10:56:59/669
17.03.2020
12 Limit value S>>
10:56:59/669
Events
17.03.2020
16 Limit value P>> 10:56:59/669
17.03.2020
18 Limit value Q<<
10:56:59/669
17.03.2020 Information
1001 Ambient temperature invalid
10:56:59/669
17.03.2020
1002 Ambient temperature
3 12 38
Recorder
Confirm Log
Figure 196: Overview of events currently active
Acknowledging events
Acknowledgeable events must be acknowledged in the event overview so

that they are no longer displayed. All other events are automatically removed
once the cause is remedied (e.g. limit value is no longer exceeded).
To acknowledge the events, proceed as follows:
► To acknowledge the events, highlight the desired events in the col-

umn, then press the Acknowledge button.
ð The events have been acknowledged.
8.1.17.2 Configuring events
The events have the following properties:

Property Description
Event name Brief name of event. If you delete all of the text, the stan-
dard text is displayed.
Event description Description of event. If you delete all of the text, the stan-
dard text is displayed.
Event troubleshooting Instructions for troubleshooting the cause of an event. If
you delete all of the text, the standard text is displayed.
Category ▪ Error (red)
▪ Warning (yellow)
▪ Info (gray)
This setting affects the color of the Alarm LED and the
event symbol in the primary navigation.
Report If you activate this option, the event is shown on the dis-
play and, if configured accordingly, issued via an output
and the control system protocol.

8 Operation
Property Description
Save If you activate this option, the event is stored in the event
memory.
Multi-set The event can be triggered several times without having
(not configurable) been deactivated in the meantime.
High active High active: The device generates a signal if the event is
(not configurable) pending.
Low active: The device generates a signal so long as the
event is not pending. If the event is pending, the signal is
reset.
Acknowledgeable Acknowledgeable events must be acknowledged in the
(not configurable) event overview so that they are no longer displayed. All
other events are automatically removed once the cause is
remedied (e.g. limit value is no longer exceeded).
Blocking If the event is active, it blocks automatic voltage
(not configurable) regulation.
Table 66: Properties of events
Settings Events Limit value U<
Name
Limit value U< Home
Description
Value has fallen below the limit value for undervoltage U<.
Remedy Events
Check the current operating conditions of the transformer and the set U<
parameters.
Information
Category Report High active

Save Acknowledgeable
Warning Multi-set Blocking
Recorder
Cancel Accept
Figure 197: Configuring events
To configure an event, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings > Events.
2. Select the event to be changed in the list.
3. Select the desired options.
4. Press the Accept button to save the change.

8 Operation
8.1.17.3 Displaying event memory
Past events are stored in the event memory. You can adjust the display of
events using different filters. The following filters are available for this pur-
pose:
Filter Description
Time Date and time of event
Category Event category:
▪ Error (red)
▪ Warning (yellow)
▪ Info (gray)
Status Event coming/going:
Event coming
Event going
Components System components
Event Up to 3 events can be selected
To call up the event memory, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Events > Event memory.
Figure 198: Event memory
2. Set the desired filters.

3. Select the desired events in the Event list.
4. Press the Search button to display the desired events.
Exporting events
You can export the event memory entries currently displayed as a csv file. If
you first create a filter, only the filtered entries are exported.

8 Operation
To export the events, proceed as follows:

ü First connect using Connect PC or connect a storage medium to the USB
port on the CPU I [►Section 4.4.1.5.4, Page 47] module.
1. Click on the Export button.
2. Select the desired option for data transmission (PC or USB).
ð The data is exported.
8.1.17.4 Exporting the event messages overview
You can call up an overview of the possible events in the device.

ü First connect using Connect PC or connect a storage medium to the USB
port on the CPU I [►Section 4.4.1.5.4, Page 47] module.
1. Go to menu item Settings > Export > Event list.
2. Select the location where you want to save it.
3. Select the button Start export.
ð The overview of event messages is exported.
8.1.18 User administration

User administration is based on a system of roles. You must assign a role to
every user. You can define access rights to parameters and events for each
role.
8.1.18.1 User roles
The access rights to device functions and settings are controlled using a hi-
erarchical system of roles. The system has 5 different roles with different ac-
cess rights. Some of these access rights are fixed, but you can configure the
access rights to particular parameters and events. Note the Setting access
rights to parameters and events [►Section 8.1.18.4, Page 243] section.
If you are not logged in on the device, you will assume the "Data display"
user role.

8 Operation
Upon delivery, the following roles are provided:

Role Description
Data display User who can only view data of relevance to operation.
▪ Display all parameters
▪ Display all events
Diagnostics User who can view data and log data of relevance to oper-
ation.
▪ Display all events
▪ Export log data
Operator User who can view data of relevance to operation and ac-
knowledge events. The user can perform manual tap-
change operations using the device's controls.
▪ Display and acknowledge all events
Parameter configura- User who can view and modify data of relevance to opera-
tor tion.
▪ Display and modify all parameters
▪ Import and export parameters
▪ Display, modify, and acknowledge all events
Administrator User who can view and modify all data.
▪ Read all parameters
▪ Display, modify, and acknowledge all events
Table 67: Roles in delivery status
Access to the following areas of the device is linked to the roles:

Function Data display Diagnostics Operator Parameter Administrator
configurator
Administration - - - - +
Restart device - - + + +
Import - - - + +
Export - + - + +
Set date and time - - + + +
Calling up the commissioning - - - + +
wizard
Calibrate resistor contact se- - - - + +
ries
Actuation of the RAISE, - - + + +
LOWER, REMOTE, AVR
AUTO, and AVR MANUAL
keys
Setting topology - - - + +

8 Operation
Function Data display Diagnostics Operator Parameter Administrator

configurator
Configuring analog inputs and - - - + +
outputs
Configuring digital inputs and - - - + +
outputs
Setting TPLE - - - + +
Configuring data points - - - + +
Calling up the maintenance - - - + +
wizard
Changing tap position table - - - + +
Enabling ECOTAP Modbus - - - + +
Adding sensors to the MR - - - + +
sensor bus
Table 68: Access rights permanently linked to the roles
8.1.18.2 Changing the password
All users can change their passwords provided that the user account is not
set up as a group account. You can only change a group account's pass-
word if you are logged in as the administrator.
Note that the password must satisfy the following requirements:

▪ At least eight characters
▪ At least three of the four following character types
– Upper case letters
– Lower case letters
– Numbers
– Special characters

8 Operation
To change the password, proceed as follows:

1. Select the user name in the status line.
Figure 199: Changing the password
2. Enter the new password twice.

3. Press the Accept button to save the changed password.
8.1.18.3 Creating, editing and deleting users
You can set the following options for all users:

▪ Username and password
▪ Role: You can assign a role to every user. The access rights to parame-
ters and events are linked to the roles.
▪ Group access: With this option, you can declare a user account to be a
group account (e.g. for access by different people). Users with group ac-
cess cannot change their own password. The password can only be
changed by the administrator.
▪ Active: You can activate or deactivate the user. Deactivated users cannot
log in. The user data is still stored in the device.
▪ Auto login: You can activate the Auto-login function for a user. This user is
automatically logged in when the system is restarted or another user logs
out.

8 Operation
Figure 200: Overview of users created
You can only create, edit, and delete users if you are assigned an adminis-
trator role.

▪ Password: admin
Creating users
To create a new user, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings > Administration > User.
2. Press the Create user button.
3. Enter the user name once and the password twice.
4. Select the role you want.
5. If necessary, activate the Group account, Active or Auto login options.
6. Press the Accept button to save the user.
Editing users
To edit an existing user, proceed as follows:

2. In the list, select the button for the desired user.
3. Make the amendments desired.
4. Press the Accept button to save the user.

8 Operation
Deleting user
To delete an existing user, proceed as follows:

2. In the list, select the button for the desired user.
3. Press the Accept button to delete the user.
8.1.18.4 Setting access rights to parameters and events
You can configure access rights to parameters and events for the available
roles. The following options are available for this purpose:
▪ Read: Parameter/event may be displayed.
▪ Write: Parameter/event may be modified.
▪ Acknowledge: Event may be acknowledged.
Figure 201: Setting access rights for an event
You can only change access rights if you are assigned an administrator
role.

▪ Password: admin
Setting access rights to parameters/events

1. Go to Settings > User administration > Parameter authorizations/
Event authorizations.
ð A list of all parameters or events appears.
2. Edit the desired entry in the list using the button.
3. Select the desired options.

8 Operation
4. Press the Accept button to save the change.

5. Restart the device to apply the changed language setting.
8.1.18.5 User authentication via RADIUS (optional)
The device supports user authentication via RADIUS in accordance with

RFC 2865. In this case, the device also functions as a RADIUS client. To
use RADIUS, you must create a dictionary for ISM® devices on your RA-
DIUS server and set the parameters for RADIUS on the device.
Note the following information:

▪ Only use RADIUS in a secure network, as sensitive information is trans-
mitted.
▪ If a user ID has been created both on the RADIUS server and locally on
the device, the device first tries to log in via the RADIUS server. If it is not
possible to log in, the device will use the locally saved login data.
▪ If a user ID has not been created on the RADIUS server, the device uses
the locally saved login data.
8.1.18.5.1 Creating a dictionary on the RADIUS server
You must create a dictionary for ISM® devices on your RADIUS server in
accordance with the following specification.
VENDOR MR 34559
BEGIN-VENDOR MR
# Attributes
ATTRIBUTE MR-ISM-User-Group 1 integer
# Predefined values for attribute 'MR-ISM-User-Group'
VALUE MR-ISM-User-Group Administrator 1
VALUE MR-ISM-User-Group Parameter-configurator 2
VALUE MR-ISM-User-Group Operator 3
VALUE MR-ISM-User-Group Diagnostics 4
VALUE MR-ISM-User-Group Data-display 5
END-VENDOR MR
If your RADIUS server supports the importing of a dictionary, you can export
the dictionary for ISM® devices from the device and import it onto your RA-
DIUS server. For more information, refer to the information in the section ti-
tled Exporting data [►Section 8.1.21.1, Page 248].
The user groups of the dictionary correspond to the user roles [►Section
8.1.18.1, Page 238] of the device and the corresponding authorizations.

8 Operation
8.1.18.5.2 Configuring RADIUS
To establish a connection to the RADIUS server, you must set the following
parameters.
Settings Parameters RADIUS
Name Value
Home
Activate RADIUS client Off
RADIUS server 0.0.0.0
RADIUS server port 1812
Authentication protocol CHAP Events
Key (shared secret) default
Information
Recorder
Figure 202: Configuring RADIUS
You can only configure RADIUS if you are assigned an administrator role.

▪ Password: admin
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > System > RADIUS.
Activate RADIUS client
You can use this parameter to activate the RADIUS client.
RADIUS server
You can use this parameter to set the IP address of the RADIUS server.
RADIUS server port
You can use this parameter to set the port of the RADIUS server.

8 Operation
Authentication protocol
You can use this parameter to set the authentication protocol through which
the server and client communicate. You can select the following options:
▪ PAP (password authentication protocol)
▪ CHAP (challenge handshake protocol)
Key (shared secret)
You can use this parameter to set the key (shared secret). You must set up
the same key on the RADIUS client and the RADIUS server. The key may
contain a maximum of 127 characters from the ASCII character set.
8.1.19 Hardware
Under Hardware, you can display information on the device's hardware. You
will find information about the signal level of the individual channels for the
assemblies.
Figure 203: Displaying information for the device's hardware (example)
1. Go to Information > System > Hardware.

2. Select the desired Assembly in order to display the signal levels of the
channels.
8.1.19.1 Status of the DIO assembly
You can display the status of the digital inputs and outputs of the DIO as-
sembly.
▪ Terminal pin
▪ Status of the input (I: …) or output (O: …)
– Blue: There is a signal (logical 1) at the input or output.
– Gray: There is no signal (logical 0) at the input or output.
▪ Linked function

8 Operation
Figure 204: Status of the DIO assembly
8.1.19.2 Status of the AIO assembly
You can display the status of the analog inputs and outputs of the AIO as-
sembly. If a value is not within the permitted range, this value will be dis-
played in red.
Figure 205: Status of the AIO assembly

8 Operation
8.1.20 Software
Under Software, you can display the version status of the software compo-
nents of the device.
Figure 206: Information about the device's software
► Go to Information > System > Software.
8.1.21 Import/export manager

The device is equipped with an import/export manager, which can be used
to export and import various data.
To transfer the data, the following options are available:

Option Description
USB Data transfer via USB port on rear of CPU I assembly.
PC Data transfer via PC using web-based visualization.
Table 69: Data transfer options
8.1.21.1 Exporting data
The device stops logging the measured value recorder data for the duration
of the export.

8 Operation
You can export the following data from the device, depending on your device
configuration:
Option Description
System image Complete image of the system (software and configuration). If you
are using the option "with history", all of the event memory entries
are also exported.
System config- System configuration
uration
Customer pro- Customer program export (TPLE).
gram
Event memory All event memory entries.
Recorder Measured value memory export.
Parameter list Parameter list with descriptive text and values (min, max, current).
Event list Complete list of all possible events.
SCADA config- Control system configuration (e.g. ICD file for IEC 61850).
uration
Operating In- Operating instructions, protocol specifications.
structions
Settings Configuration of parameters and events.
Data point con- Data point configuration of the control system.
figuration
Sensor bus de- Sensor description of the sensors for MR sensor bus that have
vice descrip- been created with the sensor editor.
tion
Service data Device data for support through the Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen
GmbH Technical Service department
Security log Logbook of all instances of access and changes relating to secu-
rity.
RADIUS dictio- Dictionary for importing on a RADIUS server.
nary
Table 70: Exporting data
Only remove the USB stick once the data transfer is complete. Otherwise
data may be lost.
To export data, proceed as follows:

2. Select the desired option for the export.

8 Operation
8.1.21.2 Importing data (software version 3.753 and later)
You can import the following data:

Option Description
System image Complete image of the system (software and configura-
tion), with or without history.
Settings All device settings:
▪ Parameter settings
▪ Event settings
▪ Administrative settings (users, access rights)
The settings can also be imported from another device.
Language Import of additional languages. You can install a maximum
of 5 different languages on the device. If 5 languages are
already installed, you will be asked to delete one during the
import process.
SSL certificate Import of an SSL certificate with associated key:
▪ Server certificate (.crt + .pem)
▪ Client certificate (.crt + .pem)
▪ Client CA (.crt)
For the import, you will have to compress the certificate
(*.crt) and key (*.pem) in a zip file.
You can import certificates with the following key authenti-
cation:
▪ RSA with 1024 bits
▪ ECDSA with 256 bits ("secp256r1" or "prime256v1"
curve).
Data point configura- Data point configuration import
tion
SCD import Control system configuration import
TPLE Customer program import (TPLE).
Table 71: Importing data
NOTICE Damage to the file system!

The file system can become damaged due to an incorrect data transmission
process. A damaged file system can lead to the device no longer being
functional.
► Do not disconnect the device from the power supply during the import.
► During the import, do not remove the USB stick or disconnect the network
connection.
To import data, proceed as follows:

2. Select the desired option for data transmission (PC or USB).

8 Operation
3. Select the file to be imported.

ð The file is checked.
4. Press the Import button.
ð The data is imported, then the device is restarted.
8.1.22 Configuring media converter with managed switch

Observe the following information on configuring the media converter with
managed switch SW 3-3. Use the following browser to call up web-based vi-
sualization:
▪ Firmware version 02.0.01: Internet Explorer 11
▪ Firmware version 07.1.00 or higher: HTML5-compatible browser, e.g.,
Google Chrome
8.1.22.1 Commissioning
Before integrating the Ethernet switch into your network, you must review
the most important settings and adjust them if necessary. During this
process, follow the information outlined in this chapter for commissioning the
Ethernet switch.
Establishing a connection to the web-based visualization
The Ethernet switch is supplied with the following factory default settings: IP
address 192.168.1.1; subnet mask 255.255.255.0; gateway address
0.0.0.0.
For commissioning the Ethernet switch, proceed as follows:

1. Establish connection with a computer via an Ethernet connection.
2. Configure the computer so that it is in the same subnet as the Ethernet
switch.
3. Access the IP address 192.168.1.1 using a browser.

8 Operation
4. Login with the user information (login = admin; password = private).

Switch the language if necessary (German/English).
Figure 207: Login using a web interface
Changing the user name and password

1. Go to Device security > User administration.
2. Create a new use with the administrator user role. Activate the user and
assign a password.
3. NOTICE! Ensure that an additional user with the administrator user role
is present in addition to the "admin" user. Then delete the "admin" user.
4. Click on the button or Write to save the change.
Disabling unnecessary services
NOTICE Damage to the device

If you disable all services, you will no longer be able to access the device
later to configure or update it.
► Leave at least one service for secure communication enabled (e.g., SN-
MPv3, SSH or HTTPS).

8 Operation
1. Go to Device security > Management Access.
Figure 208: Management Access
2. Select the tab for the desired service.

3. Select Off to disable a service or use the checkboxes to disable sub-func-
tions of a service.
4. Click on the button or Write to save the change.
Setting network settings

1. Go to Basic settings > Grid > Global.
Figure 209: Network settings
2. Adjust the network settings and click on the button or Write to save
the changes.
3. In the Basic settings > Load/Save menu, click on the Save button to per-
manently store the settings.
4. If necessary, establish a connection to the new IP address to continue
changing settings. Click on the Help button to find out more information.
5. Attach the cable for connecting to your network.

8 Operation
8.1.22.2 Configuration
You can use the web interface to configure the Ethernet switch. You can find
more information about the configuration using the online help in the web in-
terface.
Calling up the web interface
To access the web interface, follow the instructions outlined in the Commis-
sioning [►Section 8.1.22.1, Page 251] chapter.
Selecting the redundancy protocol
To select the redundancy protocol, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Redundancy.
2. Select the specific menu item for the redundancy protocol.
3. Change the configuration and select the On option in the Function group
field.
4. In the Basic settings > Load/Save menu, click on the Save button to per-
manently store the settings.
Deactivate the unused redundancy protocols by selecting the Off option in

the Function group field.
Resetting to factory settings
To reset the Ethernet switch to its factory default settings, proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Go to Basic settings > Load/Save and click on the Reset to factory de-
faults… button.
2. Reestablish the connection to the IP address of 192.168.1.1 if necessary.
3. Set the MR factory settings in accordance with the following table.
Menu Parameter MR factory setting
Redundancy Redundancy protocol PRP
Security > Pre-login Login banner MR-specific
banner
Basic setting > Port Ports 5+6 Deactivated
configuration
Table 72: MR factory setting

8 Operation
8.1.22.3 Updating the Firmware
To ensure the IT security of the device, we recommend always keeping the

SW 3-3 assembly firmware up to date. The SW 3-3 assembly is based on
the Belden/Hirschmann EES-25 product. Therefore, follow the information in
the security bulletins published by Belden/Hirschmann:
▪ https://www.belden.com/security-assurance
You can obtain the firmware updates directly from the manufacturer Belden/
Hirschmann:
▪ https://catalog.belden.com/index.cfm?event=pd&p=PF_942050003
Install the updates as described by the manufacturer Belden/Hirschmann.
Establishing a Connection
1. Establish connection with a computer via an Ethernet connection.
2. Configure the computer so that it is in the same subnet as the Ethernet
switch.
3. Access the IP address 192.168.1.1 using a browser.
4. Log in with the user data (default settings: login = admin; password =
private). Switch the language if necessary (German/English).
Exporting the configuration
Prior to any update, the device configuration should be saved so that it can
be reloaded if necessary.
1. Go to Basic settings > Load/Save.
2. Select the NVM storage type and click on the […] > Export button. Save
the file to the PC.

8 Operation
Installing firmware updates
To update the firmware, proceed as follows:

ü The firmware update has been downloaded.
1. Go to Basic settings > Software and click on the […] button or .
Figure 210: Uploading a firmware update
2. Select the downloaded firmware update file. When doing so, ensure you
select the correct version (HSR or PRP).
ð The file will be loaded onto the assembly.
3. Click on the update or start button to start the update.
ð The firmware will be updated.
4. Once the update has been completed successfully: Go to Basic setting >
Restart and click on the Cold start button to restart the assembly.
Figure 211: Restarting the assembly
5. Disconnect the PC connection via the Ethernet connection and re-estab-

lish connection to your network.

8 Operation
8.1.23 Transformer Personal Logic Editor (TPLE)

You can use the Transformer Personal Logic Editor (TPLE) function to pro-
gram simple logical links via the web-based visualization. You can also link
the inputs and outputs available on the device using function modules.
Note that the device does not meet the requirements of a protective device.
Therefore, do not use TPLE to produce protective functions.
8.1.23.1 Function
8.1.23.1.1 Function groups
There are 10 function groups available that you can use to combine various
sub-tasks into one function. In one function group, you can link up to 12
function modules with variables. You can rename function groups and acti-
vate or deactivate them individually.
8.1.23.1.2 Variables
The following types of variables for information processing are available for
TPLE:
▪ Event inputs: You can use all the device's events as inputs for a function.
▪ Event outputs: 100 generic events are available as outputs for functions.
▪ Binary inputs: You can use all the device's configured digital inputs and up
to 42 generic inputs of the device as inputs for a function.
▪ Binary outputs: You can use all the device's configured digital outputs and
up to 20 generic outputs of the device as outputs for a function. If there is
a control system present, 10 generic control system messages are avail-
able.
▪ Analog inputs: You can use all the device's configured analog inputs as in-
puts for a function.
▪ Binary flags: You can use up to 100 binary flags as variables to store in-
termediate values. You can use binary flags as inputs and outputs for a
function.
▪ Analog flags: You can use up to 50 analog flags as variables to store in-
termediate values. You can use analog flags as inputs and outputs for a
function.
▪ Discrete inputs: You can use all the device's available discrete inputs as
inputs for a function.
8.1.23.1.3 Function modules
TPLE provides various function modules for processing the information.

8 Operation
8.1.23.1.3.1 AND
Description AND, logical AND link
Inputs Input 1…4 (BOOL)
Outputs Output (BOOL)
Parameter None
Function If all configured inputs are TRUE, the output is TRUE,
otherwise it is FALSE.
Initial state All inputs and outputs are FALSE.
Non-configured inputs are assumed to be TRUE.
If no input is configured, the module is not run so it re-
mains in its initial state.
Table 73: AND function module
8.1.23.1.3.2 NAND
Description NAND, logical NOT-AND link
Parameter None
Function If all configured inputs are TRUE, the output is FALSE,
otherwise it is TRUE.
Non-configured inputs are assumed to be TRUE so
that they have no impact on the output.
If no input is configured, the output therefore remains in
the initial state of FALSE.
Table 74: NAND function module
8.1.23.1.3.3 OR
Description OR, logical OR link
Parameter None
Function If one of configured inputs is TRUE, the output is
TRUE, otherwise it is FALSE.
Non-configured inputs are assumed to be FALSE.
Table 75: OR function module

8 Operation
8.1.23.1.3.4 NOR
Description NOR, logical NOT-OR link
Parameter None
Function If all configured inputs are FALSE, the output is TRUE,
otherwise it is FALSE.
Non-configured inputs are assumed to be FALSE so
If no input is configured, the output remains in the initial
state of FALSE anyway.
Table 76: NOR function module
8.1.23.1.3.5 XOR
Description XOR, logical EXCLUSIVE-OR link
Parameter None
Function If an odd number of inputs is TRUE, the output is
TRUE, otherwise it is FALSE.
Non-configured inputs are assumed to be FALSE so
If no input is configured, the output therefore remains in
the initial state of FALSE.
Table 77: XOR function module
8.1.23.1.3.6 NOT
Description NOT, logical NOT link
Inputs Input (BOOL)
Parameter None
Function If the input is TRUE, the output is FALSE, otherwise it
is TRUE.
If the input is not configured, it is assumed to be TRUE
so that the output remains in the initial state of FALSE.
Table 78: NOT function module

8 Operation
8.1.23.1.3.7 Current impulse relay

Description RS, current impulse relay
Inputs Trigger (BOOL)
Set (BOOL)
Reset (BOOL)
Parameter None
Function If the Reset input is TRUE, Output forcibly becomes
FALSE.
If the Reset input is FALSE and the Set input is TRUE,
Output forcibly becomes TRUE.
If the Reset and Set inputs are FALSE, the status of
Output changes when there is a rising edge at the Trig-
ger input. If there is no edge at the Trigger input, Out-
put remains unchanged.
Non-configured inputs are assumed to be FALSE

so that they have no impact on the output.
Table 79: Current impulse relay function module
Figure 212: Example of RS
1 Trigger 2 Set
3 Reset 4 Output
8.1.23.1.3.8 Switch-on delay

Description TON, switch-on delay
Inputs Input (BOOL)

8 Operation
Parameter Time ms (UINT32), 1...1,000,000, default = 1,000

Function If Input has a rising edge, the internal timer is set to
zero and starts to run.
When the internal timer has reached or exceeded the
parameter value, Output becomes TRUE and the
counter stops running.
If Input becomes FALSE, Output also instantly be-
comes FALSE.
If the value of Time_ms is less than the cycle time, the
cycle time applies instead.
Table 80: Switch-on delay function module
8.1.23.1.3.9 Switch-off delay

Description TOFF, switch-off delay
Reset (BOOL)
Function If Input becomes TRUE, Output also instantly becomes
TRUE, this condition takes priority.
If Input has a falling input, the internal timer is set to
zero and starts to run.
parameter value, Output becomes FALSE and the
counter stops running.
If Input is FALSE and the Reset input becomes TRUE,
Output instantly and forcibly becomes FALSE and the
internal timer is set to the configured desired value.
Table 81: Switch-off delay function module
8.1.23.1.3.10 Pulse
Description PLSE, pulse

8 Operation
Function If there is a rising edge at the Trigger input at any time,

the internal timer is set to zero and starts to run, the
output becomes TRUE.
If the Trigger input becomes FALSE again during the
pulse time, this has no impact on the expiration of the
pulse time.
Once the internal timer has expired, the output be-
comes FALSE.
Table 82: Pulse function module
8.1.23.1.3.11 Symmetrical pulse generator

Description CLCK, symmetrical pulse generator
Inputs Enable (BOOL)
Function The internal timer runs for a long as Enable is TRUE.
configured time value, the status of the output changes
and the timer is restarted. The configured time there-
fore corresponds to half the period duration of the re-
sulting signal. If the Enable input becomes FALSE, the
output also instantly becomes FALSE and the internal
timer is reset.
Table 83: Symmetrical pulse generator function module
8.1.23.1.3.12 Counter (forwards/backwards)

Description COUNT, incremental counter
Direction (BOOL)
Reset (BOOL)
Lock (BOOL)
Outputs SINT32 (SINT32)
REAL32 (REAL32)
Parameter Reset value (SINT32), -10,000,000… +10,000,000, de-
fault = 0

8 Operation
Function If there is a rising edge at Reset, the output value is set

to the value of the Reset value parameter. A rising
edge at Reset takes priority over all other inputs.
For as long as Lock is TRUE, the pulse signal is not
evaluated and the counter reading is retained. If no in-
put is assigned, the default value FALSE is assumed.
When Direction input = FALSE, the output value is in-
cremented by one with every rising edge at the Trigger
input.
When Direction input = TRUE, the output value is
decremented by one with every rising edge at the Trig-
ger input.
Initial state All inputs and outputs are zero or FALSE.
Table 84: Counter (forwards/backwards) function module
Figure 213: Example of COUNT
1 Trigger 2 Direction
3 Reset 4 Lock
5 Output
8.1.23.1.3.13 Analog threshold value switch with hysteresis

Designation THRES, threshold value switch with hysteresis
Inputs Input (REAL32)
Error (BOOL)
Parameter On Limit (REAL32), -10,000,000… +10,000,000, de-
fault = 10,000,000
Off Limit (REAL32), -10,000,000 … +10,000,000, de-
fault = -10,000,000

8 Operation
Function On Limit ≥ Off Limit setting:

▪ If the value of Input is greater than On Limit, Output
becomes TRUE.
▪ If the value of Input is less than or equal to Off Limit,
Output becomes FALSE.
On Limit < Off Limit setting:
▪ If the value of Input is greater than On Limit and at
the same time less than Off Limit, Output becomes
TRUE. Otherwise, the Output is FALSE.
Table 85: Analog threshold value switch with hysteresis function module
Input
On
Off
Output FALSE TRUE FALSE
Figure 214: Analog threshold value switch with the On Limit > Off Limit setting
Input
Off
On
Output TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE
Figure 215: Analog threshold value switch with the On Limit < Off Limit setting

8 Operation
8.1.23.1.3.14 Analog multiplication

Description MUL, analog multiplication
Inputs Value (REAL32)
Multiplier (REAL32)
Outputs Result (REAL32)
Overflow (BOOL)
Parameter Constant multiplier (REAL32), -1,000,000...+1,000,000;
default = 1
Function Result = Value * Multiplier * Constant multiplier
If the REAL32 range of numbers is exceeded, the
Overflow output becomes TRUE.
Table 86: Analog multiplication function module
8.1.23.1.3.15 Analog division

Description DIV, analog division
Inputs Divident (REAL32)
Divisor (REAL32)
DivByZero (BOOL)
Overflow (BOOL)
Parameter Constant divisor (REAL32), -1,000,000...+1,000,000;
default = 1
Function Result = Dividend / Divisor / Constant Divisor
If dividing by zero, the DivByZero output becomes
TRUE and Result is set to zero.
Overflow output becomes TRUE and Result is set to
zero.
Table 87: Analog division function module
8.1.23.1.3.16 Analog addition

Description ADD, analog addition
Inputs Input 1 (REAL32)
Input 2 (REAL32)
Overflow (BOOL)
Parameter Offset (REAL32), -1,000,000...+1,000,000; default = 0

8 Operation
Function Result = Input 1 + Input 2 + Offset

Table 88: Analog addition function module
8.1.23.1.3.17 Analog subtraction

Description SUB, analog subtraction
Inputs Input 1 (REAL32)
Input 2 (REAL32)
Overflow (BOOL)
Parameter Offset (REAL32), -1,000,000...+1,000,000; default = 0
Function Result = Input 1 - Input 2 – Offset
Table 89: Analog subtraction function module
8.1.23.1.3.18 Rising edge

Description RTRG, rising edge trigger
Inputs Input (BOOL)
Parameter -
Function When the input changes from FALSE to TRUE, the
output becomes TRUE for one cycle of the function
group and then changes back to FALSE.
Table 90: Rising edge function module
8.1.23.1.3.19 Falling edge

Description FTRG, falling edge trigger
Inputs Input (BOOL)
Parameter -
Function When the input changes from TRUE to FALSE, the
output becomes TRUE for one cycle of the function
group and then changes back to FALSE.
Table 91: Falling edge function module

8 Operation
8.1.23.1.3.20 Average value

Description AVRG, average value
Enable (BOOL)
Reset (BOOL)
Autorepeat (BOOL)
Outputs Average (REAL32)
Done (BOOL)
Started (BOOL)
SampleCount (UINT32)
Parameter Time ms (UINT32): 1...2,000,000,000, default = 10,000
Sample time ms (UINT32): 1...10,000,000, default =
1,000
Function Averaging starts with a rising edge of Enable. This
does not affect averaging which is already underway.
Any output value remaining from earlier is retained.
The Done output becomes FALSE, the Started output
becomes TRUE.
Active averaging is interrupted with a rising edge of Re-
set. Average is set to zero, Done and Started become
FALSE. If Enable is also TRUE during the rising Reset
edge, a new averaging process is started.
Done becomes TRUE and Started becomes FALSE
once averaging is complete. Done remains TRUE until
a Reset is detected or new averaging is triggered by a
rising edge of Enable.
If AutoRepeat and Enable are TRUE, a new averaging
process is automatically started each time averaging is
completed. Done is set for one cycle each time averag-
ing is completed.
The SampleCount output states how many samples
have already been recorded.
Sample time ms is the desired sample time in millisec-
onds. It is rounded up to the next whole multiple of the
task cycle time and has a lower limit of at least one
task cycle time.
Time ms is the time period desired for averaging. It is
internally rounded up to the next whole multiple of the
sample time and has a lower limit of at least one sam-
ple time.
Table 92: Average value function module

8 Operation
Figure 216: AVRG
1 Input 2 Enable
3 Reset 4 AutoRepeat
5 Average 6 Done
7 Started 8 SampleCount
8.1.23.1.3.21 Scaling
Description SCAL, scaling
Outputs Output (REAL32)
Error (BOOL)
Parameter Min In (REAL32): -10,000,000...+10,000,000, default =
-10,000,000
Max In (REAL32): -10,000,000...+10,000,000, default =
+10,000,000
Min Out (REAL32): -10,000,000...+10,000,000, default
= -10,000,000
Max Out (REAL32): -10,000,000...+10,000,000, default
= +10,000,000

8 Operation
Function Output is calculated using the following formula:

Output = Min Out + (Max Out - Min Out) x
(Input – Min In) / (Max In – Min In)
Output is set to 0 and Error = TRUE when:
▪ Input is not within the parameters Min In and Max In
▪ Min In is greater than Max In
▪ Min Out is greater than Max Out
▪ Max In is the same size as Min In (division by zero)
Table 93: Scaling function module
8.1.23.1.3.22 Bridge
Designation BRDG, Bridge
Inputs Analog Input (REAL32)
Digital Input (BOOL)
Outputs Analog Output (REAL32)
Digital Output (BOOL)
Parameter -
Function Copies the value of Analog Input to Analog Output and
Digital Input to Digital Output.
Table 94: Bridge function module
8.1.23.1.3.23 RTOI
Description RTOI, Real-to-Integer conversion
Inputs Analog Input (REAL32)
Outputs Analog Output (SINT32)
Parameter -
Function Copies the value of Analog Input to Analog Output and
converts REAL32 to SINT32.
Initial state All inputs and outputs are zero.
Table 95: RTOI function module
8.1.23.1.3.24 ITOR
Description ITOR, Integer-to-real conversion
Inputs UINT32 (UINT32)
SINT32 (SINT32)
Outputs Output U (REAL32)
Output S (REAL32)

8 Operation
Parameter -
Function The value of UINT32 is output converted to Output U,
the value of SINT32 is output converted to Output S.
Initial state All inputs and outputs are zero.
Table 96: NAND function module
8.1.23.2 Configuring TPLE
You can configure TPLE on a PC using the web-based visualization. Only a

live view is available on the device's display. To configure TPLE, you have to
hold the role of Administrator or Parameterizer.

▪ Password: admin
8.1.23.2.1 Editing variables
You can adapt the name and description of the following variables:
▪ Binary inputs
▪ Binary outputs
▪ Analog inputs
▪ Binary flags
▪ Analog flags
▪ Discrete inputs
The names and descriptions of the generic events can also be adapted like
all other device events. Note the Event management [►Section 8.1.17,
Page 234] section.
The permissible number of characters is limited:

▪ Name: Maximum of 20 characters
▪ Description: Maximum of 80 characters

8 Operation
Figure 217: Editing variable
To edit the variable, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings > TPLE > Variables.
2. Select the variable you want.
3. Enter the name and description.
4. Press the Accept button to save the modified variable.
8.1.23.2.2 Creating functions
Within one function group, you can create up to 12 function modules to de-
pict one function. To create, edit or delete a function, you have to call up the
function group you want. To do so, proceed as follows:
1. Go to Settings > TPLE > Function group.
2. Select the function group you want.
Figure 218: Function group

8 Operation
Creating function modules
To create a function module, proceed as follows:

► Press the + button to create a new function module.
Deleting function modules
To delete a function module, proceed as follows:

► Drag the desired function module to the trash can using drag & drop.
Sorting function modules
To sort a function module, proceed as follows:

► Drag the desired function module to the desired position using drag &
drop.
Editing function module
To edit a function module, proceed as follows:

1. Select the desired function module.
2. Press the Edit button.
Figure 219: Editing function module
3. Select the inputs and outputs you want and set the parameters.
4. Press the Accept button to save the change to the function module.
8.1.23.2.3 Renaming function group
If necessary, you can rename the function group in order to better assign it.
To rename a function group, proceed as follows:


8 Operation
3. Select the text field with the name of the function group and enter the
name you want.
Figure 220: Renaming function group
4. Press [Enter] to accept the change.
8.1.23.2.4 Activating/deactivating function group
You can fully activate or deactivate a function group. When you deactivate a
function group, none of the function group's function modules are processed.
To activate/deactivate a function group, proceed as follows:

3. Press the Inactive button.
ð Red X: Function group is inactive; gray X: Function group is active.

8 Operation
8.2 Power grid
8.2.1 Transformer data

The transformation ratios and measuring set-up for the voltage and current
transformers used in the system can be set with the following parameters.
The device uses this information to calculate the corresponding measured
values on the primary side of the current transformer (and therefore the
transformer) from the recorded measured values. These are then displayed.
8.2.1.1 Setting transformer data
You can use the following parameters to set the transformer data. Also note
the Examples for standard circuits for current transformers and voltage
transformers [►Section 8.2.1.2, Page 276].
Settings Parameters Transfor...ata
Name Value
Home
Primary transformer voltage 100 kV
Secondary transformer voltage 100 V
Primary transformer current 100 A
Secondary transformer current 1A Events
Phase angle correction 0°
Voltage-transformer circuit 1 Ph phase voltage
Current-transformer circuit 1 Ph phase current
Information
Recorder
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Grid > Transformer data.

3. Set the desired parameter.
Primary transformer voltage
You can use this parameter to set the primary voltage of the voltage trans-
former in kV.
Secondary transformer voltage
You can use this parameter to set the secondary voltage of the voltage
transformer in kV.

8 Operation
Primary transformer current
You can use this parameter to set the primary current of the current trans-
former.
If you use the optional function "Hot-spot calculation on 3 different windings

(W1, W2, W3)", you must set the parameter for W1, W2 and W3 respec-
tively.
Secondary transformer current
You can use this parameter to set the secondary current of the current trans-
former. You can select the following options:
▪ 0.2 A
▪ 1 A
▪ 5 A

(W1, W2, W3)", this parameter setting applies to all 3 windings.
Measurement mode
If you are measuring the voltage and current with the 3-phase measuring
module, you can use this parameter to set whether you have connected the
voltage transformer between two phases or between a phase and neutral.
Phase angle correction
You can use this parameter to set the phase angle correction for your trans-
former circuit.
Voltage-transformer circuit
You can use this parameter to set your voltage transformer's circuit. You can
Option Description
1 Ph phase voltage Measurement in 1-phase grid between
the conductor and neutral conductor.
3 Ph differential voltage Measurement in 3-phase grid between 2
conductors
3 Ph phase voltage Measurement in 3-phase grid between
the conductor and neutral conductor
Table 97: Voltage-transformer circuit

8 Operation
Current-transformer circuit
You can use this parameter to set the circuit for your current transformer.
Option Description
1 Ph phase current Measurement of phase current in 1-phase
grid.
3 Ph total current Measurement of differential current in 3-
phase grid.
3 Ph phase current Measurement of phase current in 3-phase
grid.
Table 98: Current-transformer circuit
Voltage balance
You can use this parameter to set a correction value for the voltage mea-
surement in order to compensate for deviations through the measuring sec-
tion. The devices adds the correction value to the measured voltage (sec-
ondary side).
If the voltage is measured with a 3-phase measurement module, you can

only set the voltage balance if you select the "1-ph. measurement" option for
the parameter UI measuring channels [►Page 290].
8.2.1.2 Circuit examples for voltage transformers and current transformers
Below you will find different examples of circuits for voltage transformers and
current transformers and the corresponding settings.
8.2.1.2.1 1-phase measurement
Circuit 1-A
UI
L N k l
VT
CT L1
UL1 IL1
▪ The voltage transformer VT is connected to the phase conductor and neu-

tral conductor.
▪ The current transformer CT is looped into the phase conductor.
▪ The voltage UL1 and current IL1 are in phase.
▪ The voltage drop on a phase conductor is determined by the current IL1.

8 Operation
If you use this circuit, set the device as follows:

Parameters Option
Table 99: Circuit 1-A
Circuit 1-B
UI UL3 IL3
L N k l
VT
CT UL1 IL1
L1
UL2 IL2
L2
L3
N
UL1 IL1
▪ The voltage transformer VT is connected to the phase conductor L1 and

the neutral conductor.
▪ The current transformer CT is looped into the phase conductor L1.
▪ The voltage U and current I are in phase.

Parameters Option
Table 100: Circuit 1-B
Circuit 1-C
UL3 IL3
UI
L N k l
UL1 IL1
VT IL2
UL2
CT1
L1
CT2 -UL2 -IL2
L2 UL1-UL2 IL1-IL2
L3
UL1 IL1

8 Operation
▪ The voltage transformer VT is connected to the phase conductors L1 and

L2.
▪ The current transformer CT1 is looped into the phase conductor L1 and
CT2 into the phase conductor L2.
▪ The current transformers CT1 and CT2 are connected crosswise in paral-
lel (total current = IL1 + IL2).
▪ The total current IL1 + IL2 and voltage UL1-UL2 are in phase.
▪ The voltage drop on a phase conductor is determined by the current:
(IL1 + IL2) / √3.

Parameters Option
Voltage-transformer circuit 3 Ph differential voltage
Current-transformer circuit 3 Ph total current
Table 101: Circuit 1-C
Circuit 1-D
UL3 IL3
UI
L N k l
UL1 IL1
VT IL2
UL2
L1
-UL2 IL3
L2 UL1-UL2
CT
L3
UL1

L2.
▪ The current IL3 is ahead of voltage UL1-VL2 by 90°. This corresponds to a
phase shift of -90°.

Parameters Option
Table 102: Circuit 1-D

8 Operation
Circuit 1-E
UL3 IL3
UI
L N k l
UL1 IL1
VT
UL2 IL2
L1
-UL1
CT
L2
L3 UL2 IL2
UL2-UL1

L2.
▪ The current IL2 is ahead of voltage UL2-UL1 by 30°. This corresponds to a
phase shift of -30°.

Parameters Option
Table 103: Circuit 1-E
Circuit 1-F
UL3 IL3
UI
L N k l
VT
UL1 IL1
CT
L1 UL2 IL2
L2 -UL2
UL1-UL2
L3
UL1 IL1

L2.
▪ The current IL1 lags behind voltage UL1-UL2 by 30°. This corresponds to a
phase shift of +30° and a correction value of -30°.

8 Operation

Parameters Option
Phase angle correction -30°
Table 104: Circuit 1-F
8.2.1.2.2 3-phase measurement
Circuit 3-A
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT VT
CT
L1
CT
L2
CT
L3
▪ Three-phase measurement.
▪ The voltage transformers are connected between the phases.
▪ The current lags behind the voltage by 30°.

Parameters Option
Voltage-transformer circuit -
Current-transformer circuit -
UI measuring channels 3-phase measurement (channels 1, 2, 3)
Measurement mode Phase-phase
Table 105: Circuit 3-A

8 Operation
Circuit 3-B
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT VT
CT
L1
CT
L2
CT
L3
N
▪ Three-phase measurement.
▪ The voltage transformers are connected between the phase and neutral
conductor.
Parameters Option
UI measuring channels 3-phase measurement (channels 1, 2, 3)
Measurement mode Phase-neutral
Table 106: Circuit 3-B
Only use the circuits 3-C, 3-D and 3-E on symmetrical grids. Otherwise the
device will calculate incorrect performance values.
Circuit 3-C
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT
CT
L1
L2
L3
▪ Three-phase voltage measurement, single-phase current measurement.

▪ The current transformer is connected to phase L1.

8 Operation

Parameters Option
UI measuring channels 3-ph. voltage, 1-ph. current
Table 107: Circuit 3-C
Circuit 3-D
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT
L1
CT
L2
L3

Parameters Option
Table 108: Circuit 3-D

8 Operation
Circuit 3-E
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT
L1
L2
CT
L3

Parameters Option
Table 109: Circuit 3-E
Circuit 3-F
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT VT
CT
L1
L2
L3
N

conductor.

8 Operation
Parameters Option
Table 110: Circuit 3-F
Circuit 3-G
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT VT
L1
CT
L2
L3
N

conductor.
Parameters Option
Table 111: Circuit 3-G

8 Operation
Circuit 3-H
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT VT
L1
L2
CT
L3
N

conductor.
Parameters Option
Table 112: Circuit 3-H
8.2.1.2.3 Special applications
The following circuits (S-1, S-2, S-3 and S-4) describe special cases of cur-
rent measurement for hot-spot calculation on 3 different windings (e.g. three-
winding transformer or transformer with tertiary winding).
Only use these circuits in symmetrical grids. Note that you must always take
the W1 voltage and current measurements on the low-voltage side of the
transformer.
▪ W1: Voltage measurement and current measurement for the power calcu-
lation and hot-spot calculation on winding 1
▪ W2: Current measurement for hot-spot calculation on winding 2
▪ W3: Current measurement for hot-spot calculation on winding 3

8 Operation
Circuit S-1
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT VT
CT
L1
W1 L2
L3
N
CT L1
L2
W2
L3
CT
L1
W3 L2
L3
N

Parameters Option
Current-transformer circuit W2 Total current
Current-transformer circuit W3 Phase current
Table 113: Circuit S-1

8 Operation
Circuit S-2
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT
CT
L1
W1 L2
L3
N
CT L1
L2
W2
L3
CT
L1
W3 L2
L3
N

Parameters Option
Current-transformer circuit W2 Total current
UI measuring channels 1-ph. measurement: Channel 1, 2, 3
Measurement mode -

8 Operation
Circuit S-3
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT VT
CT
L1
W1 L2
L3
CT
L1
W2 L2
L3
CT
L1
W3 L2
L3

Parameters Option

8 Operation
Circuit S-4
UI
L1 L2 L3 N k1 l1 k2 l2 k3 l3
VT
CT
L1
W1 L2
L3
CT
L1
W2 L2
L3
CT
L1
W3 L2
L3

Parameters Option
UI measuring channels 1-ph. measurement: Channel 1, 2, 3
Measurement mode -

8 Operation
8.2.2 Measurement
You can use the following parameters to configure the measurement of cur-
rent and voltage.
Settings Parameters Measurement
Name Value
Home
Regulation mode Single-phase
Control variable L1/N or L1/L2
UI measuring channels 3-phase measurem.: Ch. 1,2,3
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 222: Measurement
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Grid > Measurement.

UI measuring channels
If you are measuring the voltage and current with the 3-phase UI 3 measur-
ing module, you can use this parameter to set the measurement channels in
use:
Option Description
1-ph. measurement: Channel 1 The device uses 1 channel each for measure-
ment of voltage and current.
3-ph. measurement: Channel 1, The device uses 3 channels each for measure-
2, 3 ment of voltage and current.
3-ph. voltage, 1-ph. current The device uses 3 channels for voltage measure-
ment and 1 channel for current measurement.
Table 117: UI measuring channels

8 Operation
Control variable
ing module and using the "single-phase" regulation mode, this parameter
can be used to select the phase used for voltage regulation. You can select
▪ L1/N or L1/L2
▪ L2/N or L2/L3
▪ L3/N or L3/L1
Regulation mode
ing module, you can use this parameter to set whether you want 1-phase
voltage regulation or voltage regulation to the average value of the 3 phases.
▪ Single-phase: Voltage is automatically regulated to one selected phase.
Limit value monitoring, line drop compensation, and parallel operation
also take place on the selected phase using the circulating reactive cur-
rent minimization method.
▪ Average value regulation: Voltage is automatically regulated to the aver-
age of the 3 phases. Limit value monitoring, line drop compensation, and
parallel operation also take place using the circulating reactive current
minimization method to the average of the 3 phases.
If you activate the average value regulation option, automatic voltage regu-
lation is blocked should the voltage or current measurement of one of the 3
phases fail.
Display power factor negative
You can use this parameter to set whether the device is to display a nega-
tive power factor. You can select the following options:
Option Description
Off The power factor is always shown as positive.
P>0 The power factor is shown as negative if the active power is
positive.
P<0 The power factor is shown as negative if the active power is
negative.
Q>0 The power factor is shown as negative if the reactive power is
positive.
Q<0 The power factor is shown as negative if the reactive power is
negative.
Table 118: Setting the display for the power factor

8 Operation
8.2.3 Voltage monitoring

In order to monitor the transformer's current output voltage, you can set
4 limit values:
▪ Undervoltage U<<: Lower limit 2
▪ Undervoltage U<: Lower limit 1
▪ Overvoltage U>: Upper limit 1
▪ Overvoltage U>>: Upper limit 2
If the measured value is higher than the upper limit (> or >>) or lower than
the lower limit (< or <<), the device transmits an event message.
U
U>>
H
U>
U<
U<<
tV tE t
Figure 223: Example of voltage monitoring with the limit value Overvoltage U> being exceeded
U>> Overvoltage U>> U> Overvoltage U>

U< Undervoltage U< U<< Undervoltage U<<
tV Delay time tE Event duration
H Hysteresis
You can set the following parameters for each limit value:
▪ Relative/absolute limit value
▪ Limit value [V]: Absolute limit value
▪ Limit value [%]: Limit value relative to the desired voltage value (only for
devices with voltage regulation)
▪ Hysteresis limit value
▪ Delay time limit value
▪ Behavior limit value (only for devices with voltage regulation)

8 Operation
Settings Parameters Voltage ...ing
<< < > >>

Home
Mode Relative Absolute Absolute Absolute
Absolute 60.1 V 80.0 V 110.9 V 120.0 V
Relative 60.1 % 80.0 % 110.9 % 120.0 % Events
Hysteresis 0.0 V 0.0 V 0.0 V 0.0 V
Delay time 10.0 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 10.0 s
Reaction Off Auto blockin... High-sp. ret... High-sp. ret...

Information
Recorder
Figure 224: Voltage monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Grid > Voltage monitoring.

Mode
You can use this parameter to set which limit value you would like to use:
▪ Absolute: The device uses the absolute limit value in V.
▪ Relative: The device uses the relative limit value in %, relative to the de-
sired voltage value.
Absolute
You can use this parameter to specify an absolute limit value in V (relative to
the secondary value of the voltage transformer) or in kV (relative to the pri-
mary value of the voltage transformer). Unlike the relative value, this limit is
not dependent on a reference value.
Percentage
You can use this parameter to set the limit value relative to the desired volt-
age value.

8 Operation
Behavior
You can use this parameter to set the behavior of the device if the measured
value is higher than the upper limit (> or >>) or lower than the lower limit (<
or <<). You can select the following options:
Setting Behavior
Off No reaction.
High-speed return For U</U<<: The device performs tap-change opera-
tions in the raise voltage direction (U+) until the mea-
sured voltage is back above the limit value.
For U>/U>>: The device performs tap-change opera-
tions in the lower voltage direction (U-) until the mea-
sured voltage is back below the limit value.
With high-speed return, the device ignores the set delay
time of automatic voltage regulation.
Auto blocking Automatic regulation is blocked.
You can continue to perform tap-change operations in
manual mode.
Auto/manual blocking Automatic regulation is blocked.
You cannot perform tap-change operations in manual
mode.
Auto blocking position+ The automatic control does not perform a tap-change
operation in the direction of a higher tap position (posi-
tion+).
You can still perform a tap-change operation in the di-
rection of a higher tap position (position+) in manual
mode.
Auto blocking position- The automatic control does not perform a tap-change
operation in the direction of a lower tap position (posi-
tion-).
You can still perform a tap-change operation in the di-
rection of a lower tap position (position-) in manual
mode.
Auto/manual blocking po- The automatic control does not perform a tap-change
sition+ operation in the direction of a higher tap position (posi-
tion+).
You cannot perform a tap-change operation in the direc-
tion of a higher tap position (position+) in manual mode.
sition- operation in the direction of a lower tap position (posi-
tion-).
You cannot perform a tap-change operation in the direc-
tion of a lower tap position (position-) in manual mode.
Table 119: Behavior when an event message is issued

8 Operation
Hysteresis
You can use this parameter to set the hysteresis. You can use this to avoid
the unnecessary generation of messages if the measured value fluctuates
around a threshold value.
Delay time
You can use this parameter to set the delay time in order to delay the issuing
of the event message.
8.2.4 Current monitoring

For monitoring the transformer's current load current, you can set 4 limit val-
ues:
▪ I<<: Lower limit 2
▪ I<: Lower limit 1
▪ I>: Upper limit 1
▪ I>>: Upper limit 2
the lower limit (< or <<), the device transmits an event message.
I
I>>
H
I>
I<
I<<
tV tE t
Figure 225: Example of current monitoring with the limit value I> being exceeded
I>> Upper limit 2 I> Upper limit 1

I< Lower limit 1 I<< Lower limit 2
tV Delay time tE Event duration
H Hysteresis
▪ Relative/absolute limit value
▪ Limit value [A] or [kA]: Absolute limit value

8 Operation
▪ Limit value [%]: Limit value relative to the rated current of current trans-
former. With current measurements via the analog input, the value is rela-
tive to the maximum value of the analog input (e.g. 100% = 20 mA).
Settings Parameters Current ...ing
<< < > >>

Home
Mode Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute
Absolute 0.0 A 0.0 A 7.7 A 10.0 A
Relative 0.0 % 0.0 % 110.0 % 110.0 % Events
Hysteresis 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A
Delay time 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
Reaction Auto blockin... Off Auto blockin... Off

Information
Recorder
Figure 226: Current monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Grid > Current monitoring.

Mode
You can use this parameter to set which limit value you would like to use:
▪ Absolute: The device uses the absolute limit value in A/kA.
▪ Relative: The device uses the relative limit value in %, relative to the rated
current of current transformer.
Absolute
You can use this parameter to specify an absolute limit value in A (in relation
to the secondary value of the current transformer) or in kA (in relation to the
primary value of the current transformer).
Percentage
You can use this parameter to set the limit value relative to the rated current
of current transformer. With current measurements via the analog input, the
value is relative to the maximum value of the analog input (e.g. 100% =
20 mA).

8 Operation
Hysteresis
Delay time
Reaction
Setting Behavior
Off No reaction.
manual mode.
mode.
8.2.5 Power monitoring

For monitoring the transformer's current power, you can set the following
limit values:
Measured value Lower Lower Upper Upper
limit 2 limit 1 limit 1 limit 2
Apparent power S<< S< S> S>>
Active power P<< P< P> P>>
Reactive power Q<< Q< Q> Q>>
Power factor (amount) |cos φ|<< |cos φ|< - -
Table 121: Limit values for power monitoring
▪ Limit value: Absolute limit value

8 Operation
the lower limit (< or <<), the device issues an event message.
Settings Parameter Power monitoring
<< < > >>

Home
S absolute 0 VA 0 VA 10 MVA 10 MVA
S hysteresis 100 kVA 100 kVA 100 kVA 100 kVA
S delay 5 s 5 s 5 s 5 s Events
S behavior Off Off Off Off
P absolute -10 MW -10 MW 10 MW 10 MW
P hysteresis 100 kW 100 kW 100 kW 100 kW

Information
P delay 5 s 5 s 5 s 5 s
P behavior Off Off Off Off

Recorder
Q absolute 0 Mvar 0 Mvar 10 Mvar 10 Mvar
Figure 227: Power monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Grid > Power monitoring.

Absolute
You can use this parameter to specify a limit value.
Hysteresis
Delay time

8 Operation
Reaction
Setting Behavior
Off No reaction.
manual mode.
Auto blocking position- The automatic control does not perform a tap-change
operation in the direction of a lower tap position (posi-
tion-).
manual mode.
Auto blocking position+ The automatic control does not perform a tap-change
operation in the direction of a higher tap position (posi-
tion+).
manual mode.
mode.
sition- operation in the direction of a lower tap position (posi-
tion-).
You cannot perform a tap-change operation in the di-
rection of a lower tap position (position-) in manual
mode.
sition+ operation in the direction of a higher tap position (posi-
tion+).
You cannot perform a tap-change operation in the di-
rection of a higher tap position (position+) in manual
mode.
8.2.6 Power flow monitoring

A reversal of power flow occurs if the active power is negative. You can set
the following parameters for this:
▪ Hysteresis
▪ Delay time
▪ Behavior

8 Operation
Settings Parameters Power fl...ing
Name Value
Home
Reversal of power flow hysteresis 100 kW
Reversal of power flow delay 5.0 s
Behavior for reversal of power fl... Off
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 228: Power flow monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Grid > Power flow monitoring.

Hysteresis
Delay time

8 Operation
Behavior for reversal of power flow
You can use this parameter to set the behavior in the event of a reversal of
power flow. You can select the following options:
Setting Behavior
Off ▪ The negative power flow is ignored.
▪ Automatic regulation remains active.
Event only ▪ The Reversal of power flow event is issued.
▪ If Z compensation is activated, this function is deacti-
vated.
▪ Automatic regulation remains active.
Auto blocking ▪ The Reversal of power flow event is issued.
vated.
▪ Automatic regulation is blocked.
Auto/manual blocking ▪ The Reversal of power flow event is issued.
vated.
▪ Automatic regulation is blocked.
▪ You cannot perform tap-change operations in manual
mode.
Target tap position ▪ The Reversal of power flow event is issued.
vated.
▪ The device triggers a tap-change operation to the tap
position you defined in the "Target tap posi-
tion" [►Section 8.5.4, Page 378] parameter.
▪ The device blocks further tap-change operations.
▪ The target-tap-position operation is ignored if there is
no tap-position capture. Automatic regulation is
blocked.
Table 123: Behavior in the event of a reversal of power flow

8 Operation
8.2.7 Phase symmetry monitoring

ing module, you can set the maximum permitted differences for voltage and
phase angle between the 3 phases. The difference is determined from the
highest and lowest measured value of the 3 phases.
Settings Parameters Phase sy...ing
ΔU Δφ
Home
Max. diff. 5.0 V 5.0 deg
Response for exceed Off Off
Delay time 0 s 0 s Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 229: Phase symmetry monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Phase symmetry.

Maximum difference
You can use this parameter to specify a limit value for the voltage difference
in V (in relation to the secondary value of the voltage transformer) or in kV
(in relation to the primary value of the voltage transformer) or the phase an-
gle difference.
Behavior
You can use this parameter to set the behavior of the device when the event
message is issued. You can select the following options:
Setting Behavior
Off The limit value is not monitored.
manual mode.
mode.

8 Operation
8.2.8 TAPCON® 2xx retrofit

The TAPCON® 2xx retrofit function allows you to operate the device in par-
allel operation with existing devices. Parallel operation with the following ex-
isting devices is supported:
▪ TAPCON® 230 pro/expert
▪ TAPCON® 240
▪ TAPCON® 250
▪ TAPCON® 260
▪ TRAFOGUARD® with "Voltage regulation" options package
If you wish to operate several devices in parallel operation with existing de-
vices, you have to activate the TAPCON® 2xx retrofit function on each de-
vice.
Figure 230: Parallel operation of 2 devices with one TAPCON® 2xx. The TAPCON® 2xx retrofit
function must be active on both devices.
Settings Parameters TAPCON® ...fit
Name Value
Home
Retrofit TAPCON®2xx Off
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 231: Retrofit TAPCON® 2xx
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Grid > TAPCON® 2xx retrofit.


8 Operation
TAPCON® 2xx retrofit
You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate the Retrofit TAPCON®
2xx function.
If you activate this parameter, you have to reverse the prefix of the "Phase
angle correction" parameter for the transformer data (from - to + or from + to
-).
8.2.9 Displaying current measured values

The current measured values can be displayed on the measured value
screen. Note that the displayed measured values may differ from the raw
values displayed in the information display of the UI assembly. The mea-
sured values are prepared for the measured value display by the device as
follows:
▪ The tap-change operation set for the current transformer and voltage
transformer is taken into account, as is a corresponding phase displace-
ment.
▪ The UI assemblies use the generator sign convention. The device dis-
plays the measured values using the load sign convention.
You can change the measured value display to the generator sign conven-
tion by activating the Retrofit TAPCON® 2xx [►Section 8.2.8, Page 303]
parameter.
The following measured values are displayed:

▪ Voltage
▪ Current
▪ Power factor (cos ϕ)
▪ Frequency
▪ Reactive power
▪ Active power
▪ Apparent power

8 Operation
Figure 232: Measured values
► Go to Information > Grid > Measured values.
8.2.10 Displaying minimum and maximum measured values

You can display the minimum and maximum values reached and the corre-
sponding time for the following measured values:
▪ Voltage
▪ Current
▪ Reactive power
▪ Active power
▪ Apparent power
Figure 233: Min. and max. measured values
1. Go to Information > Power grid > Min. and max. measured values.
2. As needed, select the Reset button to reset the minimum and maximum
values.

8 Operation
8.3 On-load tap-changer regulator
8.3.1 Regulation
The general functions for regulating the on-load tap-changer are described
in this section.
8.3.1.1 Response to control system disconnection (optional)
If your device is equipped with a connection to a control system (SCADA),

you can use the following parameters to set how the device is to behave if
the connection to the control system is interrupted.
This function only works in the REMOTE operating mode.
Settings Parameters Control
Name Value
Home
Control variable Voltage
Response to SCADA disconnection No reaction
SCADA disconnection delay time 5 s
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 234: Regulation
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer regulator > Regu-

lation.

8 Operation
Response to SCADA disconnection
You can use this parameter to set the behavior of the device when the con-
nection to the control system is interrupted. You can select the following op-
tions:
▪ No response: The device remains in the current operating mode.
▪ Switchover to auto mode: The device switches to auto mode.
▪ Desired value 1…5: The device uses the selected voltage desired value.
This desired value will also continue to be used once the connection is
reestablished. Depending on the device configuration, you can select up
to 5 desired values.
SCADA disconnection delay time
You can use this parameter to set the delay time before the device responds
to the SCADA interruption. If the connection to the control system is inter-
rupted for longer than the delay time, the device triggers an event and re-
sponds with the set behavior.
8.3.1.2 Setting control variable (optional)
If the device is equipped with the optional power regulation function, you can
set which control variable the device should regulate.
Settings Parameters Control
Name Value
Home
Control variable Voltage
Response to SCADA disconnection No reaction
SCADA disconnection delay time 5 s
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 235: Regulation
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer regulator > Regu-

lation.

8 Operation
Control variable
You can use this parameter to set which control variable the device is to reg-
ulate. You can select the following options:
▪ Voltage
▪ Reactive power
▪ Active power
Depending on your selection, the device uses the associated parameter set
for each option (desired value, bandwidth, etc.).
Standard regulation mode
You can set use this parameter to set the operating mode of the on-load tap-
changer regulation.
8.3.2 Voltage regulation (optional)

All of the parameters required for the voltage regulation are described in this
section.
Settings Parameters Voltage re...ion
Name Value
Home
Desired value 1 100 V
Selecting a desired value Desired value 1 Events
Bandwidth setting Percentage
Bandwidth 1.0 %
Delay time T1 40 s
Time response T1 Linear Information
Activate delay time T2 Off

Delay time T2 10 s
Recorder
Figure 236: Voltage regulation (example)
8.3.2.1 Setting the desired value
In accordance with the order, the device is equipped with one of the follow-
ing variants for setting the desired value:
8.3.2.1.1 Desired value 1
You have to set the parameters for both winding 1 (W1) and winding 2
(W2).

8 Operation
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Grid > Control > Desired value.
2. Enter the desired value.
8.3.2.1.2 Desired value 1...3
You can set 3 different desired values. The device always uses one of the
set desired values for control. You can define the desired value used for
control by means of the "Select desired value" parameter or with the digital
inputs.
The device only processes commands via digital inputs or the control sys-
tem when it is in the Remote mode. You must also set the Remote behavior
[►Page 170] parameter accordingly.
(W2).
Setting the desired value

1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Grid > Control > Desired value.
2. Enter the desired value.
Selecting a desired value
You can use this parameter to select the desired value used for control.
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Grid > Control > Select desired value.
2. Select the desired value from the list.
8.3.2.1.3 Active power-dependent adjustment of desired voltage value
The TAPCON® Dynamic Setpoint Control (TDSC) function is used to adapt

the desired voltage value depending on the measured active power. This al-
lows you to compensate for a voltage drop during increased load or a volt-
age increase due to a decentralized feed-in.

8 Operation
Depending on whether positive or negative active power is measured, the

desired value calculation is based on 2 linear equations (see example in dia-
gram below).
Parameter Function Settings (see diagram
below)
Umax: Maximum desired value Maximum set desired value is activated when Pmax is 103.0 V
exceeded.
Umin: Minimum desired value Minimum set desired value is activated when value falls 99.0 V
below Pmin.
U0: Desired value at 0 active Set desired value is activated when measured active 100.00 V
power power is 0 MW.
Pmax: Active power at max. de- Set maximum active power value above which the 20.0 MW
sired value power-dependent desired value is to attain the maxi-
mum value Umax.
Pmin: Active power at min. desired Set minimum active power value below which the -20.0 MW
value power-dependent desired value is to attain the mini-
mum value Umin.
Table 125: Parameters to be set for active power-dependent adjustment of desired voltage value
Figure 237: Active power-dependent adjustment of desired voltage value
Uref Desired value Umin Minimum desired value

Pmeas Measured active power Umax Maximum desired value
Pmin Active power at minimum de- U0 Set desired value when mea-
sired value sured active power = 0
Pmax Active power at maximum de-
sired value

8 Operation
Response to active power Pmax being exceeded
If the measured active power Pmeas exceeds the set parameter Pmax, the value
Umax is adopted as the desired value.
U ref = U max
Response to value falling below active power Pmin
If the measured active power Pmeas falls below the set parameter Pmin, the
value Umin is adopted as the desired value.
U ref = U min
Response to a measured active power Pmeas = 0 MW:
If the measured active power Pmeas = 0, the set parameter U0 is adopted.
U ref = U 0
Linear dependency with negative active power:
If the measured active power Pmin ≤ Pmeas ≤ 0, the desired value is calculated

using the following equation:
U 0 - U min
U ref = × Pmeas + U 0
0 - Pmin
Linear dependency with positive active power:
If the measured active power 0 ≤ Pmeas ≤ Pmax, the desired value is calculated

using the following equation:
U max - U 0
U ref = × Pmeas + U 0
Pmax
To activate the active power-dependent adjustment of the desired voltage

value, you need to set the following parameters:
(W2).
Activating TDSC
The TDSC function is only active when the device can calculate the active
power (correct current measurement and voltage measurement) and the re-
quired parameters are set. If this is not the case, the voltage is regulated to

8 Operation
the set desired value [►Section 8.3.2.1.1, Page 308]. You can activate or
deactivate the power-dependent adjustment of the desired voltage value as
follows:
▪ Parameter
▪ Digital inputs TDSC on and TDSC off (optional)
▪ Control system command (optional)
If you activate TDSC, the line drop compensation (R&X compensation or Z

compensation) function is deactivated.
To activate/deactivate TDSC using parameters, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Control > Activate TDSC.
2. Select the desired option.
TDSC Umax/Umin
You can use these parameters to set the maximum and minimum desired
value. The maximum or minimum desired value is activated when the mea-
sured active power reaches the set minimum or maximum active power.
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Control > TDSC Umax/Umin.
2. Enter maximum/minimum desired value.
TDSC U0
You can use this parameter to set the desired value which is to be used
when the measured active power is 0.
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Control > TDSC U0.
2. Enter desired value at active power 0.
TDSC Pmax/Pmin
You can use these parameters to set the maximum and minimum active
power value at which the maximum and minimum active power-dependent
desired value is to be used for regulation.
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Control > TDSC Pmax/Pmin.
2. Enter active power for maximum/minimum desired value.

8 Operation
8.3.2.1.4 Desired value setting according to the day profile
You can use the function "Desired value setting according to the day profile"
to set 12 desired values respectively for two profiles (working day or non-
working day). You can set a start time for each of these desired values. As
soon as the current device time reaches the start time, the device will acti-
vate the assigned desired value.
Desired value
4
5
7
3
2
8
1 1
0 6 7 9 1213 17 2223 Time
Figure 238: Desired value setting according to the day profile
1 Desired value 1 active 2 Desired value 2 active

If you use the automatic daylight saving/standard time [►Page 179] function
and the device sets the time 1 hour forward or back, the current desired
value remains active until the "new" device time reaches the next start time.
This applies in particular if a start time is skipped due to the automatic
changeover between daylight saving/standard time.
8.3.2.1.4.1 Selecting a day profile
You can select the active day using a digital input. The device will report the
active day profile using a digital output and as an event message.
8.3.2.1.4.2 Activating the next desired value
You can use the digital input next desired value to activate the next desired
value based on the start time of the day profile.

8 Operation
Example: It is 11:30; currently, the desired value with the start time 11:00 is
active. The start time of the next desired value is 13:00 and the start time of
the desired value after that is 18:00. Using a command via the next desired
value input, you can activate the next desired value (13:00), and with an-
other command the desired value after that (18:00).
8.3.2.1.4.3 Setting the desired values for the "Working day" profile
You can input 12 desired values and 12 start times each for the "Working
day" profile.
Figure 239: Working day voltage regulation
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer regulator > Work-

ing day voltage regulation.
Desired value 1...12
You can use these parameters to set up to 12 different desired values. The
desired values are coupled to the respective start times. If you would like to
use less than 12 different desired values, you must enter the same desired
value multiple times (e.g. desired value 9, 10, 11, 12 = 100 V).
Start time 1...12
You can use the parameters to set the start time for each desired value. As
vate the associated desired value. Note that you must input different times
for each parameter.

8 Operation
8.3.2.1.4.4 Setting the desired values for the "Non-working day" profile
You can input 12 desired values and 12 start times each for the "Non-work-
ing day" profile.
Figure 240: Non-working-day voltage regulation
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer regulator > Non-

working-day voltage regulation.
Desired value 1...12
You can use these parameters to set up to 12 different desired values. The
desired values are coupled to the respective start times. If you would like to
use less than 12 different desired values, you must enter the same desired
value multiple times (e.g. desired value 9, 10, 11, 12 = 100 V).
Start time 1...12
You can use the parameters to set the start time for each desired value. As
vate the associated desired value. Note that you must input different times
for each parameter.
Bandwidth setting
You can use this parameter to set whether you want the bandwidth as an
absolute variable (V or kV) or relative variable (%) in relation to the desired
value.
Bandwidth
You can use this parameter to set the maximum permissible deviation of the
measured voltage Uactual from the desired value Udesired.

8 Operation
In order to set the correct value, the transformer step voltage and nominal
voltage must be known. Note that a large bandwidth will result in a large
control deviation.
The bandwidth must always be greater than the following value:

Un- 1 - Un
|± B| ≥ 0,6× UN
× 100 %
Un-1 Step voltage of tap position n-1

Un Step voltage of tap position n
UN Nominal voltage
The following transformer values are used to determine the minimum band-
width:
Nominal voltage UN = 11000 V
Step voltage in tap position 4 UStep4 = 11275 V
Step voltage in tap position 5 UStep5 = 11000 V
Delay time T1
Delay time T1 delays the issuing of a tap-change command for a defined pe-
riod. This prevents unnecessary tap-change operations if the tolerance
bandwidth is exited briefly.
Response to delay time T1 If the control variable is within the set bandwidth , no control com-
mands are issued to the motor drive unit for the tap change. Control com-
mands will also not be issued to the motor-drive unit if the control variable
returns to the bandwidth within the set delay time T1 . However, if the
control variable deviates from the set bandwidth for a long period , a tap-

8 Operation
change command is issued after expiration of the set delay time T1. The
on-load tap-changer carries out a tap-change in a raise or lower direction to
return to the tolerance bandwidth.
Figure 241: Behavior of the control function with delay time T1
1 Upper limit of bandwidth 4 Set delay time T1

2 Desired value 5 Control variable measured value
3 Lower limit of bandwidth 6 Bandwidth range
A Control variable is outside of the B Control variable returned to within
bandwidth. Delay time T1 starts. the bandwidth before delay time
T1 has expired.
C Control variable is outside of the D Control variable is still outside the
bandwidth. Delay time T1 starts. bandwidth after delay time T1 has
expired. Tap-change operation is
initiated.
Delay time T2
You can use this parameter to set delay time T2. Delay time T2 is used to
compensate for large control deviations faster.
The delay time T2 only takes effect if more than one tap-change operation is
required to correct the control deviation. The first output pulse occurs after
the set delay time T1. After the set tap-change delay time T2 has elapsed,
additional pulses occur in order to correct the existing control deviation.
The following requirements must be noted to set delay time T2:

▪ The delay time T2 must be greater than the switching pulse time.
▪ The delay time T2 must be greater than the maximum operating time of
the motor-drive unit.
▪ The delay time T2 must be less than the value set for delay time T1.

8 Operation
Behavior with delay times If the control variable deviates from the set bandwidth for a long period
T1 and T2 , a control impulse is output to the motor-drive unit after the set delay time
T1 . If the control variable is still outside the bandwidth, delay time T2
starts to count down. Once delay time T2 is complete, a control impulse is
again issued to the motor-drive unit for the tap change to return to the tol-
erance bandwidth.
Figure 242: Behavior of the regulation function with delay times T1 and T2
1 Upper limit of bandwidth 4 Set delay times T1 and T2.

A Control variable is outside of the B Delay time T1 complete. Tap
bandwidth. Delay time T1 starts. change triggered.
C Delay time T2 complete. Tap
change triggered.

8 Operation
8.3.2.2 Several parameter sets (optional)
If your device is equipped with the optional "Several parameter sets" func-
tion, you can set the associated control parameters (bandwidth, delay times,
etc.) for each desired value individually.
Figure 243: Voltage regulation with the "Several parameter sets" option
8.3.3 Reactive power regulation (optional)

All of the parameters required for reactive power regulation are described in
this section.
Settings Parameters Reactive p...ion
Name Value
Home
Desired value 0 var
Bandwidth 0 var
Delay time T1 40 s
Time response T1 Linear Events
Delay time T2 10 s
Information
Recorder
Figure 244: Reactive power regulation
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer regulator > Reac-

tive power regulation.

8 Operation
Desired value
You can use this parameter to set the desired value for the reactive power
regulation.
Bandwidth
reactive power from the desired value.
Delay time T1


8 Operation

T1 has expired.
initiated.
Time response T1
You can use this parameter to set the time response for delay time T1. You
can select the following options:
▪ Linear time response
▪ Integral time response
Linear time response With linear time response, the device responds with a constant delay time
regardless of the control deviation.
Integral time response With integral time response, the device responds with a variable delay time
depending on the control deviation. The greater the control deviation (ΔU) in
relation to the set bandwidth (B), the shorter the delay time. This means that
the device responds faster to large voltage changes in the grid. Regulation
accuracy improves as a result but the frequency of tap-changes increases
too.
Figure 246: Diagram for integral time response
ΔU/B Control deviation "ΔU" as % of desired value in relation to the set band-
width "B" as % of desired value
1 "Delay time T1" parameter
Delay time T2

8 Operation

erance bandwidth.

change triggered.

8 Operation
Activate delay time T2
You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate the delay time T2.
8.3.4 Active power regulation (optional)

All of the parameters required for active power regulation are described in
this section.
Settings Parameters Active pow...ion
Name Value
Home
Desired value 0.0 MW
Bandwidth 0.0 MW
Delay time T1 40 s
Time response T1 Linear Events
Delay time T2 10 s
Information
Recorder
Figure 248: Active power regulation
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer regulator > Ac-

tive power regulation.
Desired value
You can use this parameter to set the desired value for active power regula-
tion.
Bandwidth
reactive power from the desired value.
Delay time T1

8 Operation

T1 has expired.
initiated.
Time response T1
You can use this parameter to set the time response for delay time T1. You
can select the following options:
▪ Linear time response
▪ Integral time response
Linear time response With linear time response, the device responds with a constant delay time
regardless of the control deviation.
Integral time response With integral time response, the device responds with a variable delay time
depending on the control deviation. The greater the control deviation (ΔU) in
relation to the set bandwidth (B), the shorter the delay time. This means that

8 Operation
the device responds faster to large voltage changes in the grid. Regulation
accuracy improves as a result but the frequency of tap-changes increases
too.
Figure 250: Diagram for integral time response
ΔU/B Control deviation "ΔU" as % of desired value in relation to the set band-
width "B" as % of desired value
1 "Delay time T1" parameter
Delay time T2


8 Operation

erance bandwidth.

change triggered.
Activate delay time T2
You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate the delay time T2.

8 Operation
8.3.5 Displaying control parameters

You can display an overview of the control parameters in the control param-
eters menu. You can select the parameters displayed to change their set-
tings.
Figure 252: Control parameters
1. Optional: Select the voltage regulator symbol on the main screen.

2. In the secondary navigation, select the Control parameters button.
8.3.6 Line drop compensation

You can use the compensation function to compensate for the load-depen-
dent voltage drop between the transformer and consumer. The device pro-
vides 2 methods of compensation for this purpose:
▪ R&X compensation
▪ Z compensation

8 Operation
8.3.6.1 R&X compensation
R&X compensation can compensate for voltage losses on the lines and
therefore ensure correct voltage at the load. This requires precise line data.
After you have entered all of the line data, the device automatically calcu-
lates the ohmic and inductive voltage drop and takes this into account for au-
tomatic voltage regulation.
U I
ULine-Drop
VT
UTr CT ULoad
R X
Figure 253: Equivalent circuit of R&X compensation
Figure 254: Phasor diagram of R&X compensation
To use R&X compensation, you have to enter the following line data:
▪ Ohmic resistance load in mΩ/m
▪ Inductive resistance load in mΩ/m
▪ Length of line in km

8 Operation
Settings Parameters Compensation
Name Value
Home
Compensation method R & X compensation
Ohmic resistance load 0.0 Ohm/m
Inductive resistance load 0.0 Ohm/m
Length of line 0.00 m Events
Voltage increase 0.0 %
Voltage limit value 0.0 %
Information
Recorder
Figure 255: Compensation
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer regulator > Com-

pensation.
Compensation method
You can use this parameter to set the compensation method.
Ohmic resistance load
You can use this parameter to set the ohmic resistance load.
Inductive resistance load
You can use this parameter to set the inductive resistance load.
Length of line
You can use this parameter to set the length of line.

8 Operation
8.3.6.2 Z compensation
To keep the voltage constant for the consumer, you can use Z compensation
to activate a current-dependent voltage increase. You can also define a limit
value to avoid excess voltage on the transformer.
ΔU%
ΔU% max
ΔU%
I
Figure 256: Z compensation
To use Z compensation, you need to calculate the voltage increase (ΔU) tak-
ing the current into account. Use the following formula for this purpose:
U Tr - U Load I N× kCT
ΔU = × × 100 %
U Load I
∆U Voltage increase I Load current in A
UTr Transformer voltage at current I IN Nominal current of current-trans-
former connection in A
ULoad Voltage on line end at current I kCT Current transformer transmission
and on-load tap-changer in ratio
same operating position
Sample calculation: UTr = 100.1 V, ULoad = 100.0 V, IN = 5 A kCT = 200 A/5 A,

I = 100 A
Produces a voltage increase ∆U of 0.2%

8 Operation
Settings Parameters Compensation
Name Value
Home
Compensation method R & X compensation
Ohmic resistance load 0.0 Ohm/m
Inductive resistance load 0.0 Ohm/m
Length of line 0.00 m Events
Voltage increase 0.0 %
Voltage limit value 0.0 %
Information
Recorder
Figure 257: Compensation
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer regulator > Com-

pensation.
Compensation method
You can use this parameter to set the compensation method.
Voltage increase
You can use this parameter to set the current-dependent voltage increase
∆U.
Voltage limit value
You can use this parameter to define the maximum permissible voltage in-
crease to avoid excess voltage on the transformer.
8.3.7 Parallel operation (optional)

Parallel transformer operation is used to increase the throughput capacity or
short-circuit capacity at one location. The device provides you with specific
functions for regulating transformers.
Conditions for parallel Compliance with the following general conditions is required for operating
operation transformers in parallel:
▪ Identical rated voltages
▪ Transformer power ratio (< 3 : 1)
▪ Maximum deviation of short-circuit voltages (UK) for transformers con-
nected in parallel < 10%

8 Operation
▪ Same number of switching groups

▪ For parallel operation with CAN communication: Current transformers with
the same rated values must be used for all devices operating in parallel
8.3.7.1 Parallel operation methods
You can undertake parallel operation with various parallel operation meth-
ods.
8.3.7.1.1 Tap synchronization
With the tap synchronization parallel operation method, one voltage regu-
lator works as the master and all others as followers.
T1 Master Follower T2
M AVR AVR M
Tap position
CAN bus
Figure 258: Tap synchronization
The master handles voltage regulation and transmits its current tap positions
to all followers via the CAN bus. The followers compare the tap position re-
ceived with their own tap position. If the tap position is not the same, the fol-
lowers switch to the tap position received from the master. This ensures that
the transformers operating in parallel are always in the same tap position.
You can set whether the master transfers the change in tap position to the
followers before or after its own tap-change operation. The devices then ei-
ther change position sequentially (first the master, then the followers) or in
synch (master and followers at the same time).
If there is a tap difference between the master and followers, the master re-
frains from issuing any control commands to the motor-drive unit until all of
the followers have reached the same tap position. If the tap difference per-
sists for longer than the set delay time for parallel operation error messages,
the master triggers the Step difference to follower event.
You can explicitly designate the voltage regulators as master and followers,
or set automatic designation using the CAN bus address.
For the tap synchronization parallel operation method, you have to set the
following parameters:

8 Operation
Parameter Auto Master Follower

Activating parallel opera- Yes
tion
Parallel operation method Auto. tap sync. Master Follower
CAN bus address Yes
Circulating reactive cur- Optional, if master/follower current blocking is active
rent blocking limit
Master/follower current Yes
blocking
Master/follower switching Yes
characteristics
Maximum tap difference Yes (if follower) No Yes
Error if no communication Yes
present
Behavior if no communi- Yes
cation present
Parallel operation error Yes
delay time
Table 126: Parameter
Parameter Auto Master Follower

Activate parallel operation Yes
Parallel operation method Auto. tap syn- Master Follower
chronization
CAN bus address Yes
Master/follower switching Yes
characteristics
Maximum tap difference Yes (if follower) No Yes
Error if no communication Yes
present
Behavior if no communi- Yes
cation present
Parallel operation error Yes
delay time
Table 127: Parameter

8 Operation
8.3.7.1.2 Circulating reactive current minimization with CAN bus communication
With the circulating reactive current parallel operation method, parallel op-
eration is carried out using the circulating reactive current minimization
method.
T1 T2
M AVR AVR M
U, I, cosφ
CAN bus
Figure 259: Circulating reactive current minimization with CAN bus communication
The circulating reactive current is calculated from the transformer currents

and their phase angles. The voltage regulators in the parallel operation
group share this information via CAN bus. An extra control deviation propor-
tional to circulating reactive current is added to the independently regulating
voltage regulators as a correction for the control deviation determined on the
basis of the measurement voltage. You can use the circulating reactive cur-
rent sensitivity parameter to decrease or increase this extra control devia-
tion.
The circulating reactive current method is suited to transformers connected

in parallel with a similar nominal output and short-circuit voltage UK and to
vector groups with the same and different step voltages. This does not re-
quire any information about the tap position.
Note that the following prerequisites must be met for the "circulating reactive
current minimization" parallel operation method:
▪ You have to use current transformers with the same rated values for all
transformers in parallel operation.
▪ If you wish to operate in parallel operation with existing devices, you have
to activate the Retrofit TAPCON® 2xx [►Section 8.2.8, Page 303] param-
eter.
For the circulating reactive current minimization parallel operation method

with CAN communication, you have to set the following parameters:
▪ Activate parallel operation
▪ Parallel operation method: Circulating reactive current
▪ CAN bus address
▪ Circulating reactive current sensitivity

8 Operation
▪ Circul. reactive current blocking limit

▪ Error if no communication present
▪ Behavior if no communication present
▪ Parallel operation error delay time
8.3.7.1.3 Circulating reactive current minimization without CAN bus

communication
With this method, you can operate several voltage regulators without a com-
munication connection (CAN bus) in parallel with circulating reactive current
minimization.
Desired cosφ Desired cosφ

T1 T2
M AVR AVR M
T1: U, I, (cosφ) T2: U, I, (cosφ)
U, I, (cosφ)
Figure 260: Circulating reactive current minimization without CAN bus communication
The circulating reactive current is calculated using the desired power factor
parameter, the desired load stress type parameter, and the measured trans-
former current. An extra control deviation proportional to circulating reactive
current is added to the independently regulating voltage regulators as a cor-
rection for the control deviation determined on the basis of the measurement
voltage. This extra control deviation depends on how much the measured
power factor deviates from the desired power factor.
To use the power factor method, you need to know the conditions of your
network in order to correctly set the device parameters.
The power factor method is suited to transformers connected in parallel with

a similar nominal output and short-circuit voltage UK and to vector groups
with the same and different step voltages. This does not require any informa-
tion about the tap position.

without CAN communication, you have to set the following parameters:
▪ Activating parallel operation
▪ Parallel operation method: Power factor
▪ Circulating reactive current blocking limit

8 Operation
▪ Desired power factor

▪ Desired load stress type
Note that the parameters "Error if no communication" and "Behavior if no

communication" have no function in the circulating reactive current mini-
mization without CAN communication parallel operation method.
8.3.7.1.4 Circulating reactive current minimization with measured circulating

reactive current (without CAN bus communication)
With the measured circulating reactive current parallel operation method,

parallel operation is carried out using the circulating reactive current mini-
mization method. The transformer circulating reactive current is measured
directly by the device using analog wiring. The devices do not communicate
via CAN bus.
T1 T2
M AVR AVR M
Ip Ip
T1: I Iu T2: I
PB#1 PB#2
U, I, (cosφ)
Figure 261: Parallel operation with circulating reactive current measurement via parallel assis-
tant (PB, paralleling balancer)
An extra control deviation proportional to circulating reactive current is added

to the self-regulating voltage regulators as a correction for the control devia-
tion determined due to the measured circulating reactive current.

with measured circulating reactive current, you have to set the following pa-
rameters:
▪ Activating parallel operation
▪ Parallel operation method: Measured circulating reactive current
▪ Circulating reactive current blocking limit
▪ Circulating reactive current measured input rated value
▪ Rotating the circulating reactive current prefix

8 Operation
8.3.7.2 Configuring parallel operation
In the Parallel operation menu item, you can set the parameters needed for
parallel transformer operation.
Settings Parameters Parallel...ion
Name Value
Home
Activating parallel operation On
Parallel operation method Master
CAN bus address 1
Circulating reactive current sens... 0.0 % Events
Circulating reactive current bloc... 20.0 %
Desired power factor 0.9
Desired load stress type Inductive
Master/follower current blocking Off Information
Maximum tap difference 1

Master/follower switching charact... Sequential
Error if no communication present No error
Recorder
Behavior if no communication pres... Independent regulation
Parallel operation error delay ti... 10 s
Figure 262: Parallel operation
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer regulator > Paral-

lel operation.
Activating parallel operation
You can use this parameter to activate parallel operation.
Setting parallel operation method
You can use this parameter to set the parallel operation method. You can
Option Description
Master The device is designated as Tap synchronization [►Sec-
the master. tion 8.3.7.1.1, Page 332]
parallel operation method
Follower The device is designated as
the follower.
Auto. tap sync. Automatic assignment of
master or follower.
If a master is not detected,
the device with the lowest
CAN bus address is auto-
matically designated as the
master. All other devices are
designated as followers.

8 Operation
Option Description
Circulat. react. current Circulating reactive current minimization with CAN bus
communication [►Section 8.3.7.1.2, Page 334] parallel op-
eration method
Power factor Circulating reactive current minimization without CAN bus
eration method
Table 128: Setting parallel operation method
Only change the parallel operation method when the on-load tap-changers
are not performing tap-change operations.
To select the parallel operation method, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Parallel operation > Parallel operation
method.
CAN bus address
You can use this parameter to assign a CAN bus address to the device. So
that all devices can communicate using the CAN bus, each device requires a
unique identifier. If the value is set to 0, then no communication takes place.
Circulating reactive current sensitivity
You can use this parameter to set the influence of circulating reactive current
on how the control deviation is calculated. The higher the set value, the
greater the calculated control deviation as a result of circulating reactive cur-
rent.
To determine the ideal circulating reactive current sensitivity, note the rele-
vant section in the Commissioning chapter.
Circulating reactive current blocking limit
You can use this parameter to set the limit value for the maximum permissi-
ble circulating reactive current. This value relates to the rated current of the
current transformer. If, during parallel operation, the circulating reactive cur-
rent exceeds the set limit value, the device triggers the Circulating reactive
current blocking limit exceeded event. All devices operating in the parallel
operation group are blocked.
Desired power factor
You can use this parameter to set the power factor, which the transformer
has under normal operating conditions. If the measured power factor devi-
ates from the desired one, the device calculates a correction which is added
to the control deviation.

8 Operation
Enter a desired power factor other than 0. If you enter a desired power fac-
tor of 0, the device is not able to calculate the voltage correction.
Desired load stress type
You can use this parameter to set the load stress type, which the trans-
former has under normal operating conditions.
You can determine the load stress type using the phase angle difference be-
tween voltage and current. You calculate the phase angle difference as fol-
lows:
Figure 263: Calculation of phase angle difference
φUI Phase angle difference between voltage and current

φU Phase angle of voltage
φI Phase angle of current
Depending on the calculated phase angle difference, you have to select the
following option:
▪ φUI > 0: Inductive
▪ φUI < 0: Capacitive
Master/follower current blocking
You can use this parameter to activate the circulating reactive current block-
ing limit for the tap synchronization parallel operation method. The device
thereby calculates and monitors the circulating reactive current in the same
manner as the parallel operation method for circulating reactive current mini-
mization, and provides you with the safety function of circulating reactive
current blocking. The Circulating reactive current blocking parameter is used
to set the limit value.

8 Operation
Master/follower switching characteristics
You can use this parameter to set the switching characteristics for the tap
synchronization parallel operation method.. You can select the following op-
tions:
▪ Sequentially: When a tap-change operation takes place, the master com-
municates its new tap position to the followers via the CAN bus as soon
as the master has completed its tap-change operation. The tap-change
operations of the master and followers thereby take place one after an-
other (sequentially).
▪ In sync: When a tap-change operation takes place, the master communi-
cates its new tap position to the followers via the CAN bus as the master
starts its tap-change operation. The tap-change operations of the master
and followers thereby take place at almost the same time (in synch).
Maximum tap difference
You can use this parameter to set the maximum permissible tap difference
between followers and master on the follower.
If the tap difference is greater than the set maximum tap difference to the
master, the follower blocks and no longer attempts to attain the master's tap
position. After the set delay time for parallel operation error messages has
elapsed, the follower issues the Permitted tap difference to master exceeded
message.
Error if no communication present
You can use this parameter to set whether it is an error if the device does
not receive any messages via the CAN bus or if there are no other CAN bus
participants in the same parallel operation group.
Behavior if no communication present
You can use this parameter to set how the voltage regulator behaves if com-
munication via the CAN bus is not possible.
The setting for this parameter is only effective if you have selected the Error
option for the Error if no communication present parameter.

8 Operation

Option Description
Independent regula- The device switches from parallel operation to normal auto-
tion matic voltage regulation
Auto blocking Automatic voltage regulation is blocked.
cosφ interpolation Continuation of parallel operation with interpolated values
(only possible with circulating reactive current parallel oper-
ation method)
Power factor Circulating reactive current minimization without CAN bus
eration method
Table 129: Behavior if no communication present
Parallel operation error delay time
You can use this parameter to set the delay time for a parallel operation er-
ror message so that brief fault messages are not received if the motor-drive
units involved in the parallel operation have different runtimes.
Circulating reactive current measured input rated value
With this parameter, you can set the rated value of the current input for
measuring the circulating reactive current. The set value corresponds 100%.
Swap circulating reactive current polarity
With the parameter, you can invert the sign of the circulating reactive cur-
rent.
8.3.7.3 Detecting parallel operation via group inputs (optional)
You can control up to 16 transformers connected in parallel in one or 2

groups without detecting the system topology.
The devices in parallel operation only use the information communicated by

devices in the same parallel operation group via CAN bus.
You can use the PARALLEL GROUP 1 and PARALLEL GROUP 2 inputs to
assign the device to a parallel operation group. If you create a signal at both
inputs, the device is assigned to both parallel operation groups.
If no parallel operation group is assigned to a device, it doesn't take part in

the parallel operation and undertakes its own voltage regulation.

8 Operation
8.3.7.4 Parallel operation
In the parallel operation menu, you can display information about the de-
vices that are connected by CAN bus.
Description
Parallel operation status:
▪ - = Independent mode
▪ = Parallel operation is active
▪ = Parallel operation error
CAN CAN bus address
Grp. Parallel operation group
Method Active parallel operation method
Position Current tap position
U Voltage
I_p Active current
I_q Reactive current
Block. Blocking:
▪ Gray: Parallel operation not blocked
▪ Red: Parallel operation blocked
Table 130: Information about parallel operation
Figure 264: Parallel operation
1. Go to Information > On-load tap-changer regulator > Parallel opera-

tion.
2. If necessary, select the Parameter button to display the parallel operation
settings for the device.
3. Select the desired parameter to change its setting.

8 Operation
8.3.7.5 Displaying measured circulating reactive current (optional)
You can display the measured circulating reactive current and the additional
voltage deviation resulting from it for voltage regulation.
Settings Parameters Measured c...ent
Name Value
Home
Apparent I at the measurement i... 22,531 mA
Reactive I polarity at the meas... -1
Calculated circulating reactive... -11,176 A
Correction for voltage regulation - Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 265: Measured circulating reactive current
► Go to Information > On-load tap-changer regulator > Measured circu-

lating reactive current values.
8.3.8 U bandwidth monitoring

The following limit values are monitored via bandwidth monitoring. The set
bandwidth [►Page 315] of the voltage regulation is used for this purpose.
▪ Upper bandwidth
▪ Lower bandwidth
▪ Hysteresis limit value: Specification as a percentage relative to the de-
sired voltage value.
Behavior If the measured value is higher than the upper limit or lower than the lower
limit, the device triggers the Upper bandwidth limit value / Lower bandwidth
limit value message.
The "Function monitoring" function is used to detect long periods when val-
ues are above or below the bandwidth. Long periods when values are above
or below the bandwidth indicate a problem with the device function because
the device is not able to correct the control deviation.
If the value is above or below the set bandwidth [►Page 315], the Function
monitoring event is displayed after the set delay time for function monitoring
has elapsed. The event is automatically acknowledged as soon as the mea-
sured value is back within the set bandwidth.

8 Operation
The following parameters are available for setting function monitoring:

▪ Hysteresis
▪ Delay time
Settings Parameters U bandwidt...ing
Name Value
Home
Function monitoring Auto and Manual
Hysteresis 0.0 %
Delay time 15 min
Lower bandwidth hysteresis 0.1 % Events
Lower bandwidth delay time 2 s
Upper bandwidth hysteresis 0.1 %
Upper bandwidth delay time 2 s
Information
Recorder
Figure 266: U bandwidth monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer regulator > U

bandwidth monitoring.
Function monitoring
You can use this parameter to activate function monitoring. You can select
Setting Behavior
Off Function monitoring is deactivated.
Only Auto Function monitoring is only active in AVR AUTO oper-
ating mode.
Auto and Manual Function monitoring is active in AVR AUTO and AVR
MANUAL operating modes
Table 131: Activate function monitoring
Hysteresis

8 Operation
Delay time
8.3.9 Q bandwidth monitoring (optional)

The following limit values are monitored via bandwidth monitoring. The set
bandwidth [►Page 315] for reactive power regulation is used for this pur-
pose.
▪ Upper bandwidth
▪ Lower bandwidth

▪ Hysteresis
▪ Delay time

8 Operation
Settings Parameters U bandwidt...ing
Name Value
Home
Hysteresis 0.0 %
Delay time 15 min
Lower bandwidth hysteresis 0.1 % Events
Upper bandwidth hysteresis 0.1 %
Information
Recorder
Figure 267: Q bandwidth monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer regulator > Q

Function monitoring
Setting Behavior
ating mode.
Hysteresis
Delay time

8 Operation
8.3.10 P bandwidth monitoring (optional)

The following limit values are monitored via bandwidth monitoring. The
bandwidth [►Page 315] set for active power regulation is used for this pur-
pose.
▪ Upper bandwidth
▪ Lower bandwidth

▪ Hysteresis
▪ Delay time
Settings Parameters P bandwidt...ing
Name Value
Home
Hysteresis 0.0 MW
Delay time 15 min
Lower bandwidth hysteresis 0.0 MW Events
Upper bandwidth hysteresis 0.0 MW
Information
Recorder
Figure 268: P bandwidth monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer regulator > P


8 Operation

Function monitoring
Setting Behavior
ating mode.
Hysteresis
Delay time

8 Operation
8.4 Active part
8.4.1 Asset intelligence

The Asset intelligence function is used to diagnose possible transformer
states with the aide of a statistical model using the data from the sensors
that are connected to the device. This is to simplify interpreting the recorded
measured values and the event messages occurring.
The more sensors there are connected to the transformer and connected to
the device, the more precisely the device can perform the diagnosis. If the
device only has access to a few sensors, not all states can be displayed.
The device display shows the following information for the selected states:
▪ The determined probability that a state has arisen.
▪ Description of the state.
▪ Possible effects on the transformer and further possibilities for determin-
ing the cause.
▪ Measurements from the sensors that led to the determined probability
value.
Note that the diagnosis is based on a statistical model that cannot evaluate
local particularities, the history of the transformer or states that are rare and
difficult to diagnose. In the event of doubts, consult a transformer expert to
prevent damage to the transformer.
Figure 269: Asset intelligence
1. Go to Information > System > Asset intelligence.

2. Select the desired diagnosis to display further information

8 Operation
8.4.2 Temperature monitoring

-30.0 °C
-20.0 °C
100.0 °C
95.0 °C
You can set different limit values for every measured/calculated temperature
. If the measured temperature is greater than limit value > or >>, the device
triggers an event message. If the measured temperature is less than limit
value < or <<, the device triggers an event message.
Settings Parameters Temperat...ing
<< < > >>

Home
Hot-spot - - 117.0 °C 122.0 °C
Top oil -25.0 °C -20.0 °C 90.0 °C 105.0 °C
Ambient -30.0 °C -20.0 °C 50.0 °C 60.0 °C Events
Bottom oil -25.0 °C -20.0 °C 90.0 °C 105.0 °C
OLTC -25.0 °C -20.0 °C 100.0 °C 110.0 °C
GP 1 -30.0 °C -20.0 °C 95.0 °C 100.0 °C

Information
GP 2 -30.0 °C -20.0 °C 95.0 °C 100.0 °C
GP 3 -30.0 °C -20.0 °C 95.0 °C 100.0 °C

Recorder
GP 4 -30.0 °C -20.0 °C 95.0 °C 100.0 °C
Figure 270: Temperature monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Temperature monitoring.

8.4.3 Displaying temperature curve (optional)

You can display the temporal progression of the temperatures measured
over the last 10 days.
Figure 271: Temperature curve

8 Operation
► Go to Information > Active part > Temperatures.
8.4.4 Setting Tx statistics monitoring

You can set 2 limit values each for the calculated loss-of-life of the trans-
former: If the calculated loss-of-life is greater than the limit value, the device
triggers an event.
Settings Parameters Tx stati...ing
> >>
Home
Relative aging rate 1.5 1.6
Loss-of-life 95.0 % 100.0 %
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 272: Tx statistics monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Active part > Tx statistics monitoring.

Relative loss-of-life >/>>
With these parameters you can set the limit values for the relative loss-of-life
of the transformer.
Loss of life >/>>
You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the loss-of-life of the
transformer.

8 Operation
8.4.5 Displaying winding temperatures (optional)

If you record the winding temperatures with a sensor, you can display the
temporal progression of the measured winding temperatures over the last 10
days. To do so, proceed as follows:
Figure 273: Winding temperature
► Go to Information > Active part > Winding temperature 1-12/13-24.
As an option, you can also display the measured value trend over a time pe-
riod that you define (max. the last 10 days). You will find more information on
this in the section "Measured value recorder".
8.4.6 Hot-spot calculation (optional)

You can set the parameters for the hot-spot calculation in the Hot-spot
menu. If you use the device in the version with a winding temperature sen-
sor, then you can also select whether the hot-spot is to be measured or cal-
culated.
Hot-spot measurement
Hot-spot measurement requires that you connect [►Section 8.1.14, Page

218] a sensor for recording the winding temperature to the device via an MR
sensor bus and link [►Section 8.1.15, Page 228] the transmitted data points
to the function of the analog input (winding temperature 1...24).

8 Operation
Hot-spot calculation
The device can calculate the hot-spot in accordance with the thermal models
of the standards IEC 60076-7 and IEEE Std C57.91. To enable this, you
must set the calculation parameters.
Figure 274: Hot-spot calculation

(W1, W2, W3)", you must set the parameters "IEC: Gradient", "IEEE: Gradi-
ent", "IEC: Hot-spot factor" and "Nominal current" for W1, W2 and W3 re-
spectively.
If you are using a cooling system, you also need to enter the calculation pa-
rameters for each cooling stage in the menu under "CS x hot-spot".
If you are to control a cooling system with the optional Frequency-based

cooling system control [►Section 8.7.7, Page 437] function, you must set
the calculation parameters for both the minimum fan speed and the maxi-
mum fan speed. The device interpolates the values of the parameters be-
tween the two operating points.
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Active part > Hot-spot.


8 Operation
Hot-spot determination
You can use this parameter to set how the device is to determine the hot-
spot temperature. You can select the following options:
▪ Hot-spot measurement
▪ Hot-spot calculation
Calculation method
You can use this parameter to set which method the device is to use to cal-
culate the hot-spot temperature:
▪ IEC 60076-7
▪ IEEE Std C57.91
Depending on the calculation method, you have to set various additional cal-
culation parameters.
IEC: hot-spot factor
You can use this parameter to set the hot-spot factor for calculating the hot-
spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7.
IEC: gradient
You can use this parameter to set the gradients for calculating the hot-spot
temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7.
IEC: winding exponent
You can use this parameter to set the winding exponents for calculating the
hot-spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7.
IEC: oil time constant
You can use this parameter to set the oil time constant for calculating the
hot-spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7.
IEC: k21
You can use this parameter to set the thermal model constant k21 for calcu-
lating the hot-spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7.
IEC: k22
You can use this parameter to set the thermal model constant k22 for calcu-
lating the hot-spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7.
IEEE: gradient
You can use this parameter to set the gradients for calculating the hot-spot
temperature in accordance with IEEE Std C57.91.

8 Operation
IEEE: exponent
You can use this parameter to set the exponents for calculating the hot-spot
temperature in accordance with IEEE Std C57.91.
Nominal current
You can use this parameter to set the nominal current of the transformer for
calculating the hot-spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7 or
IEEE Std C57.91.
Winding time constant
You can use this parameter to set the winding time constant for calculating
the hot-spot temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7 or
IEEE Std C57.91.
IEEE: Oil exponent
You can use this parameter to set the oil exponent of the transformer in ac-
cordance with IEEE Std C57.91.
Rated power of the transformer
You can use this parameter to set the rated power of the transformer. This
parameter is used for calculating the actual power based on the determined
load factor.
Increase of the upper oil temperature
You can use this parameter to set the increase of the upper oil temperature
above ambient temperature (at rated load). The value to be set depends on
the design of your transformer.
Increase of the hot-spot temperature
You can use this parameter to set the increase of the hot-spot temperature
above ambient temperature in accordance with IEEE Std C57.91. The value
to be set depends on the design of your transformer.
Ratio of the evaluated power loss
You can use this parameter to set the ratio of the power losses at rated cur-
rent to the idling losses of the transformer. The value to be set depends on
the design of your transformer.

8 Operation
8.4.7 Hot-spot forecast (optional)

You can use the optional hot-spot forecast to calculate the hot-spot tempera-
ture based on load profile and ambient temperature for a 24-hour time pe-
riod. The calculation can either be made in accordance with IEC 60076-7 or
IEEE Std C57.91 (Clause 7 model). The diagram also shows you the load
factor and the relative aging rate of the transformer.
Figure 275: Hot-spot forecast
For the hot-spot forecast calculation, you must enter the desired values for
load factor and ambient temperature for every hour. The device uses the
currently measured values as the starting values. The remaining values are
pre-populated with the measured values from the previous day. If no mea-
sured values are available, the device uses the factory setting.
If you call up the visualization using a PC, you can export the calculated val-
ues as a csv file.
To be able to use the hot-spot forecast, you must first set the parameters for
the following functions:
▪ Hot-spot calculation [►Section 8.4.6, Page 352]
▪ Dynamic Transformer Rating [►Section 8.4.9.1, Page 359]
1. Go to Information > Active part > Forecast values.
2. Enter the desired values for ambient temperature and load factor.
3. Press the Start calculation button.
ð The diagram appears.
4. Optional: Press to save the calculated values as a csv file.
5. If required, press Adjust values to make changes to the entered values.

8 Operation
8.4.8 Setting calculation of transformer's loss of life (optional)

In order to calculate the transformer's loss-of-life, you need to set the follow-
ing parameters.
Figure 276: Relative loss-of-life
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Active part > Rel. loss-of-life.

IEC: Insulating paper
You can use this parameter to set whether the transformer is equipped with
thermally stabilized insulation paper or not. This parameter is used to calcu-
late the relative aging rate and is only relevant if you calculate the hot-spot
temperature in accordance with IEC 60076-7.
Transformer age
You can use this parameter to set the current age of the transformer in
years. This parameter is used to calculate the loss of life.
Transformer purchase price
This parameter can be used to set the purchase price of the transformer.
Anticipated service life
You can use this parameter to set the anticipated service life of the trans-
former in years. This parameter is used to calculate the loss of life.

8 Operation
8.4.9 Dynamic Transformer Rating (optional)
NOTICE Damage to the transformer!

An impermissibly strong or long overload can irreversibly damage the trans-
former's insulation system. This can lead to increased gas formation and
could cause the transformer to fail. Note that the permitted overload is cal-
culated based on a thermal model in accordance with IEEE Std C57.91 or
IEC 60076-7 and, as a result, deviations in the transformer's thermal model
can occur.
► Ensure that the transformer's protective devices and equipment are func-
tional.
► During overload operation, also monitor the measured values for temper-
ature, power and gas content.
We recommend determining the design-specific parameters of the trans-

former using a heat test in order to improve the forecast calculation of the
thermal model.
You can use the optional Dynamic Transformer Rating function (DTR) to de-
termine the theoretical overload capacity of the transformer and the loss-of-
life caused by it. The value can either be calculated in accordance with the
IEEE Std C57.91 or IEC 60076-7 calculation model.
Two operating modes are distinguished for the Dynamic Transformer Rating.
You can set the limit values for both operating modes:
Emergency mode
In emergency mode, unplanned malfunctions or failures occur in the grid

which require the transformer to take on an increased load. Emergency
mode helps support the grid in this process without damaging the equipment
or triggering protection systems.
Insulation-friendly mode
In insulation-friendly mode, you must adjust the limit values for temperatures
and for the maximum permitted aging for 24 hours depending on the
planned duration of use of the transformer. This allows you to ensure a
longer service life for the transformer.
Measurement uncertainties
To calculate the permissible overload, the moisture in oil value of the trans-
former is recorded in addition to the measured temperature of the uppermost
oil layer and the calculated hot-spot temperature. The bubbling temperature
is calculated from the moisture in oil value.
The calculation of the bubbling temperature is only sufficiently accurate if the

transformer was in operation for a time period longer than 60 days and
loaded evenly.

8 Operation
If your transformer has been out of operation for a long time and in operation
for less than 60 days, or if your transformer is subject to large load devia-
tions, the device cannot calculate the permissible load precisely.
8.4.9.1 Configuring the Dynamic Transformer Rating
To calculate the overload capability of the transformer, the following parame-

ters must be set.
Before you can use this function, you must set the parameters in the "Hot-
spot" [►Section 8.4.6, Page 352] menu item.
Figure 277: Dynamic Transformer Rating
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Active part > Dynamic Transformer

Rating (DTR).
Calculation method
You can use this parameter to set the method for calculating the overload.
▪ IEC 60076-7
▪ IEEE Std C57.91
Rated power of the transformer
You can use this parameter to set the rated power of the transformer. This
parameter is used for calculating the actual power based on the determined
load factor.

8 Operation
Emergency mode max. hot-spot temperature
You can use this parameter to set the limit for the maximum hot-spot temper-
ature of the transformer for emergency mode.
IFM: max. hot-spot temperature
You can use this parameter to set the limit for the maximum permissible hot-
spot temperature of the transformer for insulation-friendly mode (IFM).
Emergency mode max. top-oil temperature
You can use this parameter to set the limit for the maximum temperature of
the transformer top-oil for emergency mode.
IFM: max. top-oil temperature
You can use this parameter to set the limit for the maximum permitted tem-
perature of the transformer top-oil for insulation-friendly mode (IFM).
IFM: max. relative aging rate
You can use this parameter to set the limit for the maximum permitted loss-
of-life of the transformer for 24 hours for insulation-friendly mode (IFM).
Emergency mode max. load factor
You can use this parameter to set the limit for the maximum load factor K of
the transformer for emergency mode.
IFM: max. load factor
You can use this parameter to set the customer-specific limit for the maxi-
mum permitted load factor of the transformer for insulation-friendly
mode(IFM).
IFM: Activating/Deactivating the relative aging rate limit
You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate the limit for the maxi-
mum permitted loss-of-life of the transformer for 24 hours for insulation-
friendly mode (IFM).
8.4.9.2 Displaying the Dynamic Transformer Rating
You can display the calculated values for insulation-friendly mode and the
maximum possible load factor of the transformer in a tabular display or as a
diagram. Based on the latest transformer measured values and the set limit
values, the Dynamic Transformer Rating (DTR) function calculates the maxi-
mum remaining time and the maximum possible load factors for specified
times.

8 Operation
DTR table
The following values are displayed in this menu:

▪ Current load factor K [%]
▪ Remaining time [min], depending on the current load factor for emergency
mode
▪ Remaining time [min], depending on the current load factor for insulation-
friendly mode at > 24 h (IFM)
▪ Maximum possible load factor for different times (IFM); see overview:
Column Meaning
Time Overload duration
Load factor K [%] Calculated load factor K in %.
Displays the permissible load factor for the corre-
sponding overload duration.
Power [MVA] Displays the permissible transformer apparent power
for the corresponding overload duration. This value is
calculated from the rated power and the load factor K.
Limit Displays the limit value reached first if the transformer
is overloaded with the recommended load factor K for
the corresponding overload duration.
Rel. LOL [%] Relative aging rate of the transformer in %.
Overload refers to the service life of the trans-

former. Calculation is based on the set parameter
"Anticipated service life" [►Page 357].
Table 134: Overload overview
Figure 278: Overload table
► Go to Information > Active part > Dynamic Transformer Rating (DTR).

8 Operation
DTR diagram
In this menu, you can display the calculated values graphically. For the se-
lected overload period, the diagram shows the permissible load factor K and
the forecast progression of the temperatures (hot-spot, top-oil) as well as the
associated limit values. Furthermore, the diagram shows the progression of
the forecast loss-of-life and the ambient temperature at the time of the calcu-
lation.
If you call up the visualization via a PC and your user role is either "Diagnos-
tics", "Parameter Configurator" or "Administrator", you can export the DTR
diagram data values as a csv file.
Figure 279: DTR diagram
1. Go to Information > Active part > DTR diagram.

2. Select the desired Overload period.
3. If necessary, select the Update button to update the view.
4. If required, select the button to export the overload diagram data.
8.4.10 Dissolved gas analysis (optional)

You can use the optional function "Dissolved gas analysis" (DGA) to monitor
the gas content and the moisture in the transformer oil. Depending on the
device configuration, the device records the measured values from the sen-
sors either as analog signals (4...20 mA) or MR sensor bus. For the configu-
ration of the sensors, refer to sections "Configuring analog inputs and out-
puts" [►Section 8.1.15, Page 228] and "MR sensor bus" [►Section 8.1.14,
Page 218].
The values determined and calculated using the function "Dissolved gas
analysis" can exhibit measuring inaccuracies that arise from the measuring
inaccuracies of the sensors. Therefore, refer to the sensor operating instruc-
tions for further information on the measuring accuracy and any necessary
calibration.

8 Operation
Depending on the device configuration, the dissolved gas analysis includes

the following sub-functions:
▪ Display of the absolute values
▪ Display of the rates of increase
▪ Display of the measured value trend
▪ Additional, as an option:
– Duval analysis
– Rogers analysis
– Dörnenburg analysis
– IEC 60599 analysis
8.4.10.1 Configuring DGA monitoring
For the DGA monitoring "DGA", you can set 3 limit values for the absolute
values and for the rates of increase. Depending on the device configuration,
you can monitor up to 11 DGA signals.
Settings Parameters DGA monitoring
Name Value
Home
Sensor measuring accuracy 15.0 %
Reset diagnostic error memory Off
Rates of increase evaluation in... 7 days
Nitrogen measurement method Sensor Events
C2H2 > 1.0 ppm
C2H2 >> 10.0 ppm
C2H2 >>> 35.0 ppm
C2H4 > 50.0 ppm Information
C2H4 >> 100.0 ppm

C2H4 >>> 200.0 ppm
C2H6 > 65.0 ppm
Recorder
C2H6 >> 100.0 ppm
C2H6 >>> 150.0 ppm
Figure 280: Configuring DGA monitoring
To set the DGA monitoring, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Active part > DGA monitoring.
Sensor measuring accuracy
You can use this parameter to enter the sensor measuring accuracy as a
percentage value. When doing so, refer to the sensor operating instructions.

8 Operation
Reset diagnostic errors
You can use this parameter to reset the recorded diagnostic errors for all
dissolved gas analyses. This can be useful after a transformer oil change,
for example.
Rates of increase evaluation interval
You can use this parameter to set the interval for the rate of increase which
is used as the basis for the limit value consideration.
Relative moisture in oil default value
You can use this parameter to enter a value for the transformer moisture in
oil (e.g. from the last oil analysis). This value can be used as a replacement
value if the transformer is not equipped with a sensor for measuring the
moisture in oil, or if the sensor is defective.
Use relative moisture in oil default value
You can use this parameter to activate the replacement value for the relative
moisture in oil. The device will then use the replacement value in all calcula-
tions that use the transformer moisture in oil level. Be aware that these cal-
culations may be less accurate when you use the replacement value and
that the replacement value deviates from the actual value of the transformer
moisture in oil.
Nitrogen measurement method
You can use this parameter to select how the device is to determine the
amount of nitrogen.
▪ Sensor: The device uses the measured value for nitrogen that the DGA
sensor sends to the device.
▪ Calculation: The device calculates the proportion of nitrogen based on the
available measured values from the DGA sensor using a mathematical
model.
Limit values for absolute values

Gas Parameter
Limit 1 Limit 2 Limit 3
H2O (%) H2O> H2O>> H2O>>>
H2 (ppm) H2> H2>> H2>>>
N2 (ppm) N2< N2<< N2<<<
CO (ppm) CO> CO>> CO>>>
CO2 (ppm) CO2> CO2>> CO2>>>
CH4 (ppm) CH4> CH4>> CH4>>>
C2H2 (ppm) C2H2> C2H2>> C2H2>>>

8 Operation
Gas Parameter
C2H4 (ppm) C2H4> C2H4>> C2H4>>>
C2H6 (ppm) C2H6> C2H6>> C2H6>>>
O2 (ppm) O2< O2<< O2<<<
TDCG (ppm) TDCG> TDCG>> TDCG>>>
Table 135: Limit values for the absolute values
Limit values for rates of increase

Gas Parameter
H2O (%/d) H2O rate of in- H2O rate of in- H2O rate of in-
crease> crease>> crease>>>
H2 (ppm/d) H2 rate of increase> H2 rate of in- H2 rate of in-
crease>> crease>>>
N2 (ppm/d) N2 rate of increase< N2 rate of in- N2 rate of in-
crease<< crease<<<
CO (ppm/d) CO rate of in- CO rate of in- CO rate of in-
CO2 (ppm/d) CO2 rate of in- CO2 rate of in- CO2 rate of in-
CH4 (ppm/d) CH4 rate of in- CH4 rate of in- CH4 rate of in-
C2H2 (ppm/d) C2H2 rate of in- C2H2 rate of in- C2H2 rate of in-
O2 (ppm/d) O2 rate of in- O2 rate of in- O2 rate of in-
crease< crease<< crease<<<
TDCG (ppm/d) TDCG rate of in- TDCG rate of in- TDCG rate of in-
Table 136: Limit values for the rates of increase

8 Operation
8.4.10.2 Displaying measured values
The overview screen displays the current status of the dissolved gas analy-
sis.
Figure 281: Overview screen
Depending on the analysis method, the following status values are dis-
played:
Value Description
Gray Limit value not exceeded
Yellow Yellow limit exceeded
Red Red limit exceeded
Table 137: Status values for absolute values and rates of increase
Value Description Duv. Rog. Dörn. IEC

-- Analysis not possible + + + +
N Normal operation - + - -
D1 Discharge of low energy + + - +
D2 Discharge of high energy + + + +
D1/D2 Discharge of low/high energy - - - +
T1 Thermal fault <300 °C + + - +
T2 Thermal fault 300...700 °C + + - +
T3 Thermal fault >700 °C + + - +
PD Partial discharge + - + +
TD Mixed thermal/electrical fault + - - -
T1-T3 Thermal decomposition - - + -
Table 138: Status values for the Duval, Rogers, Dörnenburg and IEC 60599 analyses

8 Operation
For the Duval, Rogers, Dörnenburg and IEC 60599 analyses, the values
measured by the sensor have to exceed the following detection limits. If the
measured values are less than the detection limit, the device will use the de-
tection limit value for the calculation.
Gas Detection limit
H2 50 ppm
CH4 10 ppm
C 2H 2 10 ppm
C 2H 4 10 ppm
C 2H 6 10 ppm
Table 139: Detection limits
8.4.10.2.1 Absolute values
You can display the current absolute measured values of the sensors. Fur-
thermore, a bar chart shows a graphical representation of the measured
value and the set limit values (yellow, red).
Figure 282: Display of absolute values
► Go to Information > Active part > DGA > Absolute values.

8 Operation
8.4.10.2.2 Rates of increase
You can display the calculated rates of increase of the gases (ppm/d and
ppm/y). The bar chart shows a graphical representation of the actual rate of
increase (ppm/d) and the set limit values (yellow, red). The set evaluation in-
terval is the decisive factor for the display of rates of increase.
Figure 283: Displaying the rates of increase
► Go to Information > Active part > DGA > Rates of increase.
8.4.10.2.3 Measured value trend
You can display the temporal progression of the measured DGA measure-
ments over the last 10 days. To do so, proceed as follows:
Figure 284: DGA measured value trend
► Go to Information > Active part > DGA > Graph.

8 Operation
You can also display the DGA measured value trend over a time period that
you define. You will find more information on this in the section "Measured
value recorder".
8.4.10.2.4 Duval analysis
The display of the Duval analysis shows the following information:

▪ Duval triangle, with the allocation of the last 10 measured values in the ar-
eas of the various error types.
– Latest measured value: Darkest area with a display of the measure-
ment error.
– Earliest measured value: Lightest area
▪ Display of the error types. The error type of the latest measured value is
highlighted in white.
▪ Gas concentrations of the latest measured value
If you call up the visualization using a PC, the gas concentrations and the
time of the measurement are displayed for each measured value via tooltip.
Figure 285: Display of the Duval analysis
► Go to Information > Active part > DGA > Duval.
8.4.10.2.5 Rogers analysis
The display of the Rogers analysis shows the following information:

▪ 3D diagram, with the allocation of the last 10 measured values in the ar-
ment error.

8 Operation
▪ Proportion of the gas concentrations of the latest measured value
If you call up the visualization using a PC, the proportions of the gas concen-
trations and the time of the measurement are displayed for each measured
value via tooltip. Furthermore, you can rotate the diagram using the mouse.
Figure 286: Display of the Rogers analysis
► Go to Information > Active part > DGA > Rogers.
8.4.10.2.6 Dörnenburg analysis
The display of the Dörnenburg analysis shows the following information:

▪ Tabular display of the latest 10 errors

8 Operation
trations are displayed for each measured value via tooltip.
Figure 287: Display of the Dörnenburg analysis
► Go to Information > Active part > DGA > Dörnenburg.
8.4.10.2.7 IEC 60599 analysis
The display of the IEC 60599 analysis shows the following information:

▪ 3D diagram, with the allocation of the last 10 measured values in the ar-
ment error.

8 Operation
trations and the time of the measurement are displayed for each measured
value via tooltip. Furthermore, you can rotate the diagram using the mouse.
Figure 288: Display of the IEC 60599 analysis
► Go to Information > Active part > DGA > IEC 60599.
8.4.11 Monitoring the gas volume of the Buchholz relay (transformer)

When you record the gas volume of the Buchholz relay of the transformer,
you can set 2 limit values for the gas volume. If the measured gas volume is
greater than the limit value > or >>, the device triggers an event message.
Settings Parameters Buchholz relay
> >>
Home
Transformer gas volume 0.3 l 0.4 l
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 289: Limit values for the gas volume of the Buchholz relay of the transformer
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Active part > Buchholz relay.


8 Operation
8.4.12 Monitoring the oil pressure (transformer)

When you record the oil pressure of the transformer, you can use the pres-
sure relief device (PRD) to set 2 limit values for the gas volume. If the mea-
sured oil pressure is greater than the limit value > or >>, the device triggers
an event message.
Settings Parameters Pressure...ice
> >>
Home
Transformer oil press. 15 kPa 20 kPa
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 290: Limit values for the oil pressure of the transformer
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Active part > Pressure relief device.

8 Operation
8.5 On-load tap-changer
8.5.1 Tap position monitoring (optional)

You can set 2 limit values for tap position monitoring:
▪ Pos<
▪ Pos>
You can set the following parameters for each limit value.
▪ Behavior limit value
Settings Parameters Tap posi...ing
Name Value
Home
Number of tap-change operations 775571
Pos< 1
Pos< delay time 0.0 s
Pos< behavior Off Events
Pos> 26
Pos> delay time 0.0 s
Pos> behavior Off
Information
Recorder
Figure 291: Tap position monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > Tap position

monitoring.
Delay time

8 Operation
Behavior limit value
You can use this parameter to set the behavior of the device when the event
message is issued. You can select the following options:
Setting Behavior
Off Tap position monitoring is disabled.
Auto blocking po- The automatic control does not perform a tap-change operation
sition+ in the direction of a higher tap position (position+).
You can still perform a tap-change operation in the direction of
a higher tap position (position+) in manual mode.
Auto blocking po- The automatic control does not perform a tap-change operation
sition- in the direction of a lower tap position (position-).
You can still perform a tap-change operation in the direction of
a lower tap position (position-) in manual mode.
Auto/manual The automatic control does not perform a tap-change operation
blocking position+ in the direction of a higher tap position (position+).
You cannot perform a tap-change operation in the direction of a
higher tap position (position+) in manual mode.
Auto/manual The automatic control does not perform a tap-change operation
blocking position- in the direction of a lower tap position (position-).
You cannot perform a tap-change operation in the direction of a
lower tap position (position-) in manual mode.
Operations counter
The device's operations counter is automatically increased with every tap-

change operation. You can use this parameter to set the number of tap-
change operations, such as for a comparison with the operations counter of
8.5.2 Switching interval monitoring

You can use this function to monitor the typical tap-change behavior of your
transformer. Furthermore, you can set the number of consecutive tap-
change operations permissible in auto mode within a defined time period.
You can have the following operations monitored:

▪ Total operations: Total RAISE operations and LOWER operations
▪ LOWER operations: Total LOWER operations
▪ RAISE operations: Total RAISE operations

8 Operation
Settings Parameters Total sw...ing
Total Lower Raise

Home
Total No. ops 25 10 10
Time interval 1440.0 min 5.0 min 5.0 min
Event duration 1.0 min 15.0 min 15.0 min Events
Response Auto blockin... Auto block. ... Auto block. ...
Count behavior - Off On

Information
Recorder
Figure 292: Switching interval monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > Switching inter-

val monitoring.
Total tap-change operations
If the maximum permissible number of tap-change operations within the set

time interval is exceeded, the device triggers a corresponding response.
Time interval
You can use this parameter to set the time interval in which the maximum
number of tap-change operations may not be exceeded.
Event duration
You can use this parameter to set how long the device is to respond with the
set behavior.

8 Operation
Behavior
You can use this parameter to set the behavior of the device if the maximum
permissible number of tap-change operations is exceeded:
Setting Behavior
Off Switching interval monitoring is disabled.
Switching to man- The event is displayed for the set duration of the response. The
ual mode device automatically switches to manual mode.
Auto blocking The event is displayed for the set duration of the response. Au-
tomatic voltage regulation is blocked. You can wait for the
blocking time to expire or switch to manual mode by hand and
then to auto mode. The event is reset and blocking is disabled.
Table 140: Behavior
Counting behavior (only with raise or lower tap-change operations)
You can use this parameter to set whether intermediate RAISE or LOWER
tap-change operations reset the internal counter. You can select the follow-
ing options:
▪ On:
– The internal counter for consecutive LOWER tap-change operations is
reset during a RAISE operation.
– The internal counter for consecutive RAISE tap-change operations is
reset during a LOWER operation.
▪ Off: The internal counter is not reset by intermediate RAISE or LOWER
tap-change operations.
8.5.3 Switching interval monitoring

You can use this function to monitor the typical tap-change behavior of your
transformer.
Time interval
You can use this parameter to set the time interval in which the maximum
number of tap-change operations may not be exceeded.
Maximum permissible number of tap-change operations
If the maximum permissible number of tap-change operations within the set

time interval is exceeded, the device triggers an event.

8 Operation
Behavior
You can use this parameter to set the behavior of the device if the maximum
permissible number of tap-change operations is exceeded:
Setting Behavior
Off Switching interval monitoring is disabled.
On Switching interval monitoring is activated.
Table 141: Behavior
Setting switching interval monitoring
To set switching interval monitoring, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > Switching inter-
val monitoring.
8.5.4 Target-tap-position operation

When target-tap-position operation is activated, the device automatically
switches to this target tap position.
Settings Parameters Move to ...ion
Name Value
Home
Target tap position 0
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 293: Move to the defined target tap position
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > Move to the de-
fined target tap position.

8 Operation
Target tap position
You can use this parameter to define a target tap position.
8.5.5 Changing tap position designation (optional)

This function allows you edit the designation of the tap position. The desig-
nations are displayed on the main screen when each of the tap positions is
active and are used for the control system.
Settings Tap position table
Raw value Tap position Control system Home

1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
Events
4 4 1
5 5 2
6 6 1
7 7 3 Information
8 8 4
9 9 5
10 10 6 Recorder
Cancel Accept
Figure 294: Tap position table
1. Go to Settings > Tap position table.

2. Enter the designation for the tap position and for the control system.
3. Click on the Accept button.
8.5.6 Setting the tap position message (optional)

If you issue the tap position of the on-load tap-changer via an analog output
or digital outputs (BCD, gray, etc.), you can set whether the device is to use
the raw value or the adjusted value for the control system in accordance with
the tap position table [►Section 8.5.5, Page 379]. You can use this setting to
ensure that pass-through positions of the on-load tap-changer are not re-
ported as a separate tap position.

8 Operation
If you issue the tap position via several outputs, you can set this behavior for
each output separately.
Settings Parameters OLTC data
Name Value
Home
Tap position message (analog) Raw value
Tap position message (analog) 2 Raw value
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 295: OLTC data (example with 3x tap position message via analog outputs)
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > OLTC data.

Tap position message (analog)
You can use this parameter to set which range of values from the tap posi-
tion table the device should use for the tap position message using the ana-
log output.
If you change this parameter, you must then ensure that the configured ana-
log output value range [►Section 8.1.15, Page 228] matches the value
range in the tap position table [►Section 8.5.5, Page 379]. Otherwise, the
tap position will not be reported correctly.
BCD tap position message
tion table the device is to use for the tap position message via digital outputs
(BCD).
Gray code tap position message
(gray code).

8 Operation
Dual code tap position message
(dual code).
Decimal tap position message
(decimal coding).
8.5.7 Displaying tap-change operation statistics (optional)

In the switching statistics view, you can display how often the on-load tap-
changer has been switched to a particular tap position and how long it has
remained in a particular tap position.
The top diagram shows how often the on-load tap-changer was switched
into a particular tap position and how long it spent there. The bottom dia-
gram shows the time spent in the tap positions over the last 10 days.
Figure 296: Tap-change operation statistics
► Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > Tap-change operation sta-

tistics.
8.5.8 Displaying information about contact wear (only OILTAP®)

If you are monitoring an on-load tap-changer of type OILTAP®, you can dis-
play the current wear values of the main switching contacts (MSCA, MSCB)
and transition contacts (TCA, TCB).

8 Operation
The device also shows the differences in contact wear for different contacts.
Figure 297: Contact wear
► Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > Contact wear.
8.5.9 Maintenance (optional)

The device monitors the following maintenance:
Maintenance Description
OLTC maintenance The on-load tap-changer must be maintained in accordance
with the MR standards.
OLTC replacement The on-load tap-changer must be replaced with a new on-
load tap-changer.
DSI replacement The diverter switch insert must be replaced with a new di-
verter switch insert.
Contact wear The main switching contacts or transition contacts of the on-
load tap-changer must be exchanged or replaced.
Oil change and The oil must be changed and the diverter switch insert, oil
cleaning compartment, and oil conservator must be cleaned.
Selector mainte- The on-load tap-changer selector must be maintained in ac-
nance cordance with the MR standards.
Oil sample An oil sample must be taken and analyzed; the limit values
specified by MR for added insulating oil must be observed.
Oil filter unit The oil filter of the oil filter unit must be replaced.
OLTC operator inter- Maintenance interval for the on-load tap-changer; the interval
val depends on the number of tap-change operations or on time,
and the operator can specify it.
Transformer opera- Time-dependent maintenance interval for the transformer,
tor interval which the operator can specify.
Table 142: Maintenance tasks

8 Operation
8.5.9.1 Setting operator interval for OLTC maintenance
You can define the maintenance interval of your choice for the on-load tap-
changer. You can define the maintenance interval as dependent on time
and/or number of tap-change operations. If the limit is reached (100%), the
device triggers an event message (red).
Settings Parameters Maintena...tor
Name Value
Home
Interval type Deactivated
Number of tap-change operations 150000
Duration 1.0 a
Date of next maintenance 17.09.2066 23:59:21 Events
Event (yellow) 90.0 %
Information
Recorder
Figure 298: Maintenance: OLTC operator
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > Maintenance:

OLTC operator.
Interval type
You can use this parameter to define the interval type for OLTC mainte-
nance or to deactivate maintenance. You can select the following options:
▪ Deactivated: The maintenance interval is deactivated.
▪ Time: The maintenance interval is dependent on time.
▪ Counter: The maintenance interval is dependent on number of tap-change
operations.
▪ Time and counter: The maintenance interval is dependent on time and
number of tap-change operations. The limit reached first triggers the
event.
Number of tap-change operations
You can use this parameter to define the reading of the tap-change opera-
tion counter at which the device should issue an event message.

8 Operation
Duration
You can use this parameter to set how long this interval should be. The de-
vice uses this to calculate the current maintenance progress.
Date of next maintenance
You can use this parameter to set the target date for the next maintenance.
The device uses this to calculate the current maintenance progress.
Event (yellow)
You can use this parameter to set the maintenance progress (as a percent-
age) after which the device should issue an event message (yellow).
8.5.9.2 Setting operator interval for transformer maintenance
You can define a maintenance interval of your choice for the transformer.
The maintenance interval is dependent on time. If the limit is reached
(100%), the device triggers an event message (red).
Settings Parameters Mainten....tor
Name Value
Home
Activate interval Off
Duration 1.0 a
Date of next maintenance 17.09.2066 23:59:21
Event (yellow) 90.0 % Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 299: Maintenance: Transformer operator
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Active part > Maintenance: Trans-

former operator.
Activate interval
You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate the maintenance inter-
val.

8 Operation
Duration
You can use this parameter to set how long this interval should be. The de-
vice uses this to calculate the current maintenance progress.
Date of next maintenance
You can use this parameter to set the target date for the next maintenance.
The device uses this to calculate the current maintenance progress.
Event (yellow)
You can use this parameter to set the maintenance progress (as a percent-
age) after which the device should issue an event message (yellow).
8.5.9.3 Undertaking and confirming maintenance
Once you have undertaken maintenance, you can confirm this on the device
and thereby reset the maintenance interval. The following maintenance pa-
rameters can be entered based on the maintenance type:
Value Description
Date Date of maintenance.
Operations counter Reading of the operations counter at the time of mainte-
nance.
You can enter the current counter reading or a smaller
counter reading.
Contact wear (only Overall contact wear on the stationary contact and moving
OILTAP®) contact.
▪ MSCA If you have measured the contact wear during mainte-
▪ MSCB nance and continue to use the contacts in their original
positions, then enter the measured values and select "No"
▪ TC1A in the prompt that reads "Contacts exchanged/replaced"
▪ TC1B to confirm it. This causes the monitoring system to opti-
mize its calculation model and subsequent calculation of
▪ TC2A the contact wear is more precise.
▪ TC2B If you have exchanged (other position) or replaced con-
tacts, then enter the contact wear found on the mounted
contacts (for new contacts: 0.000 mm) and select "Yes" in
the prompt that reads "Contacts exchanged/replaced" to
confirm it.
Table 143: Maintenance parameters

8 Operation
Determining the contact wear (only OILTAP®)
The thickness of the wear to be entered is the sum of the wear of the mov-
able and the fixed contact part.
Figure 300: Determining contact wear
1 Fixed contact y1 Thickness of the worn contact

coating (fixed contact)
2 Movable contact x2 Thickness of the contact coating
when new (movable contact)
x1 Thickness of the contact coating y2 Thickness of the worn contact
when new (fixed contact) coating (movable contact)
The wear thickness z to be entered is determined as follows:

z = x1 - y1 + x2 - y2

8 Operation
Confirming maintenance
To confirm maintenance, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings > Maintenance wizard.
Figure 301: Maintenance wizard
2. Select the maintenance to be confirmed.

3. Press the Next button.
4. Enter the maintenance parameters.
Figure 302: Undertaking and confirming maintenance
5. Press the Accept button to save the changed parameters.

ð Only for OILTAP®: A prompt appears asking if the contacts were ex-
changed or replaced.
6. Only for OILTAP®: Press Yes or No to confirm the prompt.

8 Operation
8.5.9.4 Displaying maintenance overview
The maintenance overview displays the progress of the individual mainte-

nance intervals. You can also see the limit values for the "yellow" and "red"
event messages. For the maintenance intervals of the on-load tap-changer,
the device uses the recorded operating data to predict the date for the next
maintenance appointment. The date is not displayed until enough operating
data has been recorded.
If you have deactivated the "OLTC operator maintenance" or "Transformer

operator maintenance" interval, the interval is shown grayed out in the main-
tenance overview.
Figure 303: Maintenance overview
► Go to Information > System > Maintenance.
8.5.9.5 Displaying the maintenance logbook
All maintenance tasks that have been performed are displayed in the main-
tenance logbook. The entries are generated automatically if you perform
maintenance using the maintenance wizard. You can also create separate
entries.
The maintenance logbook displays the following information:

▪ Time of maintenance
▪ Mainten.type
▪ Description

8 Operation
Figure 304: Maintenance logbook
To call up the maintenance logbook, proceed as follows:

► Go to Settings > Maintenance logbook.
Editing an entry in the maintenance logbook
You can edit the entries in the maintenance logbook as needed.
Figure 305: Editing an entry in the maintenance logbook
Proceed as follows to edit an entry in the maintenance logbook:

1. Go to Settings > Maintenance logbook.
2. Press the button in order to edit an entry.

8 Operation
Creating an entry in the maintenance logbook
Proceed as follows to create an entry in the maintenance logbook without

using the maintenance wizard:
2. Press the New entry button.
3. Enter the maintenance data.
4. Press the Accept button to save the entry.
Deleting an entry in the maintenance logbook
You can delete the entries in the maintenance logbook as needed. To do so,
proceed as follows:
2. Press the button in order to delete the entry.
8.5.9.6 Suppressing a maintenance event
You can use this function to suppress the event messages of maintenance
tasks whose limit values have been reached for a specific number of on-load
tap-change operations. If you acknowledge a maintenance event without
performing maintenance, the device will report the event message after the
set number of on-load tap-change operations.
Settings Parameters Maintena...nts
Name Value
Home
Suppressing transformer maint. ev... 1
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 306: Suppressing a maintenance event
Suppressing a maintenance event
You can use this parameter to set the number of on-load tap-change opera-
tions for which the event message should be suppressed.
To suppress the maintenance event function, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Maintenance events.

8 Operation

8.5.10 Torque monitoring (optional)

The torque monitoring function is used to monitor the torque of the on-load
tap-changer. For the torque, different limit values are defined across the en-
tire tap-change sequence and, if exceeded, the monitoring system triggers a
corresponding event message.
You can use torque monitoring only for the on-load tap-changer calibrated
ex works and the motor-drive unit. Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen
GmbH if you want to perform torque monitoring for another on-load tap-
changer.
8.5.10.1 Tap-change ranges (windows) M1...M8
The torque curve is divided into as many as 8 ranges, or windows, depend-

ing on the on-load tap-changer and tap-change operation type (M1...M8).
These ranges describe the individual tap changes that the on-load tap-
changer passes through during a tap-change process.
Figure 307: Torque curve of a change-over selector operation divided into 8 tap-change ranges
(M1...M8)
8.5.10.2 Types of tap-change operations
The monitoring system distinguishes between the following types of tap-

change operations:
▪ Change-over selector operation: The change-over selector also changes
in this tap-change operation.
▪ Small tap change: Tap selector operation in which the distance between
the stationary selector contacts used for this tap-change operation is
small.

8 Operation
▪ Moderate tap change: Tap selector operation in which the distance be-
tween the attached selector contacts used for this tap-change operation is
moderate.
▪ Large tap change: Tap selector operation in which the distance between
the attached selector contacts used for this tap-change operation is large.
▪ Reverse tap-change operation: Tap-change operation in which the tap
changes in the opposite direction to the most recent tap-change operation
and does not involve actuation of the selector.
8.5.10.3 Limit values
The monitoring system monitors the tap-change sequence for the following
limits:
▪ Limit value > (M1...M8 >)
▪ Limit value >> (M1...M8 >>)
▪ Maximum permissible torque of the on-load tap-changer (Md,max)
Limit value > and limit value >>
2 limit values (> and >>) are defined for each tap-change range (windows
M1...M8). These limit values depend on the tap changer, type of tap-change
operation, and the diverter switch and transformer oil temperatures currently
measured.
Once the tap-change operation is complete, the monitoring system checks

the torque curve for the defined limit values. If the limit value was exceeded,
the monitoring system generates a corresponding event message. If the limit
value >> is exceeded, additional tap-change operations are blocked based
on the device configuration. In this case, the Blocking active event is trig-
gered. You must acknowledge events to ensure they are no longer displayed
and to disable the associated blocking function.
Maximum permissible torque of the on-load tap-changer (Md,max)
During the tap-change operation, the maximum permissible on-load tap-

changer torque is monitored. This prevents physical damage to the on-load
tap-changer. If the limit value for the maximum permissible on-load tap-
changer torque is exceeded, the monitoring system triggers the motor pro-
tective switch Q1. Additionally, the monitoring system triggers the event Max.
motor torque limit value exceeded. During a change-over selector operation,
the Q1 motor protective switch is not triggered in windows M3...M5.
As soon as the motor protective switch is triggered, the monitoring system

receives a signal to this effect from the motor-drive unit. The monitoring sys-
tem then triggers the event 85 Motor protective switch is triggered!.
You cannot insert the motor protective switch again until the event Max. mo-
tor torque limit value exceeded has been acknowledged. Follow the operat-
ing instructions for fault elimination in the motor-drive unit operating instruc-
tions.

8 Operation
8.5.10.4 Tap-change supervisory control
The tap-change supervisory control monitors both the drive shaft between
on-load tap-changer(s) and motor-drive unit and the correct switching of the
diverter switch. The tap-change supervisory control is also performed when
the motor-drive unit is actuated using the hand crank.
If the on-load tap-changer is equipped with tap-change supervisory control,

then the monitoring system uses the status of the monitoring contacts S80
and S81 for the following evaluations:
▪ If both monitoring contacts report "OFF" (there is no signal) and no tap-
change operation is being performed at that time, then the monitoring sys-
tem triggers the event Both tap-change supervisory control contacts OFF.
▪ If both monitoring contacts report "ON" (there is a signal) and no tap-
change operation is being performed at that time, then the monitoring sys-
tem triggers the event Both tap-change supervisory control contacts ON.
▪ If a tap-change operation is performed and no change in the signals on
the monitoring contacts occurs (e.g. from 1 to 2), then the monitoring sys-
tem triggers the event Tap-change operation without diverter switch oper-
ation.
▪ Checking whether the tap-change supervisory control is correctly con-
nected and the position sensor is correctly calibrated. If not, the monitor-
ing system triggers the event Tap-change supervisory control wiring error.
▪ If the signal of a monitoring contact changes from "ON" to "OFF" during a
tap-change operation, then this position is marked in the torque curve with
a vertical line. This indicates that a diverter switch action has occurred.
▪ Monitoring the diverter switch action. If the diverter switch action does not
occur at the right time, then the monitoring system triggers the event mes-
sage OLTC and MD insufficiently centered.
▪ For on-load tap-changer sets or on-load tap-changer combinations (multi-
column versions), the monitoring system monitors synchronous switching
of the on-load tap-changers. If synchronization is not sufficient, then the
monitoring system triggers the event OLTC synchronization insufficient.
8.5.10.5 Evaluated and unevaluated tap-change operations
The monitoring system distinguishes between evaluated and unevaluated

tap-change operations. A tap-change operation is considered to have been
evaluated if a diverter switch action is detected and it was possible for the
torque limits to be checked. The M1...M8 >/>> torque limits are not checked
during an unevaluated tap-change operation.
The entire torque curve is stored in the database, both for evaluated as well
as unevaluated tap-change operations.
A tap-change operation is not evaluated in the following cases:

▪ The motor voltage, motor current or motor frequency are outside of the
permissible range.
▪ The recorded temperatures are outside of the permissible range.
▪ Faulty rotary encoder signal.

8 Operation
▪ A diverter switch action was not detected. For on-load tap-changers with
tap-change supervisory control, there was no change in the tap-change
supervisory control contacts and the event Tap-change operation without
diverter switch operation is triggered. For tap-changers without tap-
change supervisory control, the diverter switch action is determined using
the torque curve. If the diverter switch action could not be correctly deter-
mined, then the tap-change operation cannot be evaluated.
▪ For multi-column applications: Synchronization error.
The torque is also checked for the maximum permitted motor torque (Md,max)
in cases where a diverter switch action was not detected.
8.5.10.6 Displaying torque monitoring
You can display the torque curve for each tap-change operation. An over-
view screen displays the following information for each tap-change opera-
tion:
▪ Tap-change operation type
▪ Switching direction (from position to position)
▪ Ambient temperature
▪ Time of the tap-change operation
▪ Event message
– Blue: Evaluated tap-change operation without exceeded limit value
– Yellow: Evaluated tap-change operation with exceeded limit value >
– Red: Evaluated tap-change operation with exceeded limit value >>
– Gray: Unevaluated tap-change operation

8 Operation
You can use a selection field to filter for the desired tap-change operation
types. You can click the header of the table to sequence the display in as-
cending or descending order according to the desired column.
Figure 308: Torque monitoring overview
► Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > Torque monitoring.
Displaying the torque curve
You can display the torque curve for each recorded tap-change operation.
The limit values > and >> are displayed and the time of the diverter switch
action (vertical line) is displayed for each tap-change range (M1...M8).
Figure 309: Torque curve
You can select several torque curves to compare (max. 10 torque curves on
the device display; max. 100 torque curves in a web-based visualization on
the PC). If you select several torque curves of various tap-change operation
types, the limit values are not displayed.

8 Operation
If you call up the torque curve, the torque monitoring data is intermediately
stored in the browser cache. If you switch back to the torque overview from
the torque curve, the data is loaded from the browser cache. For this rea-
son, on-load tap-change operations that have occurred in the meantime are
not displayed in the overview. Press the Home button to clear the data from
the browser cache and then call up torque monitoring again.
Figure 310: Comparison of torque curves
1. Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > Torque monitoring.

2. Select the tap-change operations you want.
3. Press the Display button.
8.5.11 Performing trial tap-change operations

In order to complete the commissioning of the monitoring system, you have
to perform trial tap-change operations. To do so, you can activate the trial
tap-change operations mode. In this mode, the wear and soot accumulation
caused by the tap-change operations that are performed are not calculated
and switching interval monitoring is deactivated. As long as this mode is ac-
tive, the device reports the event Trial tap-change operations active.
The "Trial tap-change operations" mode is automatically deactivated under

the following conditions:
▪ 8 hours after the mode was activated.
▪ If the device is restarted.

8 Operation
Figure 311: Trial tap-change operations
To activate trial tap-change operations mode, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings > Trial tap-change operations.
2. Press the Activate button.
ð Trial tap-change operations mode is active.
3. After the trial tap-change operations are complete, press the Deactivate
button to exit trial tap-change operations mode.
8.5.12.1 Setting VAM update guidelines
Using the update guidelines, you can define which tap-change operations
are recorded and analyzed. You can select the following options:
Option Description
Evaluation and statis- The tap-change operation is recorded, checked for plausi-
tics update bility and evaluated.
The statistics update ensures the self-learning of the yellow
limit value curve (envelope curve).
No statistics update The tap-change operation is recorded, checked for plausi-
bility and evaluated.
The statistics are not updated.
If a limit value curve has already been learned, limit value
violations can nevertheless occur. In the event of doubt,
contact the Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH Technical
Service department.
No evaluation The tap-change operation recording will not be analyzed or
evaluated.
The VAM analysis display does not show any infor-

mation for this tap-change operation.
Table 144: VAM update guidelines

8 Operation
Figure 312: VAM update guidelines
1. Go to Settings > VAM update guidelines.

2. Select the desired tap position and, with multi-column application, the de-
sired on-load tap-changer column (A, B or C).
8.5.12.2 Displaying VAM analysis
For each recorded tap-change operation, you will receive the following infor-
mation:
▪ Tap-change operation type
▪ Start position and end position of the tap-change operation.
▪ Time of the tap-change operation
▪ Status
Figure 313: VAM analysis

8 Operation
► Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > VAM analysis.
Tap-change operation type
The monitoring system distinguishes between the following types of tap-

change operations:
▪ Change-over selector operation: The change-over selector also changes
in this tap-change operation.
▪ Small tap change: Tap selector operation in which the distance between
the stationary selector contacts used for this tap-change operation is
small.
▪ Moderate tap change: Tap selector operation in which the distance be-
tween the attached selector contacts used for this tap-change operation is
moderate.
▪ Large tap change: Tap selector operation in which the distance between
the attached selector contacts used for this tap-change operation is large.
▪ Reverse tap-change operation: Tap-change operation in which the tap
changes in the opposite direction to the most recent tap-change operation
and does not involve actuation of the selector.
Status information
Color code Meaning
Blue No anomalies: Plausibility criteria met and limit values not exceeded
Yellow Limit value was exceeded
Gray The evaluation could not be carried out
Filter options
Using the drop-down menu, you can limit the selection of tap-change opera-
tions to those of a specific tap-change operation type or to those involving a
specific property.
▪ Selection according to tap-change operation type:
– Change-over selector operation
– Small, medium or large tap change
– Reverse tap-change operation
▪ Selection according to property:
– All
– Marked
– Evaluation ok
– Anomalies
– Without evaluation

8 Operation
Display of selected tap-change operations
To display individual tap-change operations with the associated VAM signal

and the stored limit value as a curve, proceed as follows:
1. Place a check mark in the first column in front of the tap-change op-
eration that is to be displayed as a curve. Up to 100 tap-change opera-
tions can be shown in the visualization via web browser. A maximum of
10 tap-change operations can be shown on the device display.
2. Confirm via the Display button.
ð They will be displayed differently depending on the number of selected
tap-change operations.
If more than one tap-change operation is selected, then the limit value curve
display will be omitted for the purpose of clarity:
Number of selected tap-change operations 1 2–100 >100
Display of VAM signal Yes Yes No
Display of limit value curve Yes No No
The following figure shows an example of the visualization of an individual

tap-change operation:
Figure 314: Display of a tap-change operation

8 Operation
The following figure shows an example of how multiple selected tap-change

operations are shown at the same time:
Figure 315: Display of multiple tap-change operations
If multiple tap-change operations are selected for the visualization, it is pos-

sible to hide or show individual tap-change operations by clicking on them in
the key.
Using the web-based ISM™ Intuitive Control visualization allows you to

zoom into an area of the signal. To do this, hold down the left mouse button
and draw a frame around the desired area. To return to the original repre-
sentation, click on the symbol.
8.5.12.3 Resetting VAM
The software in the MSENSE® VAM monitoring system uses a self-learning

algorithm which approximates the limit values towards the vibro-acoustic sig-
nal progression as the number of tap-change operations increases. The sta-
tistics stored for this can be reset in this display window.
Resetting the counter
The first and the second anomalies in an evaluation cluster are indicated via
a yellow status message in the VAM analysis display. A third anomaly aris-
ing in an evaluation cluster triggers an additional event message. This event
message is transmitted to a connected SCADA system.
By selecting "Counters", you reset the counters that are used to trigger the
events for the vibro-acoustic evaluation. The learned statistics are retained.
Resetting the statistics
The stored statistics are used, among other things, to display the learned
limit value (yellow curve).

8 Operation
When you select "Statistics", you reset the learned statistics and the coun-
ters that are used to evaluate the vibro-acoustic signals.
1. Go to Settings > Reset VAM.
3. Press the Accept button to reset the values.
8.5.13 OLTC data

In this menu, you can set parameters for the on-load tap-changer (OLTC).
Name Value
Home
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 316: OLTC data

OLTC A/B/C serial number
You can use this parameter to set the serial number of the on-load tap-
changer.
In applications with several columns, you can enter a unique serial number
for each on-load tap-changer.
8.5.13.1 Setting the tap position message (optional)
If you issue the tap position of the on-load tap-changer via an analog output
or digital outputs (BCD, gray, etc.), you can set whether the device is to use
the raw value or the adjusted value for the control system in accordance with

8 Operation
the tap position table [►Section 8.5.5, Page 379]. You can use this setting to
ensure that pass-through positions of the on-load tap-changer are not re-
ported as a separate tap position.
If you issue the tap position via several outputs, you can set this behavior for
each output separately.
Name Value
Home
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 317: OLTC data (example with 3x tap position message via analog outputs)

Tap position message (analog)
tion table the device should use for the tap position message using the ana-
log output.
If you change this parameter, you must then ensure that the configured ana-
log output value range [►Section 8.1.15, Page 228] matches the value
range in the tap position table [►Section 8.5.5, Page 379]. Otherwise, the
tap position will not be reported correctly.
BCD tap position message
(BCD).

8 Operation
Inrush current blocking
This parameter can only be set by the Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH

Technical Service department.
You can use this parameter to set how long on-load tap change operations
are blocked for after switching on the circuit breaker. This prevents damage
to the on-load tap-changer due to switching operations when inrush currents
are present
Maximum permissible OLTC operating temperature

You can use this parameter to set the upper limit of the permissible operat-
ing temperature of the on-load tap-changer. If the operating temperature is
higher than the set limit value, tap-change operations are blocked. The
switch-off hysteresis is 2 Kelvins.
Minimum permissible OLTC operating temperature

You can use this parameter to set the lower limit of the permissible operating
temperature of the on-load tap-changer. If the operating temperature is lower
than the set limit value, tap-change operations are blocked. The switch-off
hysteresis is 2 Kelvins.
8.5.13.2 Tap-change operations waiting time

You can set the waiting time between 2 consecutive tap-change operations
with this parameter. This function is used to prevent the on-load tap-changer
from overheating due to frequent tap-change operations.

8 Operation
8.5.13.3 Setting the warning message for the operating temperature of the on-
load tap-changer
You can set two limit values for monitoring the operating temperature of the
on-load tap-changer. If the operating temperature is greater than the upper
limit value or less than the lower limit value, the device triggers an event
message.
Events
No. Event Description
3405 OLTC operating tem- The operating temperature of the OLTC has ex-
perature warning ceeded the limit for the warning.
Table 145: Events
Digital inputs and outputs

Name Description
O: Warn. OLTC temp. The operating temperature of the OLTC has ex-
ceeded the limit for the warning.
Table 146: Digital inputs (I) and outputs (O)
Upper limit warning OLTC temp.
You can use this parameter to set the upper limit of the warning message for
the operating temperature of the on-load tap-changer. The switch-off hys-
teresis is 2 kelvins.
Lower limit warning OLTC temp.
You can use this parameter to set the lower limit of the warning message for
the operating temperature of the on-load tap-changer. The switch-off hys-
teresis is 2 kelvins.
8.5.14 Displaying power characteristics

You can display the recorded power characteristics of the motor-drive unit
for the last 1000 tap-change operations. The following data is displayed:
▪ Tap position
▪ Active power of motor-drive unit
▪ Active power limit value

8 Operation
Information Perf. char. curves
Home
20.01.2020 Date
500 14 13:36:33 Time

14 > 13 Tap position
400 14
Events
Tap position
300 14
Pm[W]
200 14
P_Motor Information
100 13
Threshold
0 13 Tap position
Recorder
5 / 1000
Figure 318: Displaying power characteristics
► Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > Power characteristics.
8.5.15 Monitoring the gas volume of the Buchholz relay (OLTC)

When you record the gas volume of the Buchholz relay of the on-load tap-
changer, you can set 2 limit values for the gas volume. If the on-load tap-
changer has multiple columns, you can set 2 limit values for each column. If
the measured gas volume is greater than the limit value > or >>, the device
triggers an event message.
Settings Parameters Buchholz relay
>
Home
OLTC gas volume 0.3 l 0.4 l
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 319: Limit values for the gas volume of the Buchholz relay of the on-load tap-changer
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > Buchholz relay.


8 Operation
8.5.16 Monitoring the oil pressure (on-load tap-changer)

When you record the oil pressure of the on-load tap-changer, you can use
the pressure relief device (PRD) to set 2 limit values for the gas volume. If
the on-load tap-changer has multiple columns, you can set 2 limit values for
each column. If the measured oil pressure is greater than the limit value > or
>>, the device triggers an event message.
Settings Parameters Pressure...ice
>
Home
OLTC oil pressure 15 kPa 20 kPa
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 320: Limit values for the oil pressure of the on-load tap-changer
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > Pressure relief

device.
8.5.17 Oil filter unit control

If your device is equipped with the optional "Oil filter unit control" function,
the oil filter unit is controlled by the ISM assembles of the device. Depending
on the configuration, the device can control up to 3 oil filter units. The follow-
ing settings always apply to all oil filter units equally.
The following operating modes are possible:

▪ Normal operation: In normal operation, the device activates the oil filter
unit pump automatically after each on-load tap-change operation. De-
pending on the on-load tap-changer type, the device switches the pump
back off again after a defined runtime:
– OILTAP® V/M/MS: 30 minutes
– OILTAP® R/RM/T: 60 minutes
– OILTAP® G: 90 minutes
▪ Cold-weather operation (optional): At oil temperatures below 0 °C, the de-
vice activates the oil filter unit pump automatically. When the oil tempera-
ture reaches 5 °C, the device switches the pump back off.

8 Operation
▪ Time-controlled operation: In addition to normal operation, you can set up

to 3 intervals in which the device is to activate the oil filter unit pump.
▪ Test operation: You can select test operation using the S30 switch. In test
operation, the device activates the oil filter unit pump.
▪ Optional for VACUTAP® VR: Oil cooling
Events
No. Event Description
1165 Plan oil filter replacement Overpressure detected in the oil filter
unit, the oil filter must be replaced soon.
1166 Overpressure detected in the Ensure that the stop-cock of the return
oil filter unit, the oil filter must line is open. Otherwise, change the filter
be replaced soon. cartridge. If the fault cannot be fixed,
contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen's
3370 Oil filter unit controller error The power supply for the oil filter unit
control circuit has been interrupted.
3371 Oil filt. unit 1 motor protective The motor protective switch of the oil fil-
switch ter unit 1 pump has triggered.
3421 Oil filter unit test operation Test operation of the oil filter unit has
been activated.
3422 Oil filter unit cold-weather op- Cold-weather operation of the oil filter
eration unit has been activated.
3423 Oil filter unit switched on The signal for switching on the oil filter
unit is active.
Table 147: Events
Digital inputs and outputs

Name Description
O: Oil filter supply Message that the power supply circuit of the oil
filter unit is interrupted.
O: Oil filt. MPS 1 Message that the power supply circuit of oil pump
1 is interrupted.
2 is interrupted.
3 is interrupted.
I: Oil filt. test operation Input for activating test operation of the oil filter
unit
I: Oil filt. cold weather op Input for activating cold-weather operation of the
oil filter unit.

8 Operation
Name Description
O: Oil filt. ON (control) Output for activating the oil filter unit
O: Oil filt. ON (message) Message that the oil filter unit is activated.
O: Oil filt. overpressure Message that overpressure was detected in the
oil filter unit.
O: Motor running Signal for actuating an external oil filter unit
Table 148: Digital inputs (I) and outputs (O)
8.5.17.1 Setting time-controlled operation
You can activate the oil filter unit pump on a time-controlled basis. To do so,
you can set times for the start and end of up to 3 intervals. The device acti-
vates the pump during the period between the start and end. The runtime of
the pump after a tap-change operation remains unaffected by this setting.
Start: 19:00 End: 1:00 Start: 7:00 End: 9:00
18:00 00:00 6:00 h
Figure 321: Time-controlled operation with 2 intervals (example)
If you set the same time for the start and end times, the time switch is deac-
tivated.
Settings Parameters Oil filter unit
Name Value
Home
Time switch start 1 00:00
Time switch end 1 02:00
Time switch end 2 00:00 Events
Operating duration 903600 s
Number of starts 251 Information
Recorder
Figure 322: Oil filter unit

8 Operation
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > Oil filter unit.
Time switch start
You can use this parameter to set the time after which the device is to switch
on the oil filter unit pump.
Time switch end
You can use this parameter to set the time after which the device is to switch
off the oil filter unit pump.
8.5.17.2 Setting the operating duration and number of starts
You can set the operating duration and number of starts of the oil filter unit.
You can use this function to reset the counters after maintenance (e.g. oil fil-
ter replacement).
The counters are not reset automatically after servicing the oil filter unit.
Settings Parameters Oil filter unit
Name Value
Home
Time switch end 2 00:00 Events
Operating duration 903600 s
Number of starts 251 Information
Recorder
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > On-load tap-changer > Oil filter unit.

8 Operation
Operating duration
You can use this parameter to set the operating duration of the oil filter unit.
Number of starts
You can use this parameter to set the number of starts of the oil filter unit.
8.5.17.3 Displaying the oil filter unit status
The device displays the following information about the status of the oil filter
unit:
▪ Status (blue = oil filter unit active, gray = oil filter unit inactive)
▪ Operating mode
▪ Number of starts
▪ Operating duration
▪ Oil filter unit overpressure message
▪ Oil filter unit controller error (optional)
▪ Filter unit motor protective switch 1/2/3 (optional)
► Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > Oil filter unit.

8 Operation
8.5.18 Displaying the minimum and maximum tap position

You can display the minimum and maximum tap position reached and the
corresponding time.
Figure 325: Minimum and maximum tap position
1. Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > Minimum and maximum

tap position.
2. As needed, select the Reset button to reset the minimum and maximum
values.
8.5.19 Messages
Name Description
O: Pulse switch The output switches when the on-load tap-
changer is in the range between the tap-change
indicator sections (SSE) 17…30.

8 Operation
8.6 Motor-drive unit and control cabinet
8.6.1 Actuating ETOS® ED
8.6.1.1 Operating the motor-drive unit remotely
Activate the motor-drive unit remotely during normal operation.
You can initiate actuation via a single control impulse, for example using the
optional "Automatic voltage regulation" function package.
This adjustment operation is always completed regardless of any other con-

trol impulses issued during the tap-change operation. In the standard design,
the next tap-change operation can only proceed once all control devices
have reached their resting positions.
For on-load tap-changers with pass-through positions: Ensure that the de-
vice controller (ISM) is switched on. Otherwise, switching operations
through the pass-through positions of the on-load tap-changer will not be
carried out correctly.
If the voltage is interrupted during a tap-change operation, the motor-drive

unit will complete the started tap-change operation once the voltage supply
returns.
8.6.1.2 Operating motor-drive unit locally
In special operating cases (such as during maintenance tasks), the motor-

drive unit can also be operated electrically on site via control switch S3.
For on-load tap-changers with pass-through positions: Ensure that the de-
vice controller (ISM) is switched on. Otherwise, switching operations
through the pass-through positions of the on-load tap-changer will not be
carried out correctly.

8 Operation
8.6.1.3 Operating the motor-drive unit with the hand crank
WARNING Danger of explosion!

Unauthorized operation of the motor-drive unit with the hand crank may re-
sult in death or serious injury.
► Never operate the motor-drive unit electrically or with the hand crank be-
fault in the transformer or on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-
changer.
► Never use the hand crank to complete a tap-change operation that has
begun electrically, but has not been ended completely.
► If the hand crank is difficult to move, you must stop using it.
► When operating the motor-drive unit with the hand crank, never reverse
the direction of rotation.
► If there is any doubt about the on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-
changer being in proper working condition or about the cause of a fault in
the motor-drive unit, contact the Technical Service department of Maschi-
nenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH immediately.
► To operate the motor-drive unit manually, only use the hand crank
mounted in the motor-drive unit.
For information about fault rectification, refer to the "Fault elimination" chap-
ter.
Normal operation
During normal operation, there is no need to operate the unit with the hand
crank. The hand crank is mainly required during installation and for tests in
the transformer plant.
Use of the hand crank for operating the motor-drive unit is permitted if the
transformer is disconnected, e.g. for maintenance tasks, if there is no de-
tectable fault on the transformer or on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-
changer and the previous tap-change operation has been completed cor-
rectly.
Emergency operation exception
An operation is considered an emergency operation if a tap-change opera-

tion is absolutely necessary when a transformer is energized, despite a fault
in the motor-drive unit. In this case, be sure to observe the warnings listed
above.
Operating the motor-drive unit with the hand crank
To carry out a tap-change operation with the hand crank, proceed as follows:
1. Open the door of the protective housing for the motor-drive unit.
2. Switch off motor protective switch Q1 (position 0).

8 Operation
3. Insert the hand crank mounted in the motor-drive unit into the hand crank
aperture in the upper cover plate.
ð The built-in hand crank interlock switch interrupts the motor circuit at
two poles. The control circuit will not be interrupted.
4. NOTICE! Damage to the on-load tap-changer due to tap-change opera-
tion not being completed correctly. Turn the hand crank in one direction
until the pointer has fully circled the tap-change indicator once and is
again in the mid-position of the area marked in gray on the tap-change in-
dicator.
ð The tap-change operation is complete.
5. Remove the hand crank and return it to the mounting bracket.
6. Switch on motor protective switch Q1 (position I).
7. Close the door of the protective housing for the motor-drive unit.
8.6.2 Actuating ETOS® TD
8.6.2.1 Actuating motor-drive unit locally
To actuate the motor-drive unit locally, proceed as follows:

ü Operating mode switch S32 or S132 is in the LOC position.
► Turn control switch S3 in the raise or lower direction.
ð The motor-drive unit performs the tap-change operation.
8.6.2.2 Selecting the operating mode
You can select the following operating modes:

▪ LOC (Local)
▪ REM (Remote)
▪ AUTO (only with option "Automatic voltage regulation")
To select the operating mode, proceed as follows:

► Turn control switch S32 or S132 to the desired position.
8.6.3 Control of the motor-drive unit

The following parameters let you configure control of the motor-drive unit.
You can set the following:
▪ Switching pulse
▪ Motor runtime
▪ Switching direction

8 Operation
Settings Parameters Motor co...nit
Name Value
Home
Switching pulse type Time-controlled pulse
Switching pulse time 1.5 s
Switching pulse pause 2.5 s
Activate motor runtime monitoring Off Events
Motor runtime 6 s
Activate switching direction moni... Off
Switching direction Standard
Information
Recorder
Figure 326: Motor control unit
► Go to Settings > Parameters > Motor and control cabinet > Torque
monitoring .
8.6.3.1 Setting the switching pulse for controlling the motor-drive unit
You can use the parameters Switching pulse type, Switching pulse time and
Switching pulse pause to adapt the device switching pulse to the require-
ments of the motor-drive unit controller.
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Motor and control cabinet > Motor
control.
Switching pulse type
You can use this parameter to toggle the switching pulse between a continu-
ous pulse or a time-controlled switching pulse.
Continuous pulse Selecting the "Continuous pulse" option causes the device to issue the
switching pulse in AVR Auto operating mode until the measured value is
back within the bandwidth. In AVR Manual operating mode, the device is-
sues the switching pulse for as long as you press the or key.
If the device is operated as a follower in parallel operation in this case, then

the TAPCON® will issue the switching pulse until one of the following re-
quirements has been met:
▪ The set motor runtime has been reached
▪ The Motor running signal switches from state 1 to 0
▪ The tap position required by the master has been reached
A pause is enforced after every switching pulse before another switching

pulse is issued.

8 Operation
Time-controlled switching Selecting the "Time-controlled switching pulse" option causes the device to
pulse issue the switching pulse for a set duration. A pause is enforced after ev-
ery switching pulse before another switching pulse is issued.
If you use a motor-drive unit from Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH, you

need to select the "Time-controlled switching pulse" option.
s
1 2 1
Figure 327: Switching pulse time and switching pulse pause
1 Switching pulse time 2 Switching pulse pause
Switching pulse time
You can use this parameter to set the maximum duration of the switching
pulse. The switching pulse resets after the switching pulse time has elapsed
or if the device receives the Motor running signal beforehand or the tap posi-
tion is changed.
Switching pulse pause
You can use this parameter to set the switching pulse pause between 2
switching pulses. The device can only issue another switching pulse once
the switching pulse pause has elapsed.
8.6.3.2 Setting motor runtime monitoring
The motor-drive unit's runtime can be monitored by the device. This function
is used to identify motor-drive unit malfunctions during the tap-change oper-
ation and to trigger any actions needed.
Behavior The motor-drive unit issues the Motor-drive unit running signal during the
tap-change operation. This signal is present until the tap-change operation is
complete. The device compares the duration of this signal with the set motor
runtime. If the set motor runtime is exceeded, the device triggers the follow-
ing actions:
1. Motor runtime exceeded event.
2. Pulse signal via Trigger motor protective switch output relay

8 Operation
Note that motor-drive units with pass-through positions or motor-drive units

without stepped switching behavior will run for longer under certain circum-
stances. Set a longer motor runtime for such units.
control.
Motor runtime
You can use this parameter to set the motor runtime.
Motor runtime monitoring
You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate motor runtime monitor-
ing.
8.6.3.3 Setting the switching direction
You can set the switching direction of the motor-drive unit.

control.
U switching direction
You can use this parameter to set the switching direction for voltage regula-
tion. You can use this to adjust the behavior of the device based on how
your on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit are configured. You can se-
lect the following options:
Setting Meaning
Standard The device issues a signal via the Raise output to increase the
voltage.
The device issues a signal via the Lower output to reduce the
voltage.
Swapped The device issues a signal via the Lower output to increase
the voltage.
The device issues a signal via the Raise output to reduce the
voltage.
Table 149: Behavior

8 Operation
Q switching direction (optional)
You can use this parameter to set the switching direction for reactive power
regulation. You can use this to adjust the behavior of the device based on
how your on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit are configured. You can
Setting Meaning
Standard The device issues a signal via the RAISE output to increase
the reactive power.
The device issues a signal via the LOWER output to reduce
the reactive power.
Swapped The device issues a signal via the LOWER output to increase
the reactive power.
The device issues a signal via the RAISE output to reduce the
reactive power.
Table 150: Behavior
Switching direction monitoring
You can use this parameter to set the switching direction monitoring. This
function monitors whether a tap-change operation in the wrong direction has
been undertaken (e.g. due to a wiring mistake).
If a tap-change operation in the wrong direction is detected, the device is-

sues the event message Switching direction monitoring and blocks auto-
matic regulation. Automatic regulation is blocked until you acknowledge
[►Section 8.1.17.1, Page 234] the event.
Switching direction monitoring is not active if you control the motor-drive unit
with a continuous pulse [►Section 8.6.3.1, Page 416].
8.6.4 Drive overview

The overview display of the motor-drive unit shows you the following infor-
mation:
▪ Current tap position, including drag hands
▪ Display of tap-change indicator sections (SSE, optional)
▪ Operations counter
▪ Status messages
– Operating mode
– Switching blocking (optional)
– Motor protective switch
– Control cabinet door open/closed
▪ Ambient temperature (optional)

8 Operation
▪ Internal temperature of the motor-drive unit (optional)

▪ Next maintenance (optional)
Figure 328: Drive overview
1 Tap position 2 Tap-change indicator section

(SSE)
3 Operation counter 4 Operating mode
5 Switching blocking 6 Motor protective switch
7 Door open/closed 8 Temperatures
9 Next maintenance
► Go to Information > Motor and control cabinet > Drive.

8 Operation
8.6.5 Motor Current Index (MCI)

The term Motor Current Index (in accordance with IEEE PC57.143) de-
scribes the area below the curve of the motor current during an on-load tap-
change operation. The Motor Current Index is a measurement that takes into
account the inrush current, the present tap-change conditions and the tap-
change duration.
Motor current Motor Current Index

15 1000
A
12 800
9 600
I 6 MCI 400
3 200
0 0
0 1 2 3 s 4
t Tap-change operations
Figure 329: Example illustration of the temporal progression of the motor current I and of the
Motor Current Index MCI calculated from this in comparison with the values of the MCI for fur-
ther on-load tap-change operations
The motor runtime and therefore the Motor Current Index differ depending
on the type of tap-change operation. The Motor Current Index will therefore
be categorized in accordance with the following types of tap-change opera-
tion to aid comparison:
Tap-change operation type Description
TSO/CSO The switching direction is the same as the pre-
Tap selector operation / change- vious switching direction. Example:
over selector operation ▪ Previous tap-change operation: pos. 2 →
pos. 3
▪ Current tap-change operation: pos. 3 →
pos. 4
RSO The switching direction is not the same as the
Reverse tap-change operation previous switching direction. Example:
▪ Previous tap-change operation: pos. 2 →
pos. 3
▪ Current tap-change operation: pos. 3 →
pos. 2
Unknown The tap-change operation type is unknown.
This is the case after the device has been
restarted or if the motor protective switch has
been triggered.
Table 151: Tap-change operation types

8 Operation
For the correct determination of the Motor Current Index, you must use a
signaling module for the tap position that also signals the pass-through posi-
tion as a separate tap position.
8.6.5.1 Setting MCI monitoring
The device can monitor the Motor Current Index (MCI) and trigger an event
message if the Motor Current Index is outside of the permissible range. If
you would like to monitor the Motor Current Index, you must set the following
parameters.
Settings Parameters Motor Curr...dex
Name Value
Home
Limit value monitoring Off
Primary transformer current 10 A
K1/K2 signal assignment Standard
TSO/CSO > 1045 Events
TSO/CSO < 849
RSO > 1195
RSO < 849
Information
Recorder
Figure 330: Motor Current Index
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Motor-drive unit > Motor Current In-
dex.
Determining the limit Upon delivery, the limit values have not been determined. Maschinenfabrik
values Reinhausen GmbH recommends the following procedure for determining the
limit values:
1. When commissioning the product, deactivate limit value monitoring.
2. After one year, display the minimum and maximum values of the Motor
Current Index (MCI extreme values [►Section 8.6.5.2, Page 423]).
3. Use the maximum value of the MCI + 20% for the upper limit value, and
the minimum value of the MCI - 20% for the lower limit value.
4. Repeat this procedure annually, and then reset the MCI extreme values.

8 Operation
Limit value monitoring
You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate Motor Current Index
monitoring.
TSO/CSO >
You can use this parameter to set the upper limit value for tap selector oper-
ations / change-over selector operations. If the Motor Current Index is
greater than the upper limit value, the device triggers an event message.
TSO/CSO <
You can use this parameter to set the lower limit value for tap selector oper-
ations / change-over selector operations. If the Motor Current Index is less
than the lower limit value, the device triggers an event message.
RSO >
You can use this parameter to set the upper limit value for reverse tap-
change operations. If the Motor Current Index is greater than the upper limit
value, the device triggers an event message.
RSO <
You can use this parameter to set the lower limit value for reverse tap-
change operations. If the Motor Current Index is less than the lower limit
value, the device triggers an event message.
Primary transformer current
You can use this parameter to set the primary current of the current trans-
former for measuring the motor current. The secondary current is 5 A.
8.6.5.2 Displaying the MCI
You can display the progression and the extreme values of the Motor Cur-
rent Index.
MCI values
In the MCI values menu, you can display the Motor Current Index recorded
values and the corresponding tap position of the last 3000 tap-change oper-
ations. The following buttons are available for navigation within the diagram:
▪ : Call up first page.
▪ : Call up previous page.
▪ : Call up next page.

8 Operation
▪ : Call up last page.
▪ : Update the display.
Figure 331: MCI values
1. Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > MCI values.

2. Where necessary, select the navigation buttons to change pages.
MCI extreme values
In the MCI extreme values menu, you can display the maximum and mini-
mum values of the Motor Current Index and the corresponding dates.
Figure 332: MCI extreme values
1. Go to Information > On-load tap-changer > MCI extreme values.

2. Where necessary, select the Reset button to clear the displayed extreme
values.

8 Operation
8.6.6 Calibrating the position sensor

This function is used to calibrate the position sensor if the position sensor of
the motor-drive unit has been replaced or is incorrectly calibrated. Follow the
notes in the service instructions.
Only calibrate the position sensor if the position sensor has been replaced
and after consultation with Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH. If incor-
rectly calibrated, the motor-drive unit might no longer function correctly.
Figure 333: Calibrating the position sensor
To calibrate the position sensor, proceed as follows:

ü The position sensor is replaced according to the service instructions and
the motor-drive unit is in the adjustment position (red mark on the fly-
wheel).
1. Go to Settings > Calibrate hardware > Position sensor.
2. Press the Calibrate button.
3. Press Yes to confirm the prompt.
ð The position sensor will be calibrated.
4. Go to Information > Drive and compare the display for the tap position
and the tap-change indicator sections (SSE) to the motor-drive unit dis-
play. The values must match.
8.6.7 Synchronizing the motor-drive unit

For commissioning, you have to synchronize the tap position of the on-load
tap-changer using the control unit of the motor-drive unit.

8 Operation
8.6.7.1 Single-column on-load tap-changer model
In the single-column design of the on-load tap-changer, you can synchronize

the tap position in two different ways:
▪ Manual entry of the current tap position
▪ Automatic synchronization
Settings Calibrate hardware
Home
Tap position (manual) Synchronize by entering the
current tap position
Tap position (automatic)
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 334: Synchronizing the motor-drive unit
Manual
To manually enter the current tap position, you have to know the current on-
load tap-changer tap position. You can read the current tap position from the
on-load tap-changer head. To do so, follow the operating instructions for the
on-load tap-changer.
For manual calibration, if your device is equipped with the torque monitoring
function, the device will perform 2 tap-change operations in the "RAISE" di-
rection and 2 tap-change operations in the "LOWER" direction. Prior to man-
ual calibration, ensure that the on-load tap-changer is not in an end position.
Make sure you set the correct tap position. Otherwise, it cannot be guaran-
teed that the motor-drive unit will function correctly.
Proceed as follows to enter the current tap position manually:

1. Go to Settings > Calibrate hardware > Tap position (manual).
2. Select the current tap position of the on-load tap-changer.
Automatic
During automatic synchronization, the motor-drive unit control unit automati-

cally determines the current tap position of the on-load tap-changer. To do
so, the on-load tap-changer is moved across the entire regulating range.

8 Operation
Automatic synchronization is not possible if your on-load tap-changer has

tap positions that may not be switched to ("blocked positions"). In this case,
perform synchronization manually.
Note that the entire regulating range of the on-load tap-changer is traveled
through during automatic synchronization. This allows strong voltage
changes to occur on the transformer. Therefore, carry out the automatic
synchronization on a de-energized transformer.
Conditions for automatic synchronization:

▪ The motor-drive unit is in "Local" operating mode.
▪ The motor protective switch is switched on (position I).
▪ The motor voltage is below the permissible range.
1. Go to Settings > Calibrate hardware > Tap position (automatic).
2. Press the Start button.
3. Press the Start button to confirm the message.
ð The automatic synchronization is carried out.
8.6.7.2 Multi-column on-load tap-changer model
In the multi-column design of the on-load tap-changer, you can carry out the
synchronization automatically. To do so, the on-load tap-changers are
moved across the entire regulating range. All on-load tap-changers are con-
trolled simultaneously.
Note that the entire regulating range of the on-load tap-changer is traveled
through during automatic synchronization. This allows strong voltage
changes to occur on the transformer. Therefore, carry out the automatic
synchronization on a de-energized transformer.
Conditions for automatic synchronization

▪ The motor-drive unit is in "Local" operating mode.
▪ The motor protective switch is switched on (position I).
▪ The motor voltage is below the permissible range.

8 Operation
Figure 335: Synchronizing the motor-drive unit
1. Go to Settings > Calibrate hardware > Tap position (automatic).

2. Select the Synchronize button.
3. Press the Start button to confirm the message.
ð The on-load tap changers are switched into the lower final position (the
lowest or the highest tap position, depending on the drive configura-
tion). Once the final position has been reached, a message with the
current tap position will appear.
4. Through the inspection window, check whether all on-load tap-changers
are in the same tap position as indicated in the message text.
5. If the tap positions are the same, press the Yes button to confirm the mes-
sage. Otherwise, press the Cancel button and follow the instructions in
the Troubleshooting [►Section 9.1.7, Page 465] chapter.
ð The on-load tap changers are switched into the upper final position (the
highest or the lowest tap position depending on the drive configuration).
ð Automatic synchronization is complete.
8.6.8 Control cabinet monitoring

You can use the control cabinet monitoring function to monitor the climatic
conditions within the control cabinet. With this function, the device monitors
the following measured values:
▪ Temperature
▪ Relative humidity
8.6.8.1 Setting control cabinet monitoring
You can set limit values and a delay time for each of the measured values
acquired.

8 Operation
the lower limit (< or <<), the device transmits an event message. Moreover,
the device issues a signal at the output Limit value interior climate control
cabinet exceeded.
Figure 336: Control cabinet monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Motor and control cabinet > Control
cabinet monitoring.
Control cabinet RH >/>> limit value
You can use these parameters to set the two upper limit values for monitor-
ing the relative humidity in the control cabinet.
RH delay time
You can use this parameter to set the delay time for delaying the issuing of
the event message Control cabinet RH >/>> limit value.
Temperature <
You can use this parameter to set the lower limit value for monitoring the
temperature in the control cabinet.
Temperature delay time
You can use this parameter to set the delay time for delaying the issuing of
the event message Control cabinet temp limit value <.

8 Operation
8.6.8.2 Displaying measured values from the control cabinet sensors
You can display the temporal progression of the measured values from the
control cabinet sensors for the last 10 days.
Figure 337: Control cabinet sensors
► Go to Information > Motor and control cabinet > Control cabinet sen-
sors.

8 Operation
8.7 Cooling system control (optional)

You can use the cooling system control function package to control and/or
monitor up to 6 cooling stages depending on device configuration.
8.7.1 Configuring cooling stages

To control the cooling system, you have to set the following parameters for
each cooling group:
Settings Parameters Control, c...p 1
Name Value
Home
Activate On
Switch-on input variable Hot-spot temperature
Switch-off input variable Top-oil temperature
Switching point 60°C Events
Hysteresis 5K
Switch-on delay 2 min
Activate altern. mode On
Activate period. mode On Information
Active if error On
Recorder
Figure 338: Cooling stage
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Cooling system > Cooling group X

control.
Activate
You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate the cooling stage.
▪ On: The cooling stage is used for cooling system control.
▪ Off: The cooling stage is not used for cooling system control.
Activate cooling stage X
In the "Manual" operating mode [►Section 8.7.2, Page 433], you can use
this parameter to start and stop the cooling stage.
If you have started the cooling stages manually and a power failure occurs,
the device restarts the cooling stages once power has been restored.

8 Operation
Switch on input variable
You can use this parameter to set which measured temperature value is to
be used to switch on the cooling stage. You can select the following options:
▪ Upper oil temperature
▪ Hot-spot temperature
▪ Lower oil temperature
▪ OLTC oil temperature
▪ Generic temperature
Switch off input variable
You can use this parameter to set which measured temperature value is to
be used to switch off the cooling stage. You can select the following options:
▪ Upper oil temperature
▪ Hot-spot temperature
▪ Lower oil temperature
▪ OLTC oil temperature
▪ Generic temperature
Switching point
You can use this parameter to set the temperature at which the cooling
stage is to be switched on or off. If the temperature exceeds the switching
point, the cooling stage is switched on. If the temperature is less than the
switching point minus the optional hysteresis, the cooling stage is switched
off.
Hysteresis
You can use this parameter to set a hysteresis below the switching point.
The cooling stage is only switched off if the temperature is less than the
switching point minus the hysteresis.
Switch-on delay
You can use this parameter to set the switch-on delay for the cooling stage.
The cooling stage is only switched on if the measured temperature is higher
than the switching point for longer than the set switch-on delay.
Alternating mode
You can use this parameter to activate alternating mode [►Section 8.7.6,
Page 436] for the cooling stage.

8 Operation
Periodic mode
You can use this parameter to activate periodic mode [►Section 8.7.5, Page
435] for the cooling stage.
Active if error
You can use this parameter to set whether the device is to activate the cool-
ing stage in the event of an error (fail-safe mode). The following types of er-
ror are recognized:
▪ The input signal for the temperature is in an impermissible range (e.g. ca-
ble break, sensor defective)
▪ The transformer load current is in an impermissible range
8.7.2 Set the operating mode

You can use this parameter to set the cooling system control operating
mode. You can select the following options:
▪ Automatic: The device starts and stops the individual cooling stages auto-
matically.
▪ Manual: You can start and stop the individual cooling stages via the visu-
alization [►Section 8.7.1, Page 431] or the control system.
To set the operating mode, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Cooling system > Cooling system con-
trol > Operating mode.
8.7.3 Deactivating cooling system control

Via a signal at the digital input I: Deactivate ISM cooling system control you
can deactivate the cooling system control, for example to control the cooling
stages via an external device. When configuring the digital input, refer to the
section Configuring digital inputs and outputs [►Section 8.1.16, Page 232].
8.7.4 Configuring load-dependent mode

In load-dependent mode all cooling stages are activated if the load current of
the transformer is greater than the set switching point. You can set the
switching point as a percentage in relation to the transformer rated current.

8 Operation
Once the switch-on delay has elapsed, the cooling stages are activated. To
limit the inrush current of the cooling stages, they are activated one after an-
other with a delay time of 60 seconds.
Settings Parameters Cooling ...rol
Name Value
Home
Operating mode Manual
Load-dep. mode Off
Load-dep. mode: Switching point 100.0 %
Load-dep. mode: Switch-on delay 2.0 min Events
Load-dep. mode: Overrun time 30.0 min
Activate period. mode Off
Period. mode: Interval 24 h
Period. mode: Switch-on duration 30 min Information
Period. mode: Switch-on delay 120 min

Activate altern. mode Off
Altern. mode: Change interval 24 h
Recorder
Figure 339: Cooling system control
To use this function, you need to activate the corresponding cooling stage
trol.
Activate load-dependent mode
You can use this parameter to activate the load-dependent mode of the cool-
ing system control.
Load-dependent mode: Switching point
You can use this parameter to set the switching threshold as a percentage in
relation to the nominal current of the transformer. All cooling stages are acti-
vated if the load current of the transformer is greater than the set switching
point.
Load-dependent mode: Switch-on delay
You can use this parameter to set the delay time for switching on the first
cooling stage.

8 Operation
Load-dependent mode: Overrun time
You can use this parameter to set the time period for which the cooling
stages remain switched on when the transformer load current returns to a
value below the set switching point.
8.7.5 Configuring periodic mode

Periodic mode is used to prevent the bearings of the cooling stages from
seizing up as a result of long idle periods. To do this, the cooling stages are
operated for a certain period at regular intervals regardless of the measured
temperature. You can activate/deactivate periodic mode individually for ev-
ery cooling stage (Configuring cooling stages [►Section 8.7.1, Page 431]).
Name Value
Home
Load-dep. mode Off

Recorder
Figure 340: Cooling system control
trol.
Activate periodic mode
You can use this parameter to activate the periodic mode of the cooling sys-
tem control.
Periodic mode: Interval
You can use this parameter to set the time period after which the cooling
stages are to be switched on for the first time.
Periodic mode: Switch-on duration
You can use this parameter to set the length of time that the cooling stages
are to be switched on for.

8 Operation
Periodic mode: Switch-on delay
stages are to be switched back on again.
8.7.6 Configuring alternating mode

If the transformer is equipped with several similar cooling stages, you can
run the stages in alternating mode. In alternating mode, each of the cooling
stages is run in turn to evenly distribute the load of the cooling stages. You
can activate/deactivate alternating mode individually for every cooling stage
(Configuring cooling stages [►Section 8.7.1, Page 431]).
Only use alternating mode for similar cooling stages.
Example: If you activate alternating mode for 2 cooling stages and set a
change interval of 24 h, then cooling stage 1 is switched off after 24 h and
cooling stage 2 is switched on. After another 24 h, cooling stage 2 is
switched off and cooling stage 1 is switched on, etc.
Name Value
Home
Load-dep. mode Off

Recorder
Figure 341: General cooling
trol.
Activate alternating mode
You can use this parameter to activate the alternating mode of the cooling
system control.

8 Operation
Alternating mode: Change interval
stage is to be changed.
8.7.7 Configuring the frequency-based cooling system control

The optional frequency-based cooling system control function lets you con-
trol the fans in a cooling system using the frequency. The device calculates
the fan speed based on the temperature of the top-oil and the load factor.
The device uses the highest speed derived based on the configured depen-
dencies.
The device outputs the fan speed as an analog signal (0...10 V), using in-
verse logic in the process: 100% = 0 V, 0% = 10 V. The device records the
status of the connected frequency converter using inverse logic (low active).
Fan speed based on the top-oil temperature
If the top-oil temperature is less than the lower threshold, then the device
uses the minimum fan speed. If the top-oil temperature is greater than the
upper threshold, then the device uses the maximum fan speed. If the top-oil
temperature is between the lower threshold and upper threshold, then the
device calculates the necessary speed using a straight line between both
points S1 and S2.

8 Operation
The following diagrams show an example of a graph of the fan speeds

based on the top-oil temperature according to the set parameters.
θ S1 θ S2
S2
100 n max
%
80
70
60
50
n 40
30
20
S1
10 n min
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 °C 140
θ Top oil
Figure 342: Fan speed based on the top-oil temperature
n Fan speed θTop-oil Top-oil temperature

nmin Minimum fan speed nmax Maximum fan speed
θS1 Lower threshold for top-oil θS2 Upper threshold for top-oil
temp. temp.
Fan speed based on load factor
The load factor is the ratio of load current to nominal current. If the load fac-
tor is less than the lower threshold, then the device uses the minimum fan
speed. If the load factor is greater than the upper threshold, then the device
uses the maximum fan speed. If the load factor is between the lower thresh-
old and upper threshold, then the device calculates the necessary speed us-
ing a straight line between both points S1 and S2.

8 Operation
The following diagrams show an example of a graph of the fan speeds

based on the load factor according to the set parameters.
L S1 L S2
100 n max
%
80
70
60
50
n 40
30
20
10 n min
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 % 140
Load factor I L/ I n
Figure 343: Fan speed based on load factor
n Fan speed θTop-oil Top-oil temperature

nmin Minimum fan speed nmax Maximum fan speed
LS1 Lower load factor threshold LS2 Upper load factor thresh-
old
Settings Parameters Cooling sy...rol
Name Value
Home
Min. fan run time after error 300 s
Minimum fan speed 10 %
Maximum fan speed 100 %
Lower threshold for top-oil temp. 20°C Events
Upper threshold for top-oil temp. 60°C
Lower load factor threshold 0%
Upper load factor threshold 100 %
Information
Recorder
Figure 344: Frequency-based cooling system control
trol.

8 Operation
Min. fan run time after error
You can use this parameter to set how long the fans are to continue running
if an error occurs in the cooling system control. The fans run at full power for
this duration.
Minimum fan speed
You can use this parameter to set the minimum fan speed.
Maximum fan speed
You can use this parameter to set the maximum fan speed.
Upper top-oil temperature threshold
You can use this parameter to set the top-oil temperature at which the fans
are to run at maximum speed.
Lower top-oil temperature threshold
You can use this parameter to set the top-oil temperature at which the fans
are to run at minimum speed.
Upper load factor threshold
You can use this parameter to set the load factor at which the fans are to run
at maximum speed.
Lower load factor threshold
You can use this parameter to set the load factor at which the fans are to run
at minimum speed.
8.7.8 Displaying status of cooling stages

You can display the status of the cooling stages. The following information is
available to you for every cooling stage:
▪ Status
– Gray: Cooling stage inactive
– Blue: Cooling stage active
– Yellow, red: Event message
▪ Operating time

8 Operation
▪ Parameter set
– Delay time
– Hysteresis
– Switch-on threshold
Figure 345: Status of cooling stages
► Go to Information > Cooling system > Cooling system control.

8 Operation
8.8 Cooling system monitoring (optional)

With the optional cooling monitoring function, you can monitor the cooling
system of a transformer.
8.8.1 Setting the cooling system monitoring function

You can set the general cooling system monitoring functions with the follow-
ing parameters.
Settings Parameters Cooling sy...ing
Name Value
Home
Run-in time evaluation 60 s
Operating duration 0s
Number of starts 0
Operating duration 0s Events
Number of starts 0
Information
Recorder
Figure 346: Cooling system monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Cooling system > Cooling system

monitoring.
Run-in time evaluation
You can use this parameter to set the length of time a cooling stage has to
be active before the device performs an evaluation of the values to be moni-
tored for the "Cooling system flow monitoring" function. This is used to pre-
vent incorrect event messages during the cooling system startup process.
Number of starts
The device records the number of starts of the cooling stage. You can use
this parameter to reset the number of starts of the relevant cooling stage if
you have replaced fans or pumps on the cooling system, for example.
Operating duration
The device records the operating duration of the cooling stage. You can use
this parameter to reset the operating duration of the relevant cooling stage if
you have replaced fans or pumps on the cooling system, for example.

8 Operation
8.8.2 Displaying status of cooling stages

You can display the status of the cooling stages. The following information is
available to you for every cooling stage:
▪ Status
– Gray: Cooling stage inactive
– Blue: Cooling stage active
– Yellow, red: Event message
▪ Operating time
▪ Parameter set
– Delay time
– Hysteresis
– Switch-on threshold
Figure 347: Status of cooling stages
► Go to Information > Cooling system > Cooling system control.
8.8.3 Cooling efficiency monitoring (optional)

The device can monitor the efficiency of a cooling system. To do this, the de-
vice evaluates the cooling efficiency using the following values:
▪ Thermal resistance Rth
▪ Comparison of the measured and the calculate upper oil temperature
▪ Comparison of the cooling system feed temperature and return tempera-
ture

8 Operation
8.8.3.1 Setting the cooling efficiency monitoring function
For cooling efficiency monitoring, you have to set the following parameters.
Settings Parameters Cooling ef...ing
Name Value
Home
Transformer no-load losses 20 kW
Transformer short-circuit losses 200 kW
Events
Information
Recorder
Figure 348: Cooling efficiency monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Cooling system > Cooling efficiency

monitoring.
Transformer short-circuit losses
You can use this parameter to set the transformer short-circuit losses (cop-
per losses) PCU for calculating the thermal resistance of the cooling system.
Transformer no-load losses
You can use this parameter to set the transformer no-load losses P0 for cal-
culating the thermal resistance of the cooling system.

8 Operation
8.8.3.2 Displaying the cooling efficiency
You can display the temporal progression of the average value of the ther-
mal resistance Rth of the cooling system over the last 10 days.
Figure 349: Cooling efficiency
► Go to Information > Cooling system > Cooling efficiency.
8.8.4 Cooling system flow monitoring (optional)

The device can monitor a cooling system with 2 oil-water cooling stages. To
do this, the device monitors the following values for the cooling media oil and
water:
▪ Temperature
– Feed
– Return
– Difference feed/return (oil only)
▪ Pressure
▪ Flow rate
▪ Pump current consumption

8 Operation
Oil
Water
Cooling stage 1 Cooling stage 2
0.96 bar 1.10 bar 0.96 bar 1.10 bar
3.6 m³/h 3.9 m³/h 3.6 m³/h 3.6 m³/h
45°C 8°C 47°C 8°C
38°C 14°C 41°C 15°C
Figure 350: Cooling system flow monitoring values
8.8.4.1 Setting the cooling system flow monitoring function
You can set the following limit values for the cooling media oil and water re-
spectively for monitoring the cooling system flow:
Measured value Lower Lower Upper Upper
limit 2 limit 1 limit 1 limit 2
Feed temperature << < > >>
Return temperature << < > >>
Temperature difference << < - -
Pressure << < - -
Flow rate << < - -
Pump current << < > >>
Table 152: Limit values for cooling system flow monitoring

8 Operation
Behavior If the measured value is higher than the upper limit (> or >>) or lower than
the lower limit (< or <<), the device triggers an event message.
Figure 351: Monitoring, cooling stage 1
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Cooling system > Cooling stage 1/2
monitoring.
Feed oil temperature
You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible feed
temperature of the oil circuit. You can set two upper and two lower limit val-
ues for each cooling stage.
Return oil temperature
You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible re-
turn temperature of the oil circuit. You can set two upper and two lower limit
values for each cooling stage.
Oil temperature difference
You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible tem-
perature difference between the feed and return of the oil circuit. You can set
two lower limit values for each cooling stage.
Δθ = θ f low - θreturn
Δθ Temperature difference θflow Feed temperature
θreturn Return temperature

8 Operation
Oil pressure
You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible
pressure of the oil circuit. You can set two lower limit values for each cooling
stage.
Oil flow
You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible flow
rate of the oil circuit. You can set two lower limit values for each cooling
stage.
Oil pump current
You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible cur-
rent consumption of the oil circuit pump. You can set two upper and two
lower limit values for each cooling stage.
Feed water temperature
You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible feed
temperature of the water circuit. You can set two upper and two lower limit
values for each cooling stage.
Return water temperature
You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible re-
turn temperature of the water circuit. You can set two upper and two lower
limit values for each cooling stage.
Water pressure
You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible
pressure of the water circuit. You can set two lower limit values for each
cooling stage.
Water flow
You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible flow
rate of the water circuit. You can set two lower limit values for each cooling
stage.
Water pump current
You can use these parameters to set the limit values for the permissible cur-
rent consumption of the water circuit pump. You can set two upper and two
lower limit values for each cooling stage.

8 Operation
8.8.4.2 Displaying the cooling system flow
You can display the temporal progression of the measured values of the
cooling system flow monitoring over the last 10 days.
Figure 352: Cooling system flow
► Go to Information > Cooling system > Cooling stage 1/2.

8 Operation
8.9 Bushings
8.9.1 Configuring bushing monitoring

Follow the notes in the following sections when configuring capacitance
monitoring and dissipation factor monitoring.
8.9.1.1 Set the field designation
The field designation is displayed in the bushing monitoring overview screen

[►Section 8.9.2, Page 456]. You can set a unique field designation for each
field.
Settings Parameters Bushing ...d 1
Name Value
Home
F1-C: Activate cap. monitoring On
F1-C: C1 phase L1 0.6 nF
F1-C: C1 phase L3 0.6 nF Events
F1-C: ΔC1 > 5.0 %
F1-C: ΔC1 >> 10.0 %
F1-C: Perform standardization No
F1-tanδ: Activate diss. factor mo... On Information
F1-tanδ: Δtanδ > 0.5 %

F1-tanδ: Perform standardization No
Recorder
Figure 353: Bushing monitoring
1. Go to Settings > Parameters > Bushing monitoring > Bushing moni-

toring field1/field2.
Field designation
You can use this parameter to set the field designation.
8.9.1.2 Configuring capacitance monitoring
The device monitors the amendment in the difference of capacitance C1 be-

tween the phases. If the capacitance C1 of all three bushings changes in the
same way (e.g. due to a temperature change), the difference in capaci-
tances ΔC1 remains constant. If the capacitance of one or two bushings
changes, the difference in capacitance also changes.

8 Operation
0,3 Pt, gestrichelt (5, 25)

Sollwert
Max.
You can set two limit values for monitoring the bushings in field 1 and field 2:
Arial 9 Pt
▪ F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >
1,5 Pt, rgb(0,147,214)
▪ F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >>
If the limit values are exceeded, the monitoring system triggers an event
message and issues Min.a signal at the digital output.
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen recommends the following limit values: F1/F2-

C: ΔC1 >: 5%, F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >>: 10%
0,7 Pt, Pfeil (Voll, 4, 30) Min. Max. Analogsignal
C1
L3
L1
L2
ΔC1
ΔC1>>
10 %
ΔC1> L3
5%
L1
L2
t
Figure 354: Capacitance monitoring
1 Status of the bushing C1 Capacitance C1

(gray: ok, yellow/red: limit
value exceeded)
ΔC1 Capacitance difference ΔC1> Limit value ΔC1>
ΔC1
ΔC1>> Limit value ΔC1>> L1, L2, L3 Phase L1, L2, L3
To monitor the capacitance of the bushings, the following parameters must

be set for commissioning the transformer:
▪ F1/F2-C: Activate cap. monitoring
▪ F1/F2-C: C1 Phase L1/L2/L3
▪ F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >

8 Operation
▪ F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >>

▪ F1/F2-C: Perform standardization
If bushing monitoring with the option "Monitoring of 6 bushings" is used, the

parameters for both field 1 (F1) and field 2 (F2) must be set. Field 1 and
field 2 each describe a set consisting of 3 bushings respectively. If bushing
monitoring with the option "Monitoring of 3 bushings" is used, only the pa-
rameters for field 1 are displayed.
Name Value
Home
F1-C: ΔC1 > 5.0 %
F1-C: ΔC1 >> 10.0 %

Recorder

F1/F2-C: Activate capacitance monitoring
You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate capacitance monitoring

for field 1 or field 2.
After being switched on, capacitance monitoring only becomes active once
a delay time has elapsed (factory setting of 2 minutes) in order to avoid er-
rors resulting from transients.
F1/F2-C: C1 phase L1
You can use this parameter to set the reference capacitance C1 for the
bushings of the L1 phases in field 1 or field 2. The reference value is the
value you have measured with an external measuring device for commis-
sioning.

8 Operation
sioning.
sioning.
F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >
You can use this parameter to set the limit value F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >.
F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >>
You can use this parameter to set the limit value F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >>.
F1/F2-C: Perform standardization
You must perform standardization for field 1 and field 2 to commission the
monitoring system. The standardization is used to compensate for measure-
ment tolerances along the measurement chain (bushing, bushing adapter
and bushing coupling unit).
Only perform the standardization while commissioning the monitoring sys-

tem and with bushings in good condition. Otherwise correct bushing moni-
toring functionality cannot be guaranteed.
To perform the standardization, proceed as follows:

ü The transformer is in a stable state (typical load, no on-load tap-change
operation or significant change in the transformer load, thermally stabi-
lized).
toring field1/field2 > F1/F2-C: Perform standardization.
2. Select the Yes option.
3. Press the Accept button to perform the standardization.
ð The standardization is carried out and the parameter is reset to the No
option.
4. Check the event messages [►Section 8.1.17.1, Page 234] to see if the
standardization was performed successfully. If this is not the case, resolve
the cause of the error and repeat the standardization.

8 Operation
0,3 Pt, gestrichelt (5, 25)
Sollwert
Max.
Arial 9 Pt
8.9.1.3 Configuring dissipation factor monitoring (MSENSE® BM-T)
1,5 Pt, rgb(0,147,214)
The device monitors the change in the difference of the dissipation factor
tanδ between the phases. If the tanδ of all 3 phases changes in the same
way (e.g. due to a Min.
temperature change), the difference in the dissipation fac-
tor Δtanδ remains constant. If the dissipation factor of one or two bushings
changes, the difference in the dissipation factor also changes.
You can set a limit value for monitoring the bushings in field 1 or field 2. If
Min. Max. Analogsignal
the0,7 Pt, value
limit Pfeil (Voll, 4, 30)
is exceeded, the monitoring system triggers an event mes-
sage and issues a signal at the digital output.
tanδ
L3
L1
L2
Δtanδ L3
Δtanδ>
L1
L2
t
Figure 356: Dissipation factor monitoring
1 Status of the bushing tanδ Dissipation factor tanδ

(gray: ok, yellow/red: limit
value exceeded)
Δtanδ Dissipation factor differ- Δtanδ> Limit value Δtanδ>
ence Δtanδ
L1, L2, L3 Phase L1, L2, L3
To monitor the dissipation factor of the bushings, you must set the following
parameters for commissioning the transformer:
▪ F1/F2-tanδ: Activate diss. factor monit.
▪ F1/F2-tanδ: tanδ phase L1/L2/L3
▪ F1/F2-tanδ: Δtanδ >
▪ F1/F2-tanδ: Perform standardization

8 Operation

parameters for both field 1 (F1) and field 2 (F2) must be set. Field 1 and
field 2 each describe a set consisting of 3 bushings respectively. If bushing
monitoring with the option "Monitoring of 3 bushings" is used, only the pa-
rameters for field 1 are displayed.
Name Value
Home
F1-C: ΔC1 > 5.0 %
F1-C: ΔC1 >> 10.0 %

Recorder

F1/F2-tanδ: Activate dissipation factor monitoring
You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate dissipation factor moni-
toring in field 1 or field 2.
After being switched on, dissipation factor monitoring only becomes active
once a delay time has elapsed (measured value display after approx. 7 min-
utes, monitoring after approx. 1 hour) in order to avoid errors resulting from
transients.
8.9.1.3.1 F1/F2 tanδ: tanδ phase L1
You can use this parameter to set the reference dissipation factor tanδ for
the bushing of phase L1 in field 1 or field 2. The reference value is the value
you have measured with an external measuring device for commissioning.

8 Operation
8.9.1.3.4 Limit value F1/F2-tanδ: Δtanδ >
You can use this parameter to set the limit value F1/F2-tanδ: Δtanδ >.
F1/F2-tanδ: Perform standardization
You can use this parameter to perform a standardization of the dissipation

factor monitoring in field 1 and field 2. This clears all of the measured and
calculated values for dissipation factor monitoring.
To perform the standardization, proceed as follows:

toring field1/field2 > F1/F2-tanδ: Perform standardization.
2. Select the Yes option.
3. Press the Accept button to perform the standardization.
ð The standardization is carried out and the parameter is reset to the No
option.
4. Check the event messages [►Section 8.1.17.1, Page 234] to see if the
standardization was performed successfully.
8.9.2 Displaying the state of the bushings

The device displays the current state of the bushings and the following mea-
sured values:
▪ Status indicator for the bushing based on the set limit values
– Gray: Everything OK
– Yellow: The capacitance difference ΔC1 is greater than the limit value
ΔC1 >
Only with option BM-T – Yellow: The dissipation factor difference Δtanδ is greater than the limit
value Δtanδ >
– Red: The capacitance difference ΔC1 is greater than the limit value
ΔC1 >>
▪ C1: Calculated (compensated) bushing capacitance
▪ ∆C1: Percentage deviation of the capacitance difference ΔC1 from the ref-
erence capacitance C1

8 Operation
Only with option BM-T ▪ 3-phase reference system:

– tanδ: Calculated (compensated) dissipation factor of the bushing
– Δtanδ: Dissipation factor difference Δtanδ
– U ref: Currently measured reference system voltage

following values will be displayed in two separate views for field 1 (F1) and
field 2 (F2).
Figure 358: State of the bushings
► Go to Information > Bushings > Bushing monitoring field1/field2.
8.9.3 Displaying the capacitance progression

You can display the temporal progression of the capacitance C1 and the ca-
pacitance difference ΔC1 over the last 28 days.
Figure 359: Capacitance progression

8 Operation
► Go to Information > Bushings > Capacitance C1/ΔC1 field1/field2.
8.9.4 Show dissipation factor curve (MSENSE® BM-T)

You can display the temporal progression of the dissipation factor tanδ and
the dissipation factor difference Δtanδ over the last 28 days.
Figure 360: Dissipation factor progression
► Go to Information > Bushings > Dissipation factor tanδ/Δtanδ field1/

field2.

8 Operation
8.10 Protective devices
8.10.1 Displaying the measured values of the Buchholz relay (optional)

Buchholz relay over the last 10 days.
Figure 361: Measured value trend of the Buchholz relay
► Go to Information > Protective devices > Buchholz relay.
8.10.2 Displaying the measured values of the pressure relief device

(optional)
pressure relief device (PRD) over the last 10 days.
Figure 362: Measured value trend of the pressure relief device
► Go to Information > Protective devices > Pressure relief device.

8 Operation
8.10.3 Displaying protective device status (optional)

The overview display shows you the current status of the connected protec-
tive devices.
Figure 363: Overview display of the status of the protective devices
► Go to Information > Protective devices > Protective devices status >

Buchholz relay.

8 Operation
8.11 Insulating fluids
8.11.1 Displaying the measured value trend of the oil level and
dehydrating breather (optional)
You can display the temporal progression of the oil level and the measured
values of the dehydrating breather over the last 10 days. To do so, proceed
as follows:
Figure 364: Measured value trend of the oil level and the dehydrating breather measured values
► Go to Information > Insulating fluids > Historic oil level/dehydrating

breather.

9 Fault elimination
9 Fault elimination
This chapter describes how to rectify simple operating faults.
9.1 Motor-drive unit fault elimination
9.1.1 Safety instructions

Danger of death or severe injury from explosive gases in the on-load tap-
changer / de-energized tap-changer, in the pipework system, at the dehy-
drating breather opening and from flying parts and hot oil splashing!
► If a protective device has been tripped or you suspect a fault, first check
the transformer, on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-changer and mo-
tor-drive unit. Never operate the motor-drive unit electrically or with the
hand crank beforehand as long as the transformer is energized.
► Do not resume operation until the troubleshooting has been completed.
► Make sure that only trained technicians perform the work.
► Use suitable personal protective equipment/clothing.
► Ensure that there are no naked flames, hot surfaces or sparks (for exam-
ple caused by static charging) in the immediate surroundings and that
none occur.
► Ensure that all safety equipment for the on-load tap-changer / de-ener-
gized tap-changer is ready for use.
► Ensure that the oil compartment of the on-load tap-changer is correctly
filled with oil as per the instructions.
9.1.2 General information

Document each fault, even if it is easy to rectify.
In the event of faults on the on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-changer

or motor-drive unit, which cannot be easily and immediately corrected on
site, or if a protective device has been tripped, please inform your authorized
MR representative, the transformer manufacturer or contact us directly at:
Technical Service
Postfach 12 03 60
93025 Regensburg
Germany
Phone: +49 94140 90-0
Fax: +49 9 41 40 90-7001

9 Fault elimination
E-mail: service@reinhausen.com
Internet: www.reinhausen.com
9.1.3 Fault in the environment of the motor-drive unit

Fault description Measure
No change in voltage on the transformer ▪ Contact MR
despite change in position on motor-
drive unit
Noises on drive shaft or motor-drive unit ▪ Ensure that the motor-drive unit is at-
when changing tap position tached correctly, in accordance with
the "Assembly" chapter.
▪ Make sure that the drive shaft includ-
ing protective cover is assembled cor-
rectly, in accordance with the operat-
ing instructions for the on-load tap-
changer / de-energized tap-changer.
Table 153: Fault in the environment of the motor-drive unit
9.1.4 Fault in the motor-drive unit when the tap-change operation has
not been ended
If the motor-drive unit stops and the arrow of the tap-change indicator does
not point in the area highlighted in gray (see the "Indication Field" section,
position 3), then the tap-change operation has not been ended correctly.
This is a stationary state that is not allowed and it must be rectified im-
mediately.If you cannot rectify the fault immediately, switch off the trans-
former. Contact the Technical Service department at Maschinenfabrik Rein-
hausen GmbH immediately.

9 Fault elimination
If you notice a fault in the motor-drive unit right away, you should immedi-
ately start troubleshooting as described in the following table.
Tripping of the motor protective switch ▪ Hand crank operation is prohibited
Q1 ▪ Switch on Q1 only once
▪ If Q1 does not trigger again and if no
other fault is present, the motor-drive
unit automatically ends the tap-
change operation that was started.
▪ If Q1 is triggered again, do not at-
tempt any more tap-change opera-
tions and contact MR.
Interruption of the supply voltage to the ▪ Hand crank operation is prohibited
motor-drive unit or motor controller ▪ Reestablish the voltage supply
▪ Once the voltage supply returns, the
motor-drive unit automatically ends
the tap-change operation that was
started.
Component defect in the motor-drive unit ▪ Hand crank operation is prohibited
▪ Contact MR
Table 154: Fault in the motor-drive unit when the tap-change operation has not been ended
9.1.5 Fault in the motor-drive unit after the tap-change operation is

ended correctly
Tripping of the motor protective switch ▪ Switch on Q1
Q1
Interruption of the supply voltage to the ▪ Reestablish the voltage supply
motor-drive unit or motor controller
Component defect in the motor-drive unit ▪ Contact MR
Table 155: Fault in the motor-drive unit after the tap-change operation is ended correctly
9.1.6 Hand crank operation in the event of faults
Hand crank operation in the event of faults
An operation is considered an emergency operation if a tap-change opera-

tion is absolutely necessary when a transformer is energized, despite a fault
in the motor-drive unit.

9 Fault elimination
WARNING Danger of explosion!

Unauthorized operation of the motor-drive unit with the hand crank may re-
sult in death or serious injury.
► Never operate the motor-drive unit electrically or with the hand crank be-
fault in the transformer or on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-
changer.
► Never use the hand crank to complete a tap-change operation that has
begun electrically, but has not been ended completely.
► If the hand crank is difficult to move, you must stop using it.
► When operating the motor-drive unit with the hand crank, never reverse
the direction of rotation.
► If there is any doubt about the on-load tap-changer / de-energized tap-
changer being in proper working condition or about the cause of a fault in
the motor-drive unit, contact the Technical Service department of Maschi-
nenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH immediately.
► To operate the motor-drive unit manually, only use the hand crank
mounted in the motor-drive unit.
For a detailed description of operation using the hand crank, refer to the
"Operation" chapter.

Characteristics/details Cause Remedy
No tap-change operation possi- Motor-drive unit not synchronized Synchronize motor-drive unit [►Section 8.6.7,
ble Page 425].
▪ Motor status "Error"
No tap-change operation possi- Motor voltage outside the permissi- Check the voltage supply.
ble ble range
No tap-change operation possi- Mechanical blocking of the motor- Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
ble drive unit or the on-load tap-
▪ Event "Blocking the drives" ac- changer
tive.
No tap-change operation possi- The OLTC-PreCheck function is Check measured values:
ble active and one of the limit values ▪ On-load tap-changer oil level
▪ Status display for OLTC- has been exceeded.
▪ On-load tap-changer oil temperature
PreCheck is red
▪ Transformer current
Check the configuration
Wiring error Check wiring as per connection diagram.
Sensor defective Replace sensor.

9 Fault elimination

No tap-change operation possi- Wiring error Check wiring as per connection diagram.
ble
Cam switch S13 is defective Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
▪ No signal from cam switch
S13
No tap-change operation possi- Motor protection device defective Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
ble
Synchronizing the motor-drive Wiring error Check wiring as per connection diagram.
unit not possible
Tap position indicator not con- Connect the tap position indicator according to
nected. the connection diagram.
Mechanical blocking of the motor- Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
drive unit or the on-load tap-
changer
Synchronizing the motor-drive Wiring error (polarity reversal) Check wiring as per connection diagram.
unit not possible
▪ Motor-drive unit switching in
the wrong direction
Table 156: Motor-drive unit

9 Fault elimination
9.2 Fault elimination ISM (hardware and software)
9.2.1 General faults

Characteristics/details Cause Corrective measure
No function No voltage supply Check the voltage supply
▪ Device not starting Fuse tripped Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH
No function Rotary switch of CPU assembly Correct position of rotary switch:
▪ ERR LED of the CPU assem- moved ▪ Position 0
bly lights up ▪ RUN position
Configuration error Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH
Relays chatter High EMC load Use shielded cables or external filters
Poor grounding Check the functional ground
Table 157: General faults
9.2.2 Human-machine interface

No display/screen is loaded Power supply interrupted. Check the voltage supply.
Error when loading the current Press [F5] key to update the screen.
screen in the browser.
Fuse faulty. Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen.
Connection cannot be established Connection cable defective. Check connection cable.
with visualization
IP addresses of visualization and Check the setting of the IP addresses of the de-
SCADA are in the same subnet. vice and correct where necessary.
PC not in same subnet as visual- Check the setting of the IP addresses of the de-
ization. vice and PC and correct where necessary.
Browser displays an SSL warning The browser does not accept an Import signed SSL certificate or adjust browser
when establishing a connection to SSL connection with a signed settings.
the visualization. certificate that is non-public (this
is the default status of the de-
vice).
The device SSL certificate has Import SSL certificate.
expired.
The device date/time is set incor- Set the date and time.
rectly.
When using time synchronization via SNTP:
check SNTP server.
IP address of interface ETH2.2 Import SSL certificate with new IP address ("Al-
has changed. ternative applicant name").
Table 158: Human-machine interface

9 Fault elimination
9.2.3 Torque monitoring

Limit value M1 to M6 > exceeded Error in the motor-drive unit power Check whether a voltage interruption or voltage
▪ Event No. 1819, 1821, 1823, supply drop occurred across one or more phases of
1825, 1827 or 1829 the power supply during the tap-change opera-
tion.
If yes, you can acknowledge this event. If this
event does not reoccur, you can continue to
operate the on-load tap-changer.
Drive shafts sluggish Check the ease of operation of the drive shafts
and gears.
Other cause or if the event reoc- Export the service data and contact Maschi-
curs nenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
Limit value M7/M8 > exceeded Error in the motor-drive unit power Check whether a voltage interruption or voltage
▪ Event No. 1831 or 1833 supply drop occurred across one or more phases of
the power supply during the tap-change opera-
tion.
and gears.
With on-load tap-changer Export the service data and contact Maschi-
OILTAP® M, OILTAP® R or nenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
VACUTAP® VR: final locking de-
vice defective.
Other cause or if the event reoc- Export the service data and contact Maschi-
curs nenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
Limit value M1 to M6 >> ex- Error in the motor-drive unit power Check whether a voltage interruption or voltage
ceeded supply drop occurred across one or more phases of
▪ Event No. 1820, 1822, 1824, the power supply during the tap-change opera-
1826, 1828 or 1830 tion.
and gears.
Other cause or if the event reoc- Do not acknowledge the event.
curs Export the service data and contact Maschi-
nenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.

9 Fault elimination

Limit value M7/M8 >> exceeded Error in the motor-drive unit power Check whether a voltage interruption or voltage
▪ Event No. 1832 or 1834 supply drop occurred across one or more phases of
the power supply during the tap-change opera-
tion.
and gears.
With on-load tap-changer Export the service data and contact Maschi-
OILTAP® M, OILTAP® R or nenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
VACUTAP® VR: final locking de-
vice defective.
Other cause or if the event reoc- Do not acknowledge the event.
curs Export the service data and contact Maschi-
Limit value Md-Max exceeded Error in the motor-drive unit power Check whether there is voltage on all three
▪ Event No. 1801 supply phases of the power supply unit.
Error in the motor-drive unit wiring Check the RAISE/LOWER relay wiring.
Check the motor-drive unit control circuit.
Other causes (e.g. defective on- Do not actuate the on-load tap-changer.
load tap-changer) Export the service data and contact Maschi-
Immediate intervention There is an immediate need for in- Check pending events.
▪ Event No. 1884 tervention. Eliminate fault in accordance with section Fault
in the motor-drive unit when the tap-change op-
eration has not been ended [►Section 9.1.4,
Page 463].
Electrical tap-change operation The tap changer is in an undefined Check motor protective switch and motor-drive
not complete position. unit supply voltage.
▪ Event No. 1817 Eliminate fault in accordance with section Fault
Page 463].
Change-over selector operation Limit value Md-Max exceeded. The Check motor protective switch and motor-drive
not completed tap changer is in an undefined po- unit supply voltage.
▪ Event No. 1885 sition. Eliminate fault in accordance with section Fault
Page 463].
Tripping of motor protective The motor protective switch has Check the wiring and motor protective switch
switch faulty tripped, but tripping was not de- settings.
▪ Event No. 1886 tected.
Blocking faulty On-load tap-change operations Check wiring and contactor K53.
▪ Event No. 1887 were blocked, but an on-load tap-
change operation was detected.

9 Fault elimination

Md-Max torque monitoring not The Md-Max torque monitoring is The event is triggered with other events. Check
possible not currently possible. the other events in order to localize the error
▪ Event No. 1904 search.
8-window torque monitoring not The 8-window torque monitoring is The event is triggered with other events. Check
possible not currently possible. the other events in order to localize the error
▪ Event No. 1864 search.
Blocking active On-load tap-change operations are The event is triggered with other events. Check
▪ Event No. 1870 blocked. the other events in order to localize the error
search.
OLTC and MD insufficiently cen- The on-load tap-changer and mo- Center the on-load tap-changer and motor-
tered tor-drive unit are insufficiently cen- drive unit in accordance with the operating in-
▪ Event No. 1808 tered. structions.
Motor-drive unit power supply Voltage too high or too low Check the motor-drive unit power supply.
faulty Take measures to stabilize the voltage during
▪ Event No. 1871, 1872, 1881, operation of the motor-drive unit (e.g. conduc-
1882 tor lengths, conductor cross-section).
MD: Incorrect power supply fre- Incorrect power supply frequency Check the motor-drive unit power supply.
quency
▪ Event No. 1883
Power failure during switching Power failure Determine the cause of the power failure.
▪ Event No. 1903
MD: Voltage difference Difference in voltage between the Check the motor-drive unit power supply.
▪ Event No. 1803 phases greater than 10 V
MD: Current difference Difference in current between the Check the motor-drive unit power supply.
▪ Event No. 1804 phases greater than 0.4 A (ED100)
or 0.8 A (ED200)
Increased torque in window M7 Torques in window M7 higher than -
▪ Event No. 1905 in window M8.
Table 159: Torque monitoring

9 Fault elimination
9.2.4 Temperature monitoring

MD interior temperature limit The motor-drive unit interior tem- Check the measured value for plausibility.
value perature is greater than the > limit This event will be reset automatically once the
▪ Event no. 1858, 1859, 1860 or value. measured value is lower than the limit value
1861 The motor-drive unit interior tem- again.
perature is greater than the >> limit
value.
The motor-drive unit interior tem- Check the measured value for plausibility.
perature is less than the < limit This event will be reset automatically once the
value. measured value is greater than the limit value
The motor-drive unit interior tem- again.
perature is less than the << limit
value.
Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input
[►Section 8.1.15, Page 228].
Check the limit value setting.
▪ Sensor CT373, terminal X6.1:1/4
Sensor defective Replace sensor
MD interior temperature invalid Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input
▪ Event No. 1325 [►Section 8.1.15, Page 228].
Sensor for MD interior tempera- Sensor defective Replace sensor
ture defective
▪ Event No. 1837
Ambient temperature limit value Ambient temperature is greater Check the measured value for plausibility.
▪ Event no. 1026, 1027, 1028 or than the > limit value. This event will be reset automatically once the
1029 Ambient temperature is greater measured value is lower than the limit value
than the >> limit value. again.
Ambient temperature is less than Check the measured value for plausibility.
the < limit value. This event will be reset automatically once the
Ambient temperature is less than measured value is greater than the limit value
the << limit value. again.
[►Section 8.1.15, Page 228].

9 Fault elimination

Ambient temperature invalid Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input
Sensor for ambient temperature Sensor defective Replace sensor
defective
▪ Event No. 1844
Top-oil temperature limit value Top-oil temperature is greater than Check the measured value for plausibility.
▪ Event no. 1112, 1113, 1114 or the > limit value. This event will be reset automatically once the
1115 Top-oil temperature is greater than measured value is lower than the limit value
the >> limit value. again.
Top-oil temperature is less than < Check the measured value for plausibility.
limit value. This event will be reset automatically once the
Top-oil temperature is less than measured value is greater than the limit value
the << limit value. again.
[►Section 8.1.15, Page 228].
▪ Sensor CT375, terminal X6.1:9-12
Upper oil temperature invalid Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input
Sensor for top-oil temperature Sensor defective Replace sensor
defective
▪ Event No. 1845

9 Fault elimination

OLTC oil temperature limit value On-load tap-changer oil tempera- Check the measured value for plausibility.
Single-column application: ture is greater than the > limit This event will be reset automatically once the
value. measured value is lower than the limit value
▪ Event No. 1106, 1107, 1108,
or 1109 On-load tap-changer oil tempera- again.
ture is greater than the >> limit
Multi-column application: value.
▪ Event No. 1395, 1396, 1397 or
On-load tap-changer oil tempera- Check the measured value for plausibility.
1398 (column A)
ture is less than the < limit value. This event will be reset automatically once the
▪ Event No. 1332, 1334, 1336,
On-load tap-changer oil tempera- measured value is greater than the limit value
or 1338 (column B)
ture is less than the << limit value. again.
▪ Event No. 1333, 1335, 1337,
or 1339 (column C) Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input
[►Section 8.1.15, Page 228].
Single-column application:
Multi-column application:
▪ Column A: Sensor CT387, terminal
X6.1:13-16
▪ Column B: Sensor CT388, terminal X6.2:1-4
▪ Column C: Sensor CT389, terminal X6.2:5-8
OLTC oil temperature invalid Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input
Single-column application: [►Section 8.1.15, Page 228].
▪ Event No. 1121 Check the limit value setting.
Multi-column application: Wiring error Check wiring as per connection diagram.

▪ Event No. 1399 (column A) Single-column application:
▪ Event No. 1326 (column B) ▪ Sensor CT387, terminal X6.1:13-16
▪ Event No. 1327 (column C) Multi-column application:
X6.1:13-16
Sensor for OLTC oil temperature Sensor defective Replace sensor
defective
▪ Event No. 1838
▪ Event No. 1402 (column A)
▪ Event No. 1839 (column B)
▪ Event No. 1840 (column C)

9 Fault elimination

Selector oil temperature limit Selector oil temperature is greater Check the measured value for plausibility.
value than the > limit value. This event will be reset automatically once the
Single-column application: Selector oil temperature is greater measured value is lower than the limit value
▪ Event no. 1846, 1847, 1848 or than the >> limit value. again.
1849 Selector oil temperature is less Check the measured value for plausibility.
Multi-column application than the < limit value. This event will be reset automatically once the
▪ 1876, 1877, 1878 or 1879 Selector oil temperature is less measured value is greater than the limit value
(column A) than the << limit value. again.
▪ 1850, 1851, 1852 or 1853 Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input
(column B) [►Section 8.1.15, Page 228].
▪ 1854, 1855, 1856 or 1857 Check the limit value setting.
(column C)
Selector oil temperature invalid Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input
Single-column application: [►Section 8.1.15, Page 228].
▪ Event No. 1328 Check the limit value setting.
Multi-column application: Wiring error Check wiring as per connection diagram.

▪ Event No. 1875 (column A) ▪ Sensor CT390, terminal X6.1:9-12
▪ Event No. 1329 (column B) Sensor defective Replace sensor
Sensor for selector oil tempera- Sensor defective Replace sensor
ture defective
▪ Event No. 1841
▪ Event No. 1880 (column A)
▪ Event No. 1842 (column B)

9 Fault elimination

Oil temperature difference limit Oil temperature difference between Check the measured value for plausibility.
value selector and diverter switch is This event will be reset automatically once the
Single-column application: greater than the > limit value. measured value is lower than the limit value
▪ Event No. 1890 or 1891 Oil temperature difference between again.
selector and diverter switch is
Multi-column application: greater than the >> limit value.
▪ Event No. 1892 or 1893 (col-
umn A)
[►Section 8.1.15, Page 228].
▪ Event No. 1894 or 1895 (col-
umn B)
▪ Event No. 1896 or 1897 (col- Wiring error Check wiring as per connection diagram.
umn C) Single-column application:
▪ Sensor CT387, terminal X6.1:13-16 and
sensor CT390, terminal X6.1:9-12
X6.1:13-16 and sensor CT390, terminal
X6.1:9-12
Sensor for bottom-oil tempera- Sensor defective Replace sensor
ture defective
▪ Event No. 1862
Table 160: Temperature monitoring
9.2.5 Maintenance messages

OLTC maintenance is required The limit value for maintenance Carry out maintenance work and then confirm
▪ Event No. 1146 has been reached. this in the visualization.
Maintenance work has been car- Confirm maintenance work in the visualization.
ried out but not confirmed in the vi-
sualization.
Visualization operations counter Compare visualization operations counter with
offset. the motor-drive unit operations counter and
correct if necessary.
Maintenance data incorrect Call up the maintenance log and check the
date of the last maintenance work.

9 Fault elimination

Plan OLTC maintenance The limit value for planning mainte- Plan maintenance and carry out maintenance
▪ Event No. 1145 nance has been reached. work soon, and then confirm this in the visual-
ization.
sualization.
Oil change and cleaning required The limit value for maintenance Carry out maintenance work and then confirm
sualization.
Oil exchange and cleaning has to The limit value for planning mainte- Plan maintenance and carry out maintenance
be planned nance has been reached. work soon, and then confirm this in the visual-
▪ Event No. 1170 ization.
sualization.
DSI replacement is required The limit value for maintenance Carry out maintenance work and then confirm
sualization.

9 Fault elimination

Plan DSI replacement The limit value for planning mainte- Plan maintenance and carry out maintenance
ization.
sualization.
Selector maintenance is required The limit value for maintenance Carry out maintenance work and then confirm
sualization.
Plan selector maintenance The limit value for planning mainte- Plan maintenance and carry out maintenance
ization.
sualization.
Oil filter replacement is required The limit value for maintenance Carry out maintenance work and then confirm
▪ Signal at X1:105 and 1000 tap-
change operations made
sualization.
Wiring error Check the wiring of terminals X1:105/106.

9 Fault elimination

Plan oil filter replacement The limit value for maintenance Carry out maintenance work and then confirm
▪ Signal at X1:105 and 900 tap-
change operations made
sualization.
Wiring error Check the wiring of terminals X1:105/106.
Replacement or change of con- The limit value for maintenance Carry out maintenance work and then confirm
tacts is required has been reached. this in the visualization.
▪ Event No. 1168 Maintenance work has been car- Confirm maintenance work in the visualization.
sualization.
Load current measurement faulty. Check measured values.
Check the wiring of the assembly for load cur-
rent measuring (UI or AIO).
Plan replacement or change of The limit value for planning mainte- Plan maintenance and carry out maintenance
contacts nance has been reached. work soon, and then confirm this in the visual-
▪ Event No. 1167 ization.
sualization.
Load current measurement faulty. Check measured values.
Check the wiring of the assembly for load cur-
rent measuring (UI or AIO).
OLTC replacement is required The limit value for maintenance Carry out maintenance work and then confirm
sualization.
Plan OLTC replacement The limit value for planning mainte- Plan maintenance and carry out maintenance
ization.
sualization.
Table 161: Maintenance messages

9 Fault elimination
9.2.6 Function monitoring

Both tap-change supervisory Tap-change supervisory control Check the function of the tap-change supervi-
control contacts ON contacts S80/S81 sticking. sory control contacts S80/S81.
▪ Event No. 1805 Relays K80/K81 defective. Check the function of the relays K80/K81.
Wiring error Check the wiring between the tap-change su-
pervisory contacts S80/S81 and the relays K80/
K81 in accordance with the connection dia-
gram.
Both tap-change supervisory Dropout of one or more phases of For multi-column applications: Check whether
control contacts OFF the motor-drive unit power supply all on-load tap-changers are in the same tap
▪ Event No. 1806 during the last tap-change opera- position. If yes, you can acknowledge this
tion. event. And continue to operate the on-load tap-
changers.
Drive shaft break Check the drive shafts.
If the drive shaft has broken, the diverter switch
insert must be checked. Contact Maschinen-
fabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
Dropout of the control voltage for Check the control voltage for the tap-change
the tap-change supervisory control supervisory control contacts S80/S81.
contacts S80/S81.
Relays K80/K81 defective. Check the function of the relays K80/K81.
Wiring error Check the wiring between the tap-change su-
pervisory contacts S80/S81 and the relays K80/
K81 in accordance with the connection dia-
gram.
Tap-change supervisory control Wiring error Check the wiring between the tap-change su-
wiring error pervisory contacts S80/S81 and the relays K80/
▪ Event No. 1810 K81 in accordance with the connection dia-
gram.
Position acquisition faulty. The position sensor is not cali- Check wiring of the position sensor B30 as per
▪ Event No. 1818 brated or is defective. connection diagram. Export service data. Con-
tact MR. In the event of replacement: Calibrate
position sensor.
Invalid tap position Wiring error Check wiring as per connection diagram.
▪ Event No. 51 The position sensor is defective. Export service data. Contact MR. In the event
of replacement: Calibrate position sensor.
Calculating the on-load tap- Configuration error Check the configuration of the analog input
changer current [►Section 8.1.15, Page 228].
▪ Event No. 1899 Wiring error Check wiring as per connection diagram.

9 Fault elimination

Motor protective switch The motor protective switch has Switch the motor protective switch back on (po-
▪ Event No. 156 been switched off manually (posi- sition I).
tion O).
The motor protective switch been Check the monitoring system event messages.
has triggered by the monitoring Check the cause for the motor protective switch
system triggering.
The motor protective switch was Check the motor circuit.
triggered due to a short circuit of
overload of the motor circuit.
The motor protective switch was Check the cause for the motor protective switch
triggered by an external switch at being triggered by the external switch.
the terminals X1:14/15.
Emergency operation input If the X100 bridge is inserted, the Remove the X100 bridge to end emergency op-
(X100) blocking function is disabled. eration.
▪ Event No. 1869 Auxiliary contactor K100 is defec- Check the function of auxiliary contactor K100.
tive.
Overcurrent input A signal is present at the overcur- Check signal source.
▪ Event No. 1868 rent input.
Wiring error Check wiring.
MD: Incorrect power supply fre- The power supply frequency did Check the motor-drive unit nameplate. Connect
quency during switching not match the rated frequency of a voltage supply with the correct frequency.
▪ Event No. 1802 the motor-drive unit during switch-
ing.
Contact wear calculation The contact wear cannot be calcu- Export the service data and contact Maschi-
▪ Event No. 1169 lated. nenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
OLTC synchronization insuffi- The tap changers do not switch Set synchronous switching of the tap changers
cient with sufficient synchronicity. in accordance with the operating instructions.
▪ Event No. 1812
Tap-change operation without di- A diverter switch operation was not Check the drive shaft, tap-change supervisory
verter switch operation detected during the tap-change op- control contacts S80/S81, relays K16/K17 and
▪ Event No. 1807 eration. the position-sensor wiring. Export service data.
Contact MR.
Table 162: Function monitoring
9.2.7 Other faults

If you cannot find a solution to a malfunction, please contact Technical Ser-
vice and have the following information available:
▪ Serial number
– Nameplate (can be found on CPU assembly)
▪ Software version

9 Fault elimination
Please provide answers to the following questions:

▪ Has the software been updated?
▪ Has there previously been a problem with this device?
▪ Have you previously contacted Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen about this is-
sue? If yes, then who was the contact?
Technical Service

Technical Service
Postfach 12 03 60
93025 Regensburg
Germany
Phone: +49 94140 90-0
Fax: +49 9 41 40 90-7001
You will find an overview of the services available for the product in the cus-
tomer portal: https://portal.reinhausen.com

10 Inspection and maintenance

This chapter contains information about inspecting and maintaining the prod-
uct.
10.1 Care
10.1.1 Cleaning the control cabinet

You can clean the housing of the control cabinet with a moist cloth. You can
clean the inside of the control cabinet with a dry cloth.
10.1.2 Cleaning the VS 1 vibration sensor

You can clean the VS 1 vibration sensor assembly (sensor, adapter, kick
guard) and the sensor cable with a moist cloth.
10.1.3 Cleaning the bushing adapter and the bushing coupling unit
You can clean the bushing adapter and the bushing coupling unit with a
moist cloth.
10.1.4 Cleaning the gear motor

You can clean the gear motor with a moist cloth.

10.2 Inspection
Carry out the following inspections on the motor-drive unit within the speci-
fied intervals:
Interval Action Detail
For checking operations Visual checks ▪ Check the control cabinet seals.
on the transformer Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH if the seals are
not in perfect condition.
▪ Check the control cabinet lacquer coating. If damaged,
touch up the lacquer coating [►Section 6.1, Page 90].
Annually Checking the motor pro- ü The motor protective switch Q1 is switched on (posi-
tective switch tion I).
1. Trip the motor protective switch from the control
room.
ð The motor protective switch is tripped (position O).
If the motor protective switch is not tripped, check
the switch's connection to the control room and
contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH if nec-
essary.
2. Switch on the motor protective switch again (position
I).
ð The tripping process for the motor protective switch
from the control room is checked.
Checking the residual cur- 1. Press the test button T on the residual current circuit
rent circuit breaker breaker.
ð The residual current circuit breaker must trip imme-
diately.
2. Have the effectiveness of the protective measures in
the installation checked by an electrically skilled per-
son.
Checking the heating 1. Set the thermostat in the control cabinet to a temper-
ature that is lower than the current ambient tempera-
ture.
ð After 15 minutes, the heating must have warmed
up tangibly.
2. Reset the thermostat to the previous value (see con-
nection diagram for default setting).
Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH if the heating is
not in perfect condition.
Every 4 years Check ▪ Check the control cabinet for soiling, damage and corro-
sion, and clean it.
▪ Have the potential connections and groundings checked by
an electrically skilled person and retighten the screw con-
nections where necessary.
▪ Check the screw connections of all electrical components
and tighten if necessary (tightening torque 2.5...3 Nm).

Table 163: Inspection plan
10.3 Maintenance
10.3.1 Maintaining motor-drive unit

Maintenance of the motor-drive unit is not required. When maintaining the
on-load tap-changer/de-energized tap-changer/ARS, carry out a function test
on the motor-drive unit.
Switching operations Activity
250,000 With a 1 AC motor (see connection diagram or name-
plate): replace centrifugal switch.
Contact the Technical Service department of Maschi-
nenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH for information.
600,000 Contact the Technical Service department of Maschi-
1,000,000 Replace cam switches, relays, contactors, etc.
Contact the Technical Service department of Maschi-
Table 164: Maintenance plan
We strongly recommend having on-load tap-changer maintenance and mo-

tor-drive unit checks carried out by our Technical Service department. This
ensures, in addition to the correct performance of all work, that certain com-
ponents will be upgraded to the latest state of technology and manufacturing
status.
If the maintenance and checks are not carried out by our Technical Service
department, please ensure that the personnel who carry out the mainte-
nance are trained by MR or are otherwise suitably qualified to carry out the
work. In such cases, we would ask you to forward to us a report on the main-
tenance performed so we can update our maintenance files. For inquiries
about spare parts, please provide the serial number (see nameplates on the
on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit) and the number of tap-change op-
erations.
Technical Service

Technical Service
Postfach 12 03 60
93025 Regensburg
Germany
Phone: +49 94140 90-0
Fax: +49 9 41 40 90-7001

10.3.2 Heating maintenance

The heating must be replaced after an operating duration of 20 years. Con-
tact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH for this.

11 Removal
11 Removal
An energized transformer and energized on-load tap-changer/de-energized
tap-changer/ARS and motor-drive unit components can cause death or seri-
ous injuries during disassembly!
► Switch off the voltage supply.
► Secure the voltage supply to prevent an unintentional restart.
► Ensure that everything is de-energized.
► Cover or cordon off adjacent energized parts.
11.1 Removing the drive shaft

► Remove the vertical drive shaft and protective tube between the bevel
gear and control cabinet.
Figure 365: Removing the protective tube and horizontal drive shaft

11 Removal
11.2 Disassembling gear motor

To disassemble the gear motor, also observe the notes in the operating in-
structions of the associated on-load tap-changer to reduce the oil level in the
on-load tap-changer.
1. Remove connecting cable between gear motor and control cabinet.
2. Lower the on-load tap-changer oil level to below the level of the on-load
tap-changer head cover.
3. Remove gear motor screw connection on the on-load tap-changer head
(3x M12).
4. Lift the gear motor from the on-load tap-changer head using the lifting
gear.
5. Cover exposed shafts and seals to protect them from dirt and damage.
ð The gear motor is disassembled.
11.3 Removing the bushing adapter and bushing coupling unit

WARNING Time delayed explosion hazard and fire hazard!
If the test tap is not grounded or not properly connected to the bushing
adapter, the bushing may be destroyed and the transformer may catch fire.
This can lead to death or severe injuries.
► Never operate the test tap when it is open. Observe the operating instruc-
tions for the bushing.
► After removing the bushing adapter, close the test tap of the bushing with
the original safety cap to ensure grounding.
Proceed as follows to remove the bushing coupling unit and the bushing
adapter:
1. Remove the connection cable between the control cabinet and bushing
coupling unit.
2. Install the safety cap for the U connection of the bushing coupling unit.
3. Remove the connection cable between the bushing coupling unit and the
bushing adapter.
4. Remove the earthing cable between the transformer and the supporting
plate of the bushing coupling unit.
5. Unscrew the fixing screw on the bushing flange and remove the bushing
coupling unit together with the supporting plate.
6. Install the fixing screw on the bushing flange in accordance with the oper-
ating instructions from the bushing manufacturer.
7. Remove the bushing adapter.

11 Removal
8. WARNING! Install the safety cap onto the bushing test tap. While do-
ing so, follow the notes in the operating instructions from the bushing
manufacturer. Otherwise, an explosion of the bushing can lead to death or
serious injury.
ð The bushing adapter and bushing coupling unit are removed.
11.4 Removing the control cabinet

cure the load.
ü Disconnect all connection lines (sensor cable, control cable to the motor-
drive unit, customer cables, grounds etc.) in the control cabinet.
2. Turn the transport lugs to face the lifting gear.

11 Removal

falling load. Attach the lifting gear such that the cable angle is always less
than 45° in relation to the vertical.
Figure 367: Maximum permissible cable angle for the lifting-gear limit stop of the control cabinet
4. Remove the nuts for fastening the control cabinet.

5. Lift the control cabinet away from the transformer.
6. WARNING! Serious injuries due to the control cabinet tipping and
damage to the cable gland if the control cabinet is set down, transported
or stored upright. Only set down, transport and store the control cabinet
on its back.

12 Technical data
12 Technical data
12.1 Control cabinet

Control cabinet 1200 1500
Dimensions (width x height 779 x 1336 x 483 mm 779 x 1647 x 483 mm
x depth)
Power consumption See nameplate
Power supply See nameplate
Frequency See nameplate
Control and heating circuit See nameplate
voltage supply
Heating power 100 W 150 W
Plug socket 220...240 V AC, max. 10 A
Degree of protection IP66
Potential corrosiveness C4 high, C4 very high
category in accordance C5 high
with ISO 12944-2:2018
Permissible total weight 150 kg 200 kg
Table 165: Technical data for the control cabinet
12.2 Permissible ambient conditions

Permitted ambient temperature during Standard: -25...+50°C
operation Sub-tropic/arid: -25...+55°C
Arctic: -45…+40°C
Storage temperature -40/-30...+70°C (depending on device
configuration)
Installation altitude/air pressure Corresponds to 2000 m above sea level
Table 166: Permissible ambient conditions
12.3 Motor-drive unit
12.3.1 Motor-drive unit (side drive)

The technical data applies to the standard design and may vary depending
on the design delivered. Subject to change without prior notice.
Motor power 0.75 kW 2.0 kW 2.2 kW
Motor circuit power supply 3 AC/N 230/400 V
Current Approx. 1.9 A Approx. 5.2 A Approx. 6.2 A
Frequency 50 Hz
Synchronous speed 1,500 rpm

12 Technical data
Motor power 0.75 kW 2.0 kW 2.2 kW

Rotations of the drive shaft per tap-change 16.5
operation
Duration of the tap-change operation Approx. 5.4 s
Rated torque on the drive shaft 45 Nm 90 Nm 125 Nm
Rotations of the hand crank per tap-change 33 54
operation
Maximum number of operating positions 35
Voltage supply for control circuit and heater AC 230 V
circuit
Power consumption of the control circuit 100 VA / 25 VA
(control/operation)
Load capacity of micro-switches Switching capacity: 100 W
Alternating current mode: AC 250 V; 1 mA…3 A
Direct current mode: DC 220 V; 1 mA…100 mA
Degree of protection IP66 in accordance with DIN EN 60529
Test voltage to ground 2 kV / 60 s
Table 167: ETOS® ED technical data
12.3.2 Technical data for position transmitter equipment
Resistance-type position transmitter module
Standard resistance: 10.0 Ω (0.6 W, +/-1 %) per tap position
The number of desired operating positions determines the number of loaded

resistors.
The decisive power loss of the position transmitter module is 0.6 W because
in the worst-case scenario only one resistor is energized. The supply voltage
should not exceed DC 220 V. If your setup is more demanding, please con-
tact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen.
Position transmitter module with N/O contact range (break-before-make

contact)
AC: 250 V, 0.5 A (resistive loading)
DC: 220 V, 0.2 A (resistive loading)
Minimum voltage level for signal and data processing: 24 V
Position transmitter module with N/O contact range, (make-before-

break-type)
AC, DC: 250 V, 0.02 A (resistive loading)
AC, DC: 24 V, 0.20 A (resistive loading)

12 Technical data
Position transmitter module with N/O contact range, 10 A (make-before-

break-type) for controlling current matching transformer in industrial
applications.
AC, DC: 250 V, 10 A (resistive loading)
Position transmitter module, diode matrix
DC: 220 V, 0.2 A (resistive loading)
12.3.3 Gear motor

Gear motor ETOS® TD
Connection power 0.45…0.75 kW
Voltage supply 3 AC/N
330...480 V
1
Frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Running time of output shaft per tap-change opera- approx. 6.5 s
tion
Maximum number of operating positions 35
Permitted ambient temperature during operation - 25...+ 55 °C
Protection class (DIN EN 60529) IP 66
Weight (including adapter flange) approx. 23.5 kg
Table 168: Gear motor technical data
1
) According to your purchase order, you receive the gear motor in a version
for 50 Hz power systems or 60 Hz power systems. Observe the information
on the nameplate.
Figure 368: Gear motor dimensions

12 Technical data
12.4 Sensors
12.4.1 Vibroacoustics
12.4.1.1 VS 1 vibration sensor

VS 1
Sensor type Piezo vibration sensor
Housing Hermetically sealed
Working temperature -50°C…+125°C
Protection class IP67 in accordance with IEC 60529
Resistance to corrosion 316L, stainless steel
Table 169: VS 1 vibration sensor
12.4.2.1 Bushing adapter

Bushing adapter A001
Bushing type Micafil
RTKF, RTKG
Dimensions Ø 50 x 64 mm
Input Test tap Ø 4 mm (female)
Thread Inner, G¾"
Gasket O-ring, 40 x 2 NBR 70
Output N female connector
Permitted ambient temperature during opera- - 40...+ 90 °C
tion
Degree of protection (IEC 60529) IP 66
Weight approx. 170 g
Table 170: Technical data for the bushing adapter A001

Bushing type HSP
SETFt 1550/420-1800,
SETFt 600/123-2000
Thread Outer, M30 x 1.5
Gasket Flat gasket, 26 x 35 x 2, 65 Shore

12 Technical data

tion

Bushing type ABB
GOB 1050-750-1100-0.6-B
GSA 123-OA/1600/0.5
GSA 52-OA/2000/0.5
Thread Outer, M30 x 2
tion

Bushing type Trench
COT 750-800
tion
Weight approx. 60 g

12 Technical data

Bushing type HSP
SETFt 750-170-4000
SETFt 1200/245-1250
SETFt 1425-420-1600
SESTFt 1050-245-B E6 B
SESTFt 1425-420-B E6 B-1600A
EKTG 72.5-800 kV
Gasket O-ring, 22 x 2.5 NBR 70
tion

Bushing type PCORE
CSA standard POC series II
ABB
GOE, GSB (245...550 kV)
Thread Outer, 2¼" – 12 UNF
tion

12 Technical data

Bushing type PCORE
B-81515-57-70
Input Test tap Ø 5 mm (contact spring)
Thread Outer, 1¼" – 12 UNF
tion

Bushing type Passoni Villa
PNO, POBO, PCTO, PAO
< 110 kV
Thread Outer, 1⅛" – 12 UNF
Gasket O-ring, 25 x 2.5 NBR 70
tion

Bushing type ABB O Plus C (O Plus Dry)
Exterior diameter x length Ø 35 x 79 mm
Input Test tap Ø 9 mm (contact spring)
Thread Outer, 3/4“ – 14 NS PM
Gasket O-ring, 24 x 2 NVQ 70
Output - 40...+ 90 °C
tion

12 Technical data

12.4.2.2 Bushing coupling unit

Bushing coupling unit
Dimensions (width x height x depth) 117 x 100 x 60 mm
Input N female connector
Output Voltage measurement (U) TNC female connector
Partial discharge measurement (PD);
optional
Capacitance In accordance with order:
0.033...4.7 µF (± 5%)
Output voltage Type (RMS): 75 V AC
Max. (RMS): 125 V AC
Permitted ambient temperature during operation - 40...+ 80 °C
Weight approx. 1.2 kg
Table 179: Technical data for the bushing coupling unit
85 ± 0,5
63 ± 0,5
Ø 4,8
Figure 369: Dimensional drawing for holes in the bushing coupling unit's retaining plate (dimen-
sions in mm)

12 Technical data
12.4.2.3 Connection cable

Connection cable Bushing adapter - Bushing coupling
bushing coupling unit - control cabi-
unit net
Cable type RG142/U
Length 0.8 m 10 m, 15 m or 25 m
based on order
Connector N connector (both TNC connector
sides) (one side)
Minimum permitted bending radius 50 mm
Table 180: Technical data for the connection cable

12 Technical data
12.5 ISM® assemblies
12.5.1 Power supply QS3.241

PULS QS3.241
Permissible voltage range 85...276 VAC
88...375 VDC
UN: 100...240 VAC
UN: 110...300 VDC
Permissible frequency range 50/60 Hz
Maximum power consumption (continuous) 66 W
Table 181: QS3.241 assembly technical data
12.5.2 Power supply CP5.241

PULS CP5.241
Permissible voltage range 85...264 VAC
88...180 VDC
UN: 100...240 VAC
UN: 110...150 VDC
Permissible frequency range 50/60 Hz
Maximum power consumption (continuous) 97.5 W
Table 182: CP5.241 assembly technical data
12.5.3 Power supply PS

8620 8640
Permissible voltage range 18...78 VDC 18...78 VDC
UN: 24...60 VDC UN: 24…60 VDC
Permissible frequency range - -
Nominal power consumption 19.2 W 55 W
Power output 12 W 45 W
Table 183: PS assembly technical data

12 Technical data
12.5.4 UI 1 voltage measurement and current measurement

UI 1
Measurement 1-phase
Voltage measurement UN (RMS): 100 VAC
Measuring range (RMS): 19.6...150 VAC
Measuring accuracy (at UN, -25...+70°C): <± 0.3%
Intrinsic consumption: < 1 VA
Measurement category III in accordance with
IEC 61010-2-30
Current measurement IN: 0.2 / 1 / 5 A
Measuring range: 0.01...2.1 · IN
Overload capacity: 12.5 A (continuous), 500 A (for 1 s)
Measuring accuracy (at IN, -25...+70°C): <± 0.5%
Phase angle Measuring accuracy (-25...+70°C): Ux/Ix <± 0.5°; Ux/
Uy <± 0.3°
Frequency measurement fN: 50 / 60 Hz
Measuring range: 45...65 Hz
Measuring accuracy (-25...+70°C): <± 0.03%
Table 184: Technical data for the UI 1 assembly

N Voltage input for neutral conductor
L Voltage input for phase L
NC -
N L NC NC
NC -
Table 185: Voltage measurement

k Current input for phase L
l Current output for phase L
NC -
NC -
NC -
NC -
Table 186: Current measurement

12 Technical data
ca. 120 mm (4.72 in)

54 mm (2.12 in) 55 mm (2.17 in)
RDY
UI 3
(4.69 in)
N L1 L2 L3
k1
119 mm
l1
k2
l2
k3
l3
Figure 370: UI 1 dimensions
12.5.5 UI 3 voltage measurement and current measurement

UI 3
Measurement 3-phase
IEC 61010-2-30
Current measurement IN: 0.2 / 1 / 5 A
Measuring range: 0.01...2.1 · IN
Overload capacity: 12.5 A (continuous), 500 A (for 1 s)
Uy <± 0.3°
Measuring accuracy (-25...+70°C): <± 0.03%
Table 187: Technical data for the UI 3 assembly

L1 Voltage input for phase L1 (UI 3)
L2 Voltage input for phase L2
N L1 L2 L3

12 Technical data

k1 Current input for phase L1
l1 Current output for phase L1
ca. 120 mm (4.72 in)

54 mm (2.12 in) 55 mm (2.17 in)
RDY
UI 3
(4.69 in)
N L1 L2 L3
k1
119 mm
l1
k2
l2
k3
l3
12.5.6 UI 5-3 voltage measurement and current measurement

UI 5-3
Measurement 3-phase
IEC 61010-2-30
Current measurement IN: 5 A
Measuring range: 10 mA...15 A
Overload capacity: 15 A (continuous), 100 A (for 1 s)

12 Technical data
UI 5-3
Uy <± 0.15°
Measuring accuracy: (-25 to +70°C): <±0.002 Hz
Table 190: Technical data of the UI 5-3 assemblies

L1
NC Not used
NC
L2
NC Not used
NC
L3
N

k1
l1
k2
l2
k3
l3

1A, 1B, No function
1C, 2A,
1A 2B, 2C
1B
1C
2A
2B
2C
Table 193: Relay

12 Technical data
ca. 120 mm (4.72 in)

109 mm (4.29 in) 55 mm (2.17 in)
UI 5-3
L1 k1
(4.69 in)
NC l1
L2 k2
NC l2
L3 k3
119 mm
N l3
+
-
Figure 372: UI 5-3 dimensions
12.5.7 UI 5-4 voltage measurement and current measurement

UI 5-4
Measurement 3-phase
Measuring range (RMS): 10...300 VAC
Measuring accuracy (at UN, -25...+70°C): < ±0.2%
IEC 61010-2-30
Current measurement IN: 5 A
Measuring range: 10 mA...15 A
Overload capacity: 15 A (continuous), 100 A (for 1 s)
Phase angle Measuring accuracy (-25 to +70°C): Vx/Ix <±0.6°; Vx/
Uy <±0.15°
Measuring accuracy: (-25 to +70°C): <±0.002 Hz
Table 194: UI 5-4 voltage measurement/current measurement

12 Technical data

L1 Voltage input phase L1
L1
NC Not used
NC
L2
NC Not used
NC
L3
N Voltage input neutral conductor
N

k1 Current input phase L1
k1
l1 Current output phase L1
l1
k2
l2
k3
l3

1A, 1B, No function
1C, 2A,
1A 2B, 2C
1B
1C
2A
2B
2C
Table 197: Relay

12 Technical data
ca. 120 mm (4.72 in)

109 mm (4.29 in) 55 mm (2.17 in)
UI 5-3
L1 k1
(4.69 in)
NC l1
L2 k2
NC l2
L3 k3
119 mm
N l3
+
-
12.5.8 Voltage measurement U 3

U 3
Measurement 3-phase
Voltage inputs 4 (electrically isolated)
Nominal voltage UN (AC) 10…250 V
UN typical (AC) 110 V, 110 V/√3, 230 V
Max. measured voltage 150% UN when UN ≤ 110 V
110% UN when UN ≤ 250 V
Measuring accuracy Deviation < ±0.3% · UN
Frequency measurement fN: 16.7, 50 or 60 Hz
Measuring range: fN ±15%
Table 198: U 3 assemblies technical data

4 Common reference output 1
4 3 Common reference output 0
3
2 Digital output 1
2
1 Digital output 0
1
Table 199: Connector X1

12 Technical data

10 Not used
10 9 Voltage input phase 1
9
8 Voltage input neutral conductor 1
8
7 Voltage input phase 2
7
6 6 Voltage input neutral conductor 3

5 5 Voltage input phase 3
4
3
3 Not used
2
2 Voltage input phase 4
1
12.5.9 Current measurement I 3

I 3
Measurement 3-phase
Nominal current IN 0.5...6 A
1 A / 2 A / 5 A / 6 A
Overload capability 2 x IN
Measuring accuracy Deviation < ±0.5% · IN
Rated frequency 50 / 60 / 16.7 Hz
Intrinsic consumption < 0.1 W up to I = 1 A
< 0.3 W up to I = 5 A
Table 201: I 3 assembly technical data

6 Current input phase 1
6 5 Current input neutral conductor 1
I1
5 4 Current input phase 2
3 Current input neutral conductor 2
4
I2 2 Current input phase 3
3
1 Current input neutral conductor 3
2
I3
1

12 Technical data
12.5.10 DIO 28-15 digital inputs and outputs

DIO 28-15
Inputs (plug- Quantity 28
based electrical
isolation) Logical 0 0...10 V AC (RMS)
0...10 V DC
Logical 1 18...260 V AC (RMS)
18...260 V DC (RMS)
Input current min. 1.3 mA
Simultaneity factor max. 50%
(at 70°C ambient tempera-
ture and input voltage
≥ 230 V)
Outputs (floating Number (number of change- 15 (9)
relay outputs) over contacts in parenthe-
ses)
Contact load capacity Alternating current mode:
UN: 230 V AC; IN: 5 A
Direct current mode: See diagram
Simultaneity factor Up to 60°C: 100%, > 60°C:
(if output is loaded with 5 A) -5%/K
Table 203: Technical data for the DIO 28-15 assembly
300
100
Ohmic load
50
U 40
30
20
10
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 A 20
I
Figure 374: Contact load capacity of digital outputs with resistive load

12 Technical data
CAUTION Electric shock!

The inputs of the DIO assembly have plug-based electrical isolation. A mix-
ture of voltage ranges (e.g. extra low voltage and low voltage) or various
phases within a plug can lower the protection against electric shock.
► Use the same voltage ranges within a plug.
► Use the same phase within a plug.

1 9 17 25 Input
2 10 18 26 Input
3 11 19 27 Input
4 12 20 28 Input
5 13 21 29 Input
6 14 22 30 Input
7 15 23 31 Input
8 16 24 32 Common
Table 204: Digital inputs

1A 6 A 11 A Break contact
1C 6C 11C Source contact
1B 6B 11B Make contact
2 A 7 A 12 A Break contact
3 A 8 A 13 A Break contact
Table 205: Digital outputs

12 Technical data
ca. 150 mm (5.9 in)

164 mm (6.46 in) 93 mm (3.66 in)
DIO 28-15
DO DO DO
CAN
15B 15C 14B 14C 13B 13C 13A 12B 12C 12A 11B 11C 11A
10B 10C 9B 9C 8B 8C 8A 7B 7C 7A 6B 6C 6A
5B 5C 4B 4C 3B 3C 3A 2B 2C 2A 1B 1C 1A
(4.69 in)
DI DI DI DI
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
RUN
9
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
2
INIT
3
119 mm
ERR
4
F0 1
AB E
23 6
CD
H
45
789
6
F0 1
AB E
23 6
CD
7
L
45
789
8
+
24V DC
-
Figure 375: DIO 28-15 dimensions
12.5.11 Digital inputs and outputs DIO 42-20 (HL)

DIO 42-20 DIO 42-20 HL
Inputs (plug-based Quantity 42
electrical isolation)
Logical 0 0...10 V AC (RMS) 0...40 V AC (RMS)
0 to 10 V DC 0 to 40 V DC
Logical 1 18...260 V AC (RMS) 170...260 V AC (RMS)
18 to 260 V DC 170 to 260 V DC
Input current Typ. 1.3 mA (regardless of U)
Simultaneity factor At 70°C and U ≥ 230 V: max. 50%
Outputs (floating re- Number (number of 20 (12)
lay outputs) change-over contacts in
parentheses)
Contact load capacity Max. AC: 230 VAC; 5 A
Max. DC: See diagram
Simultaneity factor Up to 60°C: 100%, > 60°C: -5%/K
Table 206: Technical data for the DIO 42-20 (HL) assemblies

12 Technical data
300
100
Ohmic load
50
U 40
30
20
10
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 A 20
I

The inputs of the DIO assembly have plug-based electrical isolation. A mix-

1 9 17 25 33 41 Input
2 10 18 26 34 42 Input
3 11 19 27 35 43 Input
4 12 20 28 36 44 Input
5 13 21 29 37 45 Input
6 14 22 30 38 46 Input
7 15 23 31 39 47 Input
8 16 24 32 40 48 Common
Table 207: Digital inputs

12 Technical data

1A 6A 11A 16A Break contact
1C 6C 11C 16C Source contact
1B 6B 11B 16B Make contact
Table 208: Digital outputs
ca. 150 mm (5.9 in)

219 mm (8,62 in) 93 mm (3.66 in)
DIO 42-20
DO DO DO DO
CAN
20B 20C 19B 19C 18B 18C 18A 17B 17C 17A 16B 16C 16A
15B 15C 14B 14C 13B 13C 13A 12B 12C 12A 11B 11C 11A
10B 10C 9B 9C 8B 8C 8A 7B 7C 7A 6B 6C 6A
5B 5C 4B 4C 3B 3C 3A 2B 2C 2A 1B 1C 1A
(4,69 in)
DI DI DI DI DI DI
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
RUN
1
9
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
2
INIT
3
119 mm
ERR
4
F01
AB E
23 6
CD
H
5
45
789
6
F01
AB E
23 6
CD
7
L
45
789
8
+
24V DC
Figure 377: DIO 42-20 dimensions
12.5.12 Digital inputs DI 16-24 V

DI 16-24V
Inputs 2 x 8, plug-based electrical isolation
Nominal voltage 24 V DC
24 VAC (bei 50 Hz +-10%; 60 Hz +-10%)
Max. operating voltage 31.2 V DC
28 VAC
Logical 0 ≤ 12 V
Logical 1 ≥ 18 V

12 Technical data
DI 16-24V
Input current 2.4 mA
Simultaneity factor (at 65°C -
ambient temperature)
Table 209: DI 16-24V assembly technical data

10 Common reference (common)
10 9 Common reference (common)
9
8 Input 7
8
7 Input 6
7
6
6 Input 5
5 5 Input 4
4 4 Input 3
3
3 Input 2
2
2 Input 1
1
1 Input 0
Table 210: Connector X1 (group 0)

9
8 Input 17
8
7 Input 16
7
6
6 Input 15
5 5 Input 14
4 4 Input 13
3
3 Input 12
2
2 Input 11
1
1 Input 10

12 Technical data

DI 16-48V
Nominal voltage 48 VDC / 60 VDC
48 VAC (bei 50 Hz +-10%; 60 Hz +-10%)
Max. operating voltage 78 V DC
57 VAC
Logical 0 ≤ 24 V
Logical 1 ≥ 36 V
Simultaneity factor (at 65°C -

9
8 Input 7
8
7 Input 6
7
6
6 Input 5
5 5 Input 4
4 4 Input 3
3
3 Input 2
2
2 Input 1
1
1 Input 0

12 Technical data

9
8 Input 17
8
7 Input 16
7
6
6 Input 15
5 5 Input 14
4 4 Input 13
3
3 Input 12
2
2 Input 11
1
1 Input 10

DI 16-110V
Nominal voltage 110 VDC
120 VAC (bei 50 Hz +-10%; 60 Hz +-10%)
144 VAC
Logical 0 ≤ 55 V
Logical 1 ≥ 82.5 V
Simultaneity factor (at 65°C Max. 13 inputs

12 Technical data

9
8 Input 7
8
7 Input 6
7
6
6 Input 5
5 5 Input 4
4 4 Input 3
3
3 Input 2
2
2 Input 1
1
1 Input 0

9
8 Input 17
8
7 Input 16
7
6
6 Input 15
5 5 Input 14
4 4 Input 13
3
3 Input 12
2
2 Input 11
1
1 Input 10

DI 16-220V
Nominal voltage 220 V DC
230 VAC (bei 50 Hz +-10%; 60 Hz +-10%)
253 VAC
Logical 0 ≤ 110 V
Logical 1 ≥ 165 V

12 Technical data
DI 16-220V
Simultaneity factor (at 65°C Max. 13 inputs

9
8 Input 7
8
7 Input 6
7
6
6 Input 5
5 5 Input 4
4 4 Input 3
3
3 Input 2
2
2 Input 1
1
1 Input 0

9
8 Input 17
8
7 Input 16
7
6
6 Input 15
5 5 Input 14
4 4 Input 13
3
3 Input 12
2
2 Input 11
1
1 Input 10

12 Technical data
12.5.16 Digital outputs DO 8

DO 8
Outputs (plug-based electrical isola- 8 relays
tion) 4 groups per module
Switching voltage DC: 24 V, 48 V, 60 V, 110 V, 220 V
AC: 110 V, 230 V
Contact load capacity Min.: 5 V DC, 10 mA
Max. DC: See diagram
Max. AC: 250 V; 3 A (8 active outputs)

or 5 A (4 active outputs)
Table 221: DO 8 assembly technical data
300
100
Ohmic load
50
U 40
30
20
10
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 A 20
I

The outputs of the DO assembly have plug-based electrical isolation. A mix-

12 Technical data

4 Common reference (common) output 1
4 3 Common reference (common) output 0
3
2 Output 1
2
1 Output 0
1

3
2 Output 3
2
1 Output 2
1

3
2 Output 5
2
1 Output 4
1

3
2 Output 7
2
1 Output 6
1

12 Technical data
12.5.17 AIO 2 analog inputs and outputs

Channels (input or output) 2
Inputs Measuring range 0...10 V
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
Load resistance Max. 300 Ω
(0/4...20 mA)
Outputs Signal range 0...10 V
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
(0/4...20 mA)
Resistor contact series Maximum resistance 100 Ω...10 kΩ,
max. 35 tap positions
Table 226: Technical data for the AIO 2 assembly

1 6 I OUT (+): Current output +
2 7 I/U IN (+) U OUT (+): Voltage input
3 8 I/U IN (-): Voltage input -, current in-
put -
4 9 I/U OUT (-): Voltage output -, current
output -
5 10 Not used
ca. 120 mm (4.72 in)

54 mm (2.12 in) 55 mm (2.17 in)
RDY
AIO
1 11
2 12
3 13
(4.69 in)
4 14
5 15
+
24V DC
119 mm
6 16
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20
Figure 379: AIO 2 dimensions

12 Technical data

AIO 4
Channels (input or output) 4
Inputs Measuring range 0...10 V
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
(0/4...20 mA)
Outputs Signal range 0...10 V
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
(0/4...20 mA)
Resistor contact series Maximum resistance 100 Ω...10 kΩ,
max. 35 tap positions

1 6 11 16 I OUT (+): Current output +
2 7 12 17 I/U IN (+) U OUT (+): Voltage input
3 8 13 18 I/U IN (-): Voltage input -, current in-
put -
4 9 14 19 I/U OUT (-): Voltage output -, current
output -
5 10 15 20 Not used
ca. 120 mm (4.72 in)

54 mm (2.12 in) 55 mm (2.17 in)
RDY
AIO
1 11
2 12
3 13
(4.69 in)
4 14
5 15
+
24V DC
119 mm
6 16
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20

12 Technical data

AIO 8
Channels (input) 8, max. 4 of these are current inputs
(channels 1, 2, 7, 8)
Inputs Measuring range 0 to 10 V
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
(0/4...20 mA)
Electrical isolation of the channels and to the 500 V
system
Interface Channel/pin Description

Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 Ch6 Ch7 Ch8
1 6 11 16 21 26 31 36 I OUT (+): Current output +
2 7 12 17 22 27 32 37 I/U IN (+) U OUT (+): Voltage input +, cur-
rent input +, voltage output +
3 8 13 18 23 28 33 38 I/U IN (-): Voltage input -, current input -
4 9 14 19 24 29 34 39 I/U OUT (-): Voltage output -, current output
-
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 Not used
ca. 120 mm (4.72 in)

54 mm (2.12 in) 55 mm (2.17 in)
RDY
AIO
1 11
2 12
3 13
(4.69 in)
4 14
5 15
+
24V DC
119 mm
6 16
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20

12 Technical data
12.5.20 Analog inputs AI 4-T

AI 4-T
Inputs (electrically isolated) 2x2
Measuring range 40…400 Ω (Pt100)
400…4,000 Ω (Pt1000)
Accuracy 0.19% at 0…+50°C
0.4% at -40…+70°C
Reference current 0.25 mA
Max. conductor resistance outgo- 300 Ω
ing and return conductor
Table 232: AI 4-T assembly technical data

10 IREF1- current output 1
10 9 IN V1- voltage input 1
9
8 IN V1+ voltage input 1
8
7 IREF1+ current output 1
7
6
6 Not used
5 5 Not used
4 4 IREF0- current output 0
3
3 IN V0- voltage input 0
2
1

10 IREF3- current output 3
10 9 IN V3- voltage input 3
9
8
7
6
6 Not used
5 5 Not used
4 4 IREF2- current output 2
3
3 IN V2- voltage input 2
2
1

12 Technical data
12.5.21 Analog inputs AI 4

AI 4
Inputs (electrically isolated) 4x1
Measuring range -20…+20 mA, overcurrent approx. 20%
-10…+10 V, overvoltage approx. 30%
Accuracy 0.15% at 25°C
Current
0.2% at 0…50°C
0.3% at -20…70°C
0.4% at -40…70°C
Voltage
0.4% at 0…50°C
0.5% at -20…70°C
0.6% at -40…70°C
Input impedance 52 Ω at ±20 mA
20.5 kΩ at ±10 V
Table 235: AI 4 assembly technical data

4 V0 U- voltage input
4 3 V0 I- current input
3
2 V0 I+ current output
2
1 V0 U+ voltage output
1

3
2
1

12 Technical data

3
2
1

3
2
1
12.5.22 Analog outputs AO 4

AI 4
Outputs (electrically isolated) 4x1
Signal range Max. -10...+10 V on min. 1 kΩ load
Max. -10...+10 mA on max. 500 Ω load
Max. -20…+20 mA on max. 1 kΩ load
Accuracy 0.3% at 25°C
0.4% at 0°C to 50°C
0.7% at -20°C to 70°C
0.8% at -40°C to 70°C
Table 240: AO 4 assembly technical data

4 Not used
4 3 V0- current input
3
2 V0+ current output
2
1 Not used
1

12 Technical data

4 Not used
3
2
1 Not used
1

4 Not used
3
2
1 Not used
1

4 Not used
3
2
1 Not used
1
12.5.23 CPU (central processing unit) I

CPU I
Processor 266 MHz
RAM 256 MB
Interfaces 1x serial RS232/485 (electrically isolated)
3x Ethernet 10/100 Mbps
1x USB 2.0
1x CAN (electrically isolated)
1x CAN
NVRAM (SRAM with battery 256 kB
backup)
Application memory 1 GB
Power supply +24 V DC (18...36 V DC)
Table 245: Technical data for the CPU I assembly

12 Technical data

2 RXD (RS232)
3 TXD (RS232)
5 GND (RS232, RS485)
6 RXD+/TXD+ (RS485)
9 RXD-/TXD- (RS485)
Table 246: COM2 (RS232, RS485)

1 VCC
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
Table 247: USB 2.0

1 TxD+
2 TxD-
3 RxD+
4 NC
5 NC
6 RxD-
7 NC
8 NC-
Table 248: ETH1, ETH 2.1, ETH 2.2 (RJ45)

2 CAN-L
3 CAN-GND
7 CAN-H
Table 249: CAN1, CAN2

12 Technical data
ca. 120 mm (4.72 in)

109 mm (4.29 in) 55 mm (2.17 in)
CPU
RUN
INIT
9
COM 1
CAN 1
CAN 2
ERR
(4.69 in)
2 4 6
0 8 L
1
E C A
2 4 6
8 H
C A
TEST
9
PROG
COM 2
119 mm
RUN
USB2.0
1
24V DC

+
-
Figure 382: CPU dimensions
Optional accessories
CAN bus Terminating resistor
▪ D-SUB plug connector (9-pole)
▪ R = 120 Ω
Connector with terminal strip for directly connecting CAN
lines
Media converter for Adapter from D-SUB (9-pole) to fiber-optic cable:
COM2 interface (only ▪ ACF660/ST: F-ST, 660 nm, range max. 60 m at 40 kBd
RS232)
▪ ACF660/SMA: F-SMA, 660 nm, range max. 60 m at
40 kBd
▪ ACF850/ST: F-ST, 850 nm, range max. 1,000 m at
40 kBd
▪ ACF850/SMA: F-SMA, 850 nm, range max. 1,000 m at
40 kBd
Table 250: Optional accessories
12.5.24 CPU (central processing unit) II

CPU II
Processor 433 MHz
RAM 256 MB
Interfaces 1x serial RS232/485 (electrically isolated)
3x Ethernet 10/100 Mbps
1x USB 2.0
1x CAN (electrically isolated)
1x CAN
backup)
Application memory Max. 4 GB

12 Technical data
CPU II
Power supply +24 V DC (18...36 V DC)
Power consumption Max. 22 W
Table 251: Technical data for the CPU II assembly

2 RXD (RS232)
3 TXD (RS232)
5 GND (RS232, RS485)
6 RXD+/TXD+ (RS485)
9 RXD-/TXD- (RS485)
Table 252: COM2 (RS232, RS485)

1 VCC
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
Table 253: USB 2.0

1 TxD+
2 TxD-
3 RxD+
4 NC
5 NC
6 RxD-
7 NC
8 NC-
Table 254: ETH1, ETH 2.1, ETH 2.2 (RJ45)

12 Technical data

2 CAN-L
3 CAN-GND
7 CAN-H
Table 255: CAN1, CAN2
ca. 120 mm (4.72 in)

109 mm (4.29 in) 55 mm (2.17 in)
CPU
RUN
INIT
9
9
COM 1
CAN 1
ERR CAN 2
(4.69 in)
2 4 6
0 8 L
1
1
E C A
2 4 6
8 H
C A
TEST
9
PROG
COM 2
119 mm
RUN
USB2.0
24V DC

+
-
Figure 383: CPU dimensions
Optional accessories
CAN bus Terminating resistor
▪ D-SUB plug connector (9-pole)
▪ R = 120 Ω
Connector with terminal strip for directly connecting CAN
lines
Media converter for Adapter from D-SUB (9-pole) to fiber-optic cable:
COM2 interface (only ▪ ACF660/ST: F-ST, 660 nm, range max. 60 m at 40 kBd
RS232)
▪ ACF660/SMA: F-SMA, 660 nm, range max. 60 m at
40 kBd
▪ ACF850/ST: F-ST, 850 nm, range max. 1,000 m at
40 kBd
▪ ACF850/SMA: F-SMA, 850 nm, range max. 1,000 m at
40 kBd
Table 256: Optional accessories

12 Technical data
12.5.25 CPU (central processing unit)

CPU
Processor 800 MHz
RAM 512 MB
backup)
Application memory 4 GB
Interfaces 1x serial RS232
1x serial RS485/422 (electrically isolated)
2x Ethernet 10/100 Mbps (electrically isolated)
Outputs 2 x 1 (electrically isolated) for watchdog/error mes-
saging
Nominal voltage 24/48/60 V DC
Continuous current 1 A

Table 257: Technical data of CPU assembly
300
100
Ohmic load
50
U 40
30
20
10
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 A 20
I
Figure 384: Contact load capacity of CPU-X1 digital outputs with resistive load

12 Technical data

1 WD_COM
6 2 WD_NC
5
3 WD_NO
4
4 ER_COM
3
2 5 ER_NC
1 6 ER_NO
Table 258: Connector X1 (watchdog, error)

1 TxD+
2 TxD-
3 RxD+
4 NC
5 NC
6 RxD-
7 NC
8 NC-
Table 259: Connector X2, X3 (Ethernet)

1 TXD-/RXD- (RS485/422)
2 TXD+/RXD+ (RS485/422)
3 NC
4 NC
5 NC
6 GND
7 RXD- (RS422)
8 RXD+ (RS422)
Table 260: Connector X4 (RS485/422)

12 Technical data

1 CTS (I)
2 RTS (O)
3 VCC/OUT 5 V/12 V
4 TXD (O)
5 RXD (I)
6 GND
7 DCD (I)
8 DTR (O)
Table 261: Connector X5 (RS232)
12.5.26 System networking MC 2-2

MC 2-2
Description Media converter
Interfaces 2x RJ45
2x duplex LC (SFP)
RJ45 Max. 100 m (per section)
10/100 Mbit/s
Cable impedance 100 Ω
Fiber-optic cable Max. 2,000 m
100 Mbit/s
Light-emitting diode: class 1
Wave length: 1310 nm
Max. optical output power: <1 mW (in accordance
with IEC 60825-1:2014)
Table 262: Technical data for the MC 2-2 assembly

1 TxD+
2 TxD-
3 RxD+
4 NC
5 NC
6 RxD-
7 NC
8 NC-
Table 263: ETHxx (RJ45)

12 Technical data
Interface Description
Fiber glass 50/125 and 62.5/125 multimode
Table 264: ETHxx (duplex LC SFP)
ca. 150 mm (5.9 in)

54 mm (2.12 in) 93 mm (3.66 in)
(4.69 in) MC 2-2
ETH12
ETH22
119 mm
ETH21
ETH11
+ +
24V DC
24V DC
- -
Figure 385: MC2-2 dimensions
12.5.27 System networking SW 3-3

SW 3-3
Description Managed fast Ethernet switch per IEEE 802.3,
store-and-forward switching
Interfaces Media converters:
▪ 1x RJ45
▪ 1x duplex LC (SFP)
Managed switch with redundancy function:
▪ 2x RJ45
▪ 2x duplex LC (SFP)
Redundancy protocols PRP1, RSTP
Time synchronization PTPv2 (IEEE 1588-2008)
10/100 Mbps
Cable impedance 100 Ω
Fiber-optic cable Max. 2,000 m
100 Mbps
Light-emitting diode: class 1
Wavelength: 1,310 nm
Max. optical output power: <1 mW (in accordance
with IEC 60825-1:2014)
Table 265: Technical data for the SW 3-3 assembly

12 Technical data
1)
Factory setting
1 TxD+
2 TxD-
3 RxD+
4 NC
5 NC
6 RxD-
7 NC
8 NC-
Table 266: ETHxx (RJ45)
Interface Description
Fiber glass 50/125 and 62.5/125 multimode
Table 267: ETHxx (duplex LC SFP)
ca. 150 mm (5.9 in)

54 mm (2.12 in) 93 mm (3.66 in)
MC 2-2
(4.69 in)
ETH12
ETH22
119 mm
ETH21
ETH11
+ +
24V DC
24V DC
- -
Figure 386: SW3-3 dimensions
12.5.28 System networking COM-ETH

COM-ETH
Interfaces 5x Ethernet via RJ45
10/100 Mbps
Redundancy protocols HSR, PRP, RSTP
Table 268: COM-ETH assembly technical data

12 Technical data

1 TxD+
2 TxD-
3 RxD+
4 NC
5 NC
6 RxD-
7 NC
8 NC-
Table 269: Connectors X1…X5 (Ethernet)
12.5.29 System networking BEM1/BES1

BEM 1 BES 1
Description Master Slave
Interfaces 1 fiber-optic cable
Fiber-optic cable Max. length: 40 m
(Polymeric optical fiber) Min. bending radius: 30 mm
Integrated power supply No Yes
Permissible voltage range - 18...34 V DC
UN: 24 VDC
Power consumption - 14 W
Table 270: Technical data for the BEM 1 and BES 1 assemblies
12.5.30 System networking BES

BES
Interfaces 2x Ethernet via RJ45
10/100 Mbps
Input voltage 18…78 VDC
UN 24…60 VDC
Input current 0.6/0.3/0.25 A (24/48/60 VDC)
Table 271: BES assembly technical data

12 Technical data

1 Power supply (+)
2 Not used
3 Not used
4 Power supply (-)
Table 272: Terminal X1

1 TxD+
2 TxD-
3 RxD+
4 NC
5 NC
6 RxD-
7 NC
8 NC-
Table 273: Jacks X2, X3 (Ethernet)
12.5.31 VI 4 vibration sensor input module

VI 4
Analog inputs For vibration sensors based on the IEPE
standard
Input voltage 24 V DC
Power consumption Max. 200 mA
Operating temperature -25 °C...+70 °C
Relative humidity operation 5…95% non-condensing
Storage temperature -40 °C...+85 °C
Relative humidity storage 5…95% condensing
Table 274: VI 4 vibration sensor input module

12 Technical data
12.6 Standards and directives
Motor-drive unit
IEC 60214-1 Tap-changers - Part 1: Performance requirements and
test methods
Table 275: Motor-drive unit
Control cabinet electrical safety

IEC 61439-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Part
1: General rules
IEC 61439-2 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Part
2: Power switchgear and controlgear assemblies
Table 276: Control cabinet electrical safety
Control cabinet electromagnetic compatibility

IEC 61000-6-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-4: Generic
standards - Emission standard for industrial environments
IEC 61000-6-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-5: Generic
standards - Immunity for equipment used in power station
and substation environment
Table 277: Control cabinet electromagnetic compatibility
Control cabinet environmental durability tests

IEC 60529 IP66
IPXXB (when control cabinet doors are open)
Table 278: Control cabinet environmental durability tests
Vibration and shock durability tests

IEC 60721-3-4:2019 4M11
IEC 60721-3-4:1995 100/120 Hz corresponds to the grid frequency 50/60 Hz
4 m/s²
1 cycle, test duration 30 h (10 h in each of the 3 main
axes)
Function test throughout the entire switching range at the
beginning and end of the test with active test bench
Table 279: Vibration and shock durability tests

13 Drawings
13 Drawings

Datum Name Dokumentnummer
Gez. 09.11.2020 NOVACKJ SED 7754494 000 00 © MASCHINENFABRIK REINHAUSEN GMBH 2020
THE REPRODUCTION, DISTRIBUTION AND UTILIZATION OF THIS DOCUMENT AS WELL AS THE COMMUNICATION OF ITS CONTENTS TO OTHERS WITHOUT EXPRESS AUTHORIZATION IS
Gepr. 12.11.2020 STEMPFHUBERJ Änderungsnummer Maßstab PROHIBITED. OFFENDERS WILL BE HELD LIABLE FOR THE PAYMENT OF DAMAGES. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED IN THE EVENT OF THE GRANT OF A PATENT, UTILITY MODEL OR DESIGN.
Norm. 13.11.2020 WANNINGER 1104191 1:10
173
750 84
angegeben
nicht anders
Maßangaben
in mm, soweit
1370
713
779
O 25
483
446
COMPENSATING OFFSETS
SHIM FOR
182,5
( VIEWED FROM BEHIND )

38
17
ARRANGEMENT OF FIXING HOLES ON PROTECTIVE HOUSING

APPROX. 1159 IF OPENED 90°
TANK
1:5
A-A
WALL OF TRANSFORMER
ATTACHMENT OF PROTECTIVE HOUSING

51,5 323
MAX. 5 MM OFFSET
OVER ALL WALL BRACKETS 89
DIMENSION DRAWING
ETOS SIDE DRIVE 1200
MOTOR-DRIVE UNIT ETOS®
68 1213 55

248
631
A
24
70
650
700
-
Materialnummer
M12
DEPENDING ON THE
Serialnummer
HAND CRANK
MOUNTING HEIGHT: APPROX. 500 TO 1000 MM

THE LEFT OR TO THE RIGHT
ARRANGEMENT OF THE PINS.
Blatt
101334990E 1 / 1
THE COVER CAN BE OPENED TO
A3
Datum Name Dokumentnummer
Gez. 09.11.2020 NOVACKJ SED 7751688 000 00 © MASCHINENFABRIK REINHAUSEN GMBH 2020
Gepr. 12.11.2020 STEMPFHUBERJ Änderungsnummer Maßstab PROHIBITED. OFFENDERS WILL BE HELD LIABLE FOR THE PAYMENT OF DAMAGES. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED IN THE EVENT OF THE GRANT OF A PATENT, UTILITY MODEL OR DESIGN.
Norm. 13.11.2020 WANNINGER 1104191 1:10
173 1681
A
750 84
angegeben
nicht anders
Maßangaben
in mm, soweit
O 25
483
446
182,5
713
779
38
SHIM FOR
( VIEWED FROM BEHIND )

17
A

TANK
1:5
A-A
WALL OF TRANSFORMER
51,5 323

MAX. 5 MM OFFSET 89
DIMENSION DRAWING
ETOS SIDE DRIVE 1500
68,5 OVER ALL WALL BRACKETS 1524 55

248
631
A
24
70
650
700
-
DEPENDING ON THE
Materialnummer
M12
HAND CRANK
Serialnummer
MOUNTING HEIGHT: APPROX. 500 TO 1000 MM
THE LEFT OR TO THE RIGHT
ARRANGEMENT OF THE PINS.

THE COVER CAN BE OPENED TO
Blatt
101334970E 1 / 1
A3
DATE NAME DOCUMENT NO.
DFTR. 08.03.2021 STEMPFHUBERJ SED 7754572 000 01 MASCHINENFABRIK REINHAUSEN GMBH COPYRIGHT RESERVED
CHKD. 08.03.2021 WESOLOWSKIP CHANGE NO. SCALE PROHIBITED. OFFENDERS WILL BE HELD LIABLE FOR THE PAYMENT OF DAMAGES. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED IN THE EVENT OF THE GRANT OF A PATENT, UTILITY MODEL OR DESIGN.
STAND. 08.03.2021 KLEYN 1106922 1:10
139 1336
750 84
IN mm
A
NOTED
DIMENSION
EXCEPT AS
B
483
446
713
779
38
SHIM FOR
(VIEWED FROM BACK SIDE)

B
1:5
OPTIONAL: PT100
20

TANK
1:5
A-A
WALL OF TRANSFORMER
51,5 323

MAX. 5 MM OFFSET
332 63 OVER ALL WALL BRACKETS
ETOS TOP DRIVE 1200

DIMENSION DRAWING
68 1213 55

631
24
650
700
(VIEWED FROM BELOW)

DEPENDING ON THE
M12
MATERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
THE DOOR CAN BE OPENED
ARRANGEMENT OF THE HINGES. MOUNTING HEIGHT: APPROX. 500 TO 1000 MM

TO THE LEFT OR TO THE RIGHT
- SHEET
101335000E 1 / 1A3
DATE NAME DOCUMENT NO.
DFTR. 08.03.2021 STEMPFHUBERJ SED 7751759 000 01 MASCHINENFABRIK REINHAUSEN GMBH COPYRIGHT RESERVED
CHKD. 08.03.2021 WESOLOWSKIP CHANGE NO. SCALE PROHIBITED. OFFENDERS WILL BE HELD LIABLE FOR THE PAYMENT OF DAMAGES. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED IN THE EVENT OF THE GRANT OF A PATENT, UTILITY MODEL OR DESIGN.
STAND. 08.03.2021 KLEYN 1106922 1:10
139 1647
750 84
IN mm
NOTED
DIMENSION
EXCEPT AS
B
483
446
713
779
38
SHIM FOR
(VIEWED FROM BACK SIDE)

B
1:5
OPTIONAL: PT100
20

TANK
1:5
A-A
WALL OF TRANSFORMER

51,5 323
MAX. 5 MM OFFSET
332 63
ETOS TOP DRIVE 1500

DIMENSION DRAWING
68 OVER ALL WALL BRACKETS 1524 55

631
24
650
700
(VIEWED FROM BELOW)

DEPENDING ON THE
M12
MATERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
THE DOOR CAN BE OPENED
ARRANGEMENT OF THE HINGES. MOUNTING HEIGHT: APPROX. 500 TO 1000 MM

TO THE LEFT OR TO THE RIGHT
- SHEET
101334980E 1 / 1A3
Glossary
Glossary
CSO Load sign convention
Change-over selector operation Definition for describing electrical circuits. The ar-
rows for current rating and voltage on a "con-
DGA sumer" absorbing electrical power (e.g. a resis-
tor) face the same direction. U*I is the power ab-
Analysis of the gases dissolved in the oil (Dis-
sorbed by the component.
solved Gas Analysis)
Motor Current Index

DTR
Integral (area under) of the motor current curve
Dynamic Transformer Rating
over the duration of the tap-change operation.
EMC
MQTT
Electromagnetic compatibility
Message Queuing Telemetry Transport. A net-
work protocol for machine-to-machine communi-
Generator sign convention cation which enables the transmission of ISM®
Definition for describing electrical circuits. The ar- data in the form of messages between two de-
rows for current rating and voltage on a "con- vices.
sumer" absorbing electrical power (e.g. a resis-
tor) face opposite directions. U*I is the power MR
generated in the component and -U*I is the
power absorbed by the component.
PRD
GPI
Pressure relief device
General Purpose Input
PRP
GPO
Redundancy protocol in accordance with IEC
General Purpose Output
62439-3 (Parallel Redundancy Protocol)
Hot-spot
PTP
Point of highest temperature in the transformer
PTP (Precision Time Protocol) is a standard for
winding.
synchronizing clocks in a computer network. This
synchronization is high-precision.
ICD
IED Capability Description RADIUS
Protocol for authentication of users in computer
IEEE networks in accordance with RFC 2865 (Remote
Worldwide association of engineers, mainly from Authentication Dial-In User Service).
the fields of electrical engineering and IT (Insti-
tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) RSO
Reverse tap-change operation
IFM
Insulation-friendly mode RSTP
Redundancy protocol in accordance with IEEE
IP 802.1D-2004 (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)
Internet Protocol

Glossary
SCADA TDSC
Technical processes are monitored and con- TAPCON® Dynamic Set Point Control
trolled using a computer system (Supervisory
Control and Data Acquisition) TPLE
Transformer Personal Logic Editor
SNMP
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is TSO
a protocol for managing network devices.
Tap selector operation
SNTP
URL
NTP (Network Time Protocol) is a standard for
Uniform Resource Locator
synchronizing clocks in computer systems using
packet-based communication networks. SNTP
(Simple Network Time Protocol) is the simplified
version of NTP.

List of key words
List of key words

List of key words
A CPU I 47 C
DI 16-110V 57
A00x 72 DI 16-220V 57 C002 72
Absolute 293, 296, 298 DI 16-24V 56 C1
Access point 182 DI 16-48V 56 Temporal progression 457
Access rights 243 DIO 54, 55 Cable recommendation 128
according to the day profile 313 DO 8 58 Calculation method 354, 359
Activate 431 I 3 53 Calibration run 425
Activate alternating mode 436 MC 2-2 63 CAN bus 338
Activate cooling stage X 431 PS 47 Capacitance C1
Activate delay time T2 323, 326 QS3.241 46 Temporal progression 457
Activate desired value 1 215 SW 63 Capacitance monitoring
Activate desired value 2 215 U 3 53 Configuring 451
Activate desired value 3 215 UI 49, 50, 51, 52 Changing users 80
Activate desired value 4 215 Asset intelligence 349 Channel (AIO) 142
Activate desired value 5 216 Authentication protocol 246 Circulating reactive current 334
Activate interval 384 Auto logout 172 Circulating reactive current block-
Activate load-dependent mode Automatic daylight saving / stan- ing limit 338
434 dard time 179 circulating reactive current mea-
Activate parallel operation 337 Automatic tap synchronization par- sured input rated value 341
Activate periodic mode 435 allel operation method 215 Circulating reactive current sensi-
Activate RADIUS client 245 Average value interval 212 tivity 338
Activate remote mode 215 COM-ETH 65
Activate syslog 180 Commissioning wizard 155, 170
Active if error 433 B Compensation 327
Active power regulation 323 Bandwidth 315, 320, 323 Z compensation 330
AI 4 62 Bandwidth monitoring 343, 345, Compensation method 329, 331
AI 4-T 61 347 Configure data points 201
AIO 2 58 Bandwidth setting 315 contact wear
AIO 4 59 Baud rate 184, 188, 192, 194, 219 Determining 386
AIO 8 60 BCD tap position message 380, Display 381
Alternating mode 432 403 Control cabinet monitoring 428
Change interval 437 Behavior 294, 302, 377 Control cabinet RH >/>> limit value
Analog inputs and outputs 156, Behavior for reversal of power flow 429
228 301 Control cabinet sensors 430
Anticipated service life 357 Behavior if no communication Control parameters 308, 327
AO 4 62 present 340 Control system 181
ASDU address 185, 188, 190 BES 65 Control system protocol 171
ASDU sequence optimization 186, Blocking 215 Control variable 291, 308
190 Broker 176 Cooling system
ASDU single character confirma- Client user name 177 Alternating mode 436
tion 186 Port 177 Configuring cooling group 431
Assembly Broker address 177 Load-dependent mode 433
A00x 72 Broker port 177 Periodic mode 435
AI 4 62 Bushing adapter 72 Status 440, 443
AI 4-T 61 Installing 116 Counting behavior 377
AIO 58, 59, 60 Bushing coupling unit 72 CP5.241 47
AO 4 62 Installing 119 CPU 48
BES 65 CPU I 47
C002 72 Current monitoring 295
COM-ETH 65 Current transformer
CP5.241 47 Secondary current 275
CPU 48 Current-transformer circuit 276

List of key words
D DNP3 193 F
DNP3 transmission type 193
Data DNS F1/F2 tanδ: tanδ phase L1 455
Import/export 248 activate 176 F1/F2 tanδ: tanδ phase L2 456
Databits 185, 188, 192, 194, 219 DNS server F1/F2 tanδ: tanδ phase L3 456
Date 179 IP address 176 F1/F2-C: Activate capacitance
Date of next maintenance 384, DO 8 58 monitoring 452
385 Dörnenburg 370 F1/F2-C: C1 phase L1 452
Deactivate parallel operation 215 Drive F1/F2-C: C1 phase L2 453
Decimal tap position message 381 Overview 419 F1/F2-C: C1 phase L3 453
Decrease desired value 216 Dual code tap position message F1/F2-C: ΔC1 > 453
Delay time RH 429 381 F1/F2-C: ΔC1 >> 453
Delay time T1 316, 320, 323 Duration 384, 385 F1/F2-tanδ: Activate diss. factor
Delay time T2 317, 321, 325 Duval 369 monit. 455
Delay time temperature 429 Dynamic Transformer Rating 358 F1/F2-tanδ: Perform standardiza-
Desired load stress type 339 tion 456
Desired power factor 338 Feed oil temperature 447
Desired value 309, 320, 323 E Feed water temperature 448
Desired value 1...12 314, 315 Edition 182 Field designation 450
Desired value adjustment Electromagnetic compatibility 135 Follower parallel operation method
Active power-dependent 309 Emergency mode 215
Desired value setting 313 Max. hot-spot temp. 360 Frequency-based cooling system
Destination address 194 Max. top-oil temp. 360 control 437
Device address 194 Emergency mode max. load factor Function monitoring 343, 344, 345,
Device designation 181 360 346, 347, 348
Device ID 182 Emergency operation 41 Function test 164
DFC compatibility 188 Error if no communication present
DGA 362, 363 340
Absolute values 367
G
Event (yellow) 384, 385
Curve 368 Event duration 376 Gateway address 175
Dörnenburg 370 Event memory 237 Gateway target address 175
Duval 369 Events 234 General 169
IEC 60599 371 Acknowledge 234 Remote behavior 170
Rate of increase 368 Configure 235 Generic digital output 217
Rogers 369 Display 234 Generic status message 217
DI 16-110V 57 Exporting 237 GPI 213
DI 16-220V 57 Expert mode 81 GPO 213
DI 16-24V 56 Export 248 Gray code tap position message
DI 16-48V 56 380
Digital inputs and outputs 232
DIO 28-15 54
DIO 42-20 55
H
Displaying the cooling efficiency Hardware 246
445 High-speed return 215
Dissipation factor monitoring Hot-spot 352
Configuring 454 Forecast 356
Dissipation factor tanδ Hot-spot determination 354
Temporal progression 458 Hot-spot forecast 356
Hysteresis 432

List of key words
I K M
I 3 53 Key (shared secret) 246 Main screen 74
ICD file 183 Master parallel operation method
IEC 60870-5-101 184 214
IEC 60870-5-103 187
L Master/follower current blocking
IEC 60870-5-104 189 Language 154 339
IEC 60599 371 Length of line 329 Master/follower switching charac-
IEC 61850 182 Lifting gear teristics 340
IEC: gradient 354 Attachment points 88 Max. permissible OLTC operating
IEC: hot-spot factor 354 Limit value F1/F2-tanδ: Δtanδ > temperature 404
IEC: Insulating paper 357 456 Maximum difference 302
IEC: k21 354 Limit value monitoring 423 Maximum fan speed 440
IEC: k22 354 Link address 185 Maximum tap difference 340
IEC: oil time constant 354 Load-dependent mode MC 2-2 63
IEC: winding exponent 354 Overrun time 435 measured circulating reactive cur-
IED name 182 Switching point 434 rent 336
IEEE: exponent 355 Switch-on delay 434 Measured value display 170
IEEE: gradient 354 Logging off 80 Measured values
IEEE: Oil exponent 355 Logging on 80 Recorder 210
IFM Loss-of-life Setting display 170
Activate rel. LOL limit 360 Display 351 Measuring mode 275
Max. hot-spot temp. 360 Setting calculation 357 Messages 234
Max. load factor 360 Lower limit warning OLTC temp. Min. fan run time after error 440
Max. rel. LOL 360 405 Min. permissible OLTC operating
Max. top-oil temperature 360 Lower load factor threshold 440 temperature 404
Import 248 Lower top-oil temperature thresh- Minimum fan speed 440
Increase desired value 216 old 440 Modbus 191
Increase of the hot-spot tempera- Modbus address 191
ture 355 Modbus type 191
Increase of the upper oil tempera- Mode 293, 296
ture 355 Motor protective switch
Independent regulation 215 Status 419
Inductive resistance load 329 Motor runtime 417, 418
Information Motor runtime monitoring 417, 418
Bushings 456 Motor-drive unit
Inputs Overview 419
Analog 156, 228 MQTT 176
Digital 232 Activate 177
Inrush current blocking 404 Broker 177
Interval type 383 Broker address 177
IO mapping 213 Client user name 177
IP address 174 Port 177
IP address client 190 MR sensor bus 218
IP address client 1...6 182 Configuring 218

List of key words
N P R
Name plate 209 Parallel operation 331, 337 R&X compensation 328
Nameplate CAN bus 338 RADIUS 244
Display 209 Circulating reactive current 334 RADIUS server 245
Navigation 80 Information 342 RADIUS server port 245
Negative power factor display 291 Parallel operation error mes- Rated power of the transformer
Network settings 173 sage 341 355, 359
Nitrogen measurement method Power factor 335 Rates of increase evaluation inter-
364 Tap synchronization 332 val 364
No. of information object address Parallel operation method 337 Ratio of the evaluated power loss
octets 185 Parity 185, 188, 192, 194, 219 355
Nominal current 355 Password 240 Reaction 297, 299
non-working day 313 Password 177 Reactive power regulation 319
Number of ASDU address octets Percentage 293, 296 Reactive power regulation switch-
185 Performing standardization 453 ing direction 419
Number of cause of transmission Periodic mode 433 Receiver IP address 191, 192, 195
octets 185 Interval 435 Reconnect delay time 181
Number of link address octets 185 Switch-on delay 436 Recorder 210
Number of operations 375 Switch-on duration 435 Average value interval 212
Number of starts 411, 442 Phase angle correction 275 Rectifying faults 462
Number of tap-change operations Pos behavior 375 Reference time 187, 189, 190, 195
383 Power characteristics 405 Regulation 308
power factor 335 Regulation mode 291
Power flow Relative loss-of-life >/>> 351
O Negative 299 Relative moisture in oil default
Ohmic resistance load 329 Power flow monitoring 299 value 364
Oil filter unit 407 Power monitoring 297 Remote behavior 170
Oil flow 448 Primary transformer current 275, Repeat unsolicited messages in-
Oil pressure 448 423 definitely 194
Oil pump current 448 Primary transformer voltage 274 Repetition of unsolicited messages
Oil temperature difference 447 Protective device status 460 194
OLTC A/B/C serial number 402 PS 47RES bit test 186
OLTC data 402 PTP 178, 179 Reset diagnostic errors 364
Operating concept 79 PTP hops 179 Response to SCADA disconnec-
Operating duration 411, 442 PTP interface 180 tion 307
operating instructions PTP version 179 Retrofit TAPCON® 2xx 304
Download 156 Return oil temperature 447
Operating mode 40 Return water temperature 448
Select 415 Q Reversal of power flow 299
Status 419 QS3.241 46 RFC 3164 180
Operations counter 375, 419 Quick search 81 RFC 5424 180
Outputs Rogers 369
Analog 156, 228 RSO < 423
Digital 232 RSO > 423
Overvoltage 292 Run-in time evaluation 442

List of key words
S T Overview 74
Transformer age 357
SCADA 181 tanδ Transformer data 274
SCADA disconnection delay time Temporal progression 458 Secondary current 275
307 Tap difference Transformer name 170
Secondary transformer voltage Follower 340 Transformer no-load losses 444
274 Tap position Transformer purchase price 357
Sensor bus Change designation 379 Transformer short-circuit losses
Link functions 221 Display 419 444
Sensor measuring accuracy 363 Tap position message (analog) Transmission procedure 185
Serial interface 184, 187, 192, 193 380, 403 TSO/CSO < 423
Service user access 173 Tap position monitoring 374 TSO/CSO > 423
Service user access activation 173 Tap synchronization 332 Tx statistics 351
Severity level 181 Tap-change operation
SNMP agent 173 Evaluated 393
SNTP 178 Tap-change operations U
SNTP time server 178 Unevaluated 393 U 3 53
SNTP time server 2 179 Tap-change operations waiting UI 1 49
Software time 404 UI 3 50
Information 248 Tap-change supervisory control UI 5-3 51
SSL/TLS encryption 175, 177 393 UI 5-4 52
Standard AVR mode 308 TAPCON® 2xx retrofit 303 UI measuring channels 290
Start time 1...12 314, 315 TAPCON® Dynamic Setpoint Con- Undervoltage 292
State of the bushings 456 trol 309 Unsolicited messages 194
Stop bits 185, 188, 192, 194, 219 Target tap position 379 Upper limit warning OLTC temp.
Subnet mask 174 Target-tap-position operation 215 405
SW 3-3 63 TCP connections 192 Upper load factor threshold 440
Configuration 251 TCP Keepalive 192 Upper top-oil temperature thresh-
Swap circulating reactive current TCP port 189, 192, 193 old 440
polarity 341 Temperature USB interface
Switch off input variable 432 Curve 350 Activating/Deactivating 171
Switch on input variable 432 Monitoring 350 Use relative moisture in oil default
Switching direction monitoring 419 Temperature < 429 value 364
Switching interval monitoring 375, Time 179 User administration 238
377 Time interval 376 User ID code 195
Switching point 432 Time response T1 321, 324 User role 238
Switching pulse pause 417 Time server address 178
Switching pulse time 417 Time shift 179
Switching pulse type 416 Time switch end 410 V
Switching statistics 381 Time switch start 410 VAM analysis 398
Switch-on delay 432 Time synchronization 178 VAM update guidelines 397
Synchronization 425 Activate 178 Visualization
Synchronization interval 178 Reference time 187, 189, 190, Operating concept 79
Syslog 180 195 Visualization release 175
Syslog server 181 Time until auto logout 172 Voltage balance 276
Syslog server port 181 Time zone 179 Voltage increase 331
Syslog standard 180 Timeout 195 Voltage limit value 331
Timeout for response confirmation Voltage monitoring 292
195 Voltage regulation switching direc-
TLS version 175 tion 418
Total tap-change operations 376 Voltage-transformer circuit 275
TPLE 38, 257
Transformer

List of key words
W Winding time constant 355 Z

working day 313
Water flow 448 Z compensation 330
Water pressure 448
Water pump current 448 X
Winding temperature 352 X100 41

Falkensteinstrasse 8
93059 Regensburg
+49 (0)941 4090-0

sales@reinhausen.com
www.reinhausen.com
7815063/04 EN - ETOS® -
- 02/22 - Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2022
THE POWER BEHIND POWER.

ETOS®

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ETOS®

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ETOS®

4 Product description.......................................................................................................... 32

Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2022 7815063/04 EN ETOS® 3

4.2.2 On-load tap-changer regulation .......................................................................................................................... 34

5 Packaging, transport and storage .................................................................................. 83

6 Mounting ........................................................................................................................... 90

4 ETOS® 7815063/04 EN Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2022

6.4.3 Connecting the gear motor................................................................................................................................ 107

Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2022 7815063/04 EN ETOS® 5

7.3.3 Checking tripping of motor protective switch..................................................................................................... 163

6 ETOS® 7815063/04 EN Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2022

8.2.4 Current monitoring ............................................................................................................................................ 295

Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2022 7815063/04 EN ETOS® 7

8.5.6 Setting the tap position message (optional) ...................................................................................................... 379

8 ETOS® 7815063/04 EN Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2022

8.9 Bushings ......................................................................................................................................... 450

9 Fault elimination ............................................................................................................. 462

10 Inspection and maintenance ......................................................................................... 482

Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2022 7815063/04 EN ETOS® 9

10.3 Maintenance ................................................................................................................................... 484

12 Technical data................................................................................................................. 490

10 ETOS® 7815063/04 EN Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2022

12.5.17 AIO 2 analog inputs and outputs....................................................................................................................... 520

13 Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 539

Glossary .......................................................................................................................... 544

List of key words ............................................................................................................ 546

Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2022 7815063/04 EN ETOS® 11

Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH

The following documents also apply in addition to this technical file:

Also observe generally valid legislation, standards, and guidelines as well as

1.4 Notation conventions

1.4.1 Hazard communication system

12 ETOS® 7815063/04 EN Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2022

1.4.1.1 Warning relating to section

Warnings relating to sections refer to entire chapters or sections, sub-sec-

WARNING Type of danger!

1.4.1.2 Embedded warning information

Embedded warnings refer to a particular part within a section. These warn-

DANGER! Instruction for avoiding a dangerous situation.

1.4.1.3 Signal words and pictograms

The following signal words are used:

Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2022 7815063/04 EN ETOS® 13

Pictograms warn of dangers:

Warning of dangerous electrical voltage

Warning of combustible substances

Warning of danger of tipping

Warning of danger of crushing

Table 2: Pictograms used in warning notices

1.4.2 Information system

1.4.3 Instruction system

14 ETOS® 7815063/04 EN Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2022

Instructions which consist of several process steps are structured as follows:

1.4.4 Typographic conventions

Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2022 7815063/04 EN ETOS® 15

2.1 Appropriate use

The product is designed solely for use in stationary industrial large-scale

The following is considered appropriate use:

2.1.1 Motor-drive unit

16 ETOS® 7815063/04 EN Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2022

The following is considered appropriate use of the motor-drive unit function

2.1.2 On-load tap-changer regulation

2.1.3 Bushing monitoring

The following is considered appropriate use of the bushing monitoring func-

Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2022 7815063/04 EN ETOS® 17